Preview only show first 10 pages with watermark. For full document please download

Dpa Report Reference Guide

Rating
Date

October 2018
Size

1014KB
Views

2,373
Categories

Computers & electronics Software Operating systems

Transcript

EMC Data Protection Advisor ® Version 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 302-002-693 REV 03 Copyright © 2001-2017 EMC Corporation All rights reserved. Published January 2017 Dell believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date. The information is subject to change without notice. THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS-IS.“ DELL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION IN THIS PUBLICATION, AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. USE, COPYING, AND DISTRIBUTION OF ANY DELL SOFTWARE DESCRIBED IN THIS PUBLICATION REQUIRES AN APPLICABLE SOFTWARE LICENSE. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. Other trademarks may be the property of their respective owners. Published in the USA. EMC Corporation Hopkinton, Massachusetts 01748-9103 1-508-435-1000 In North America 1-866-464-7381 www.EMC.com 2 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS 23 Preface Chapter 1 Introduction 27 Overview.................................................................................................... 28 Chapter 2 DPA Reports 29 Overview.................................................................................................... 30 Run Reports area menu items.....................................................................30 Chapter 3 Reports by object 61 Backup application reporting...................................................................... 62 Data Domain reporting................................................................................62 Virtualization reporting............................................................................... 63 Database reporting..................................................................................... 63 HP EVA reporting....................................................................................... 64 ACSLS Server reporting............................................................................. 64 Recoverability reporting............................................................................. 65 EMC File Storage reporting........................................................................65 EMC Disk Library reporting........................................................................ 65 RecoverPoint reporting.............................................................................. 66 Tape library reporting................................................................................. 66 Fibre Channel switch reporting...................................................................66 IP switch reporting..................................................................................... 67 Xsigo reporting........................................................................................... 67 System reporting........................................................................................ 67 Data Protection Advisor reporting.............................................................. 68 Enterprise Application reporting................................................................. 68 Chapter 4 Reports by System Template 69 What are system templates?...................................................................... 70 Asset Management system templates........................................................ 70 Battery Configuration.................................................................... 70 Card Configuration........................................................................ 70 Disk / Filesystem Capacity............................................................. 71 Disk Array Configuration................................................................ 71 Disk Configuration......................................................................... 72 Disk Count By State.......................................................................72 Disk Count By Use......................................................................... 72 Disk Summary................................................................................73 Fan Configuration.......................................................................... 73 Fibre Channel Configuration.......................................................... 73 Fibre Channel Port Count.............................................................. 74 Filesystem Configuration............................................................... 74 Filesystem Configuration for Filesystem........................................ 75 Filesystem Configuration Summary................................................77 Filesystem Details.......................................................................... 77 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 3 CONTENTS Filesystem Disk Configuration........................................................78 Filesystem Summary......................................................................78 Filesystem Summary By Client.......................................................78 Host Configuration........................................................................ 79 Host Configuration for Host.......................................................... 79 Host Count.................................................................................... 79 Host OS Distribution......................................................................80 Host Summary By Class................................................................ 80 Host Summary By Platform........................................................... 80 Host Summary By Vendor............................................................. 80 Host Summary By Version............................................................. 80 iSCSI Configuration........................................................................81 LUN Configuration......................................................................... 81 LUNs And Filesystems On Same Volume for ruleset.......................81 Memory Configuration...................................................................82 Memory Configuration Details....................................................... 82 Multiple Tape Drive Firmware Revisions for ruleset....................... 82 Network Interface Configuration................................................... 82 Network Interface Configuration for Interface.............................. 83 Network Interface Count............................................................... 83 Processor Configuration................................................................ 83 Processor Configuration Summary................................................ 84 PSU Configuration.........................................................................84 Solid State Storage Configuration................................................. 84 Spare Disk Count by Use for ruleset.............................................. 84 Spare Disk Count for ruleset..........................................................85 Tape Drive Configuration...............................................................85 Tape Drive Firmware Revisions......................................................85 Tape Drive Firmware Summary......................................................85 Tape Drive Interface Summary...................................................... 86 Tape Drive Model Summary...........................................................86 Tape Library Config....................................................................... 86 Thermometer Configuration.......................................................... 87 Xsigo Infiniband Port Configuration............................................... 87 Capacity Planning system templates.......................................................... 87 Application Growth........................................................................ 87 Application Usage.......................................................................... 88 Avamar Client Usage Statistics......................................................88 Avamar Garbage Collection Data Recovered................................. 88 Backup Daily Staging By Storage Pool...........................................89 Backup Daily Total Group Duration................................................ 89 Backup Data Backed Up Daily........................................................89 Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Device....................................... 89 Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Media Server............................. 89 Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Server....................................... 89 Backup Data Backed Up Weekly.................................................... 90 Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Media Server......................... 90 Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Server................................... 90 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily..................................... 90 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server.......... 90 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server.....................90 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly................................. 90 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server....... 91 Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server..................91 Backup Files Backed Up Daily.........................................................91 Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Media Server..............................91 4 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Server........................................ 91 Backup Files Backed Up Weekly.....................................................91 Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Media Server.......................... 91 Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Server....................................92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily...................................... 92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server........... 92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server......................92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Hourly................................... 92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly.................................. 92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server....... 92 Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server.................. 93 Capacity Overview for Block......................................................... 93 Capacity Overview for File.............................................................93 Data Domain Total Replicated Capacity......................................... 93 Media Count By Location Trend.................................................... 93 Media Count By Pool and Location Trend......................................94 Media Count By Pool and State and Location Trend......................94 Media Count By Pool And State Trend.......................................... 94 Media Count By Pool Trend...........................................................95 Media Count By State and Location Trend.................................... 95 Media Count By State Trend......................................................... 95 Media Count Trend........................................................................95 Media Usage By Library Trend.......................................................95 Media Usage By Pool and Library Trend........................................ 96 Media Usage By Pool Trend...........................................................96 Media Usage Trend........................................................................96 Networker Individual Job Size for Data Domain............................. 96 NetWorker Total Job Size and Used Space for Data Domain......... 96 Pool Capacity Usage......................................................................97 Pool Capacity Usage for Pool........................................................ 97 RecoverPoint Protected Capacity................................................. 97 Save Pool Detailed Usage.............................................................. 97 Save Pool Usage............................................................................98 Snapshot Utilization...................................................................... 98 Storage Array Capacity................................................................. 98 Storage Array Capacity Usage.......................................................98 Storage Array Filling Up for ruleset................................................99 Storage Array Raw Capacity..........................................................99 Storage Pool Application Growth...................................................99 Storage Pool Application Usage................................................... 100 Storage Pool Capacity................................................................. 100 Storage Pool Raw Capacity Periodic............................................ 100 TSM Daily Migration By Storage Pool........................................... 101 TSM Daily Reclamation By Storage Pool.......................................101 Change Management system templates.................................................... 101 Avamar Audit User Changes Details.............................................. 101 Backup Application Change Details............................................... 101 Backup Application Change Details for ruleset............................. 102 Backup Application Change Summary.......................................... 102 Backup Application Configuration Changes for Pools...................102 Backup Application Last 10 Changes............................................ 103 Backup Client Configuration Change Details................................ 103 Backup Client Configuration Change Summary............................ 103 Backup Device Configuration Change Details...............................103 Backup Device Configuration Change Summary...........................104 Backup Group Configuration Change Details................................104 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 5 CONTENTS Backup Group Configuration Change Summary........................... 104 Backup Job Configuration Change Details....................................105 Backup Job Configuration Change Summary............................... 105 Backup Pool Configuration Change Details.................................. 105 Backup Schedule Configuration Change Details........................... 106 Backup Schedule Configuration Change Summary.......................106 Backup Server Configuration Change Details............................... 106 BTD Change Details..................................................................... 106 BTD Change Summary................................................................. 107 BTD Last 10 Change Details..........................................................107 Celerra Change Details................................................................. 107 Celerra Change Summary.............................................................107 Celerra Configuration Change Details.......................................... 108 Celerra Last 10 Change Details.....................................................108 Data Domain Change Details........................................................ 108 Data Mover Configuration Change Details................................... 109 Disk Array Configuration Change Details......................................109 Fileserver Export Change Details................................................. 109 Filesystem Configuration Change Details......................................110 Media Location Change Details.....................................................110 Memory Configuration Change Details......................................... 110 NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration Change Details................. 111 Network Interface Configuration Change Details...........................111 RecoverPoint Change Details........................................................112 RecoverPoint Change Summary................................................... 112 RecoverPoint Last 10 Changes..................................................... 112 Symmetrix Change Details............................................................ 113 Symmetrix Change Summary........................................................113 Symmetrix Last 10 Change Details................................................ 113 Tape Drive Configuration Change Details......................................114 Tape Library Configuration Change Details................................... 114 Virtual Host Change Details.......................................................... 115 Virtual Host Configuration Change Summary................................115 Virtual Host Disk Configuration Change Details............................ 115 Virtual Host Change Details.......................................................... 115 Virtual Host Last 10 Changes Details.............................................116 Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Change Details...... 116 VNX/CLARiiON Change Details.................................................... 116 VNX/CLARiiON Change Summary................................................ 117 VNX/CLARiiON Last 10 Change Details........................................ 117 Chargeback system templates................................................................... 117 Chargeback Details....................................................................... 118 Chargeback Details By Cost Centre.............................................. 119 Chargeback Details for Cost Centre............................................. 119 Chargeback History......................................................................120 Chargeback Summary.................................................................. 120 Chargeback Summary By Cost Centre......................................... 120 Chargeback Total Cost Breakdown.............................................. 120 RecoverPoint Chargeback Details................................................ 120 RecoverPoint Chargeback Summary.............................................121 Chargeback Total Cost of Data Retained ..................................... 121 Compliance system templates...................................................................122 Backup and Restore KPIs............................................................. 122 Backup Daily Success Rate Against Target.................................. 122 Backup Daily Success Rate And Data........................................... 122 Backup Success Rate Against Target........................................... 123 6 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Backup Unprotected/Unconfigured Clients..................................123 Backup Unsuccessful Clients........................................................123 Client Additions............................................................................ 123 Client Changes............................................................................. 124 Client Changes Summary............................................................. 124 Client Deletions............................................................................ 124 Client Modifications..................................................................... 124 Clients Without Full Backup......................................................... 125 Compliance Overview...................................................................125 Expired Volumes...........................................................................125 One Strike Failed Clients.............................................................. 125 One Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client....................................126 Restore Rate Statistics for ruleset............................................... 128 Strike Summary............................................................................128 Success Rate Against Target for ruleset...................................... 129 Three Strike Failed Clients........................................................... 129 Three Strike Failed Clients for ruleset.......................................... 129 Three Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client................................. 130 Top 10 Most Exposed Jobs........................................................... 131 Top 5 Most Exposed Jobs............................................................ 132 Two Strike Failed Clients..............................................................132 Two Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client................................... 133 Unprotected Clients..................................................................... 135 Volumes To Be Destroyed............................................................ 135 Configuration system templates................................................................135 Array Fan-out Ratio......................................................................135 Avamar Retention Policy Configuration........................................136 Backup Client Configuration.........................................................136 Backup Client Count.................................................................... 139 Backup Client Count By OS Type................................................. 139 Backup Client Count By Server.................................................... 139 Backup Device Config.................................................................. 139 Backup Device Config in Jukebox.................................................140 Backup Device Count By Server................................................... 141 Backup Device Count By Type...................................................... 141 Backup Device Writable Count......................................................141 Backup Group Configuration......................................................... 141 Backup Group Count.................................................................... 144 Backup Group Count By Server....................................................144 Backup Job Configuration............................................................ 144 Backup Jukebox Config................................................................ 144 Backup Jukebox Contents............................................................145 Backup Pool Configuration...........................................................145 Backup Schedule Configuration................................................... 148 Backup Server Client Group Mapping...........................................149 Backup Server Configuration....................................................... 149 Backup Server Group Job Mapping.............................................. 152 Backup Server Server Count........................................................152 Backup Server Server Count By Application................................ 152 Backup Server Server Count By Version...................................... 152 Celerra Filesystem to LUN Mapping............................................. 152 Celerra Replication Visualization.................................................. 152 Celerra Storage Pool Configuration..............................................153 Celerra Volume Configuration...................................................... 153 Cluster Application Configuration for Application......................... 154 Cluster Configuration................................................................... 154 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 7 CONTENTS Data Domain Boost Details........................................................... 154 Data Domain Boost Files...............................................................154 Data Domain Mtree To Tenant Unit Mapping............................... 155 Data Domain Network DNS.......................................................... 155 Data Domain NTP Configuration.................................................. 155 Data Domain Replication Configuration........................................ 155 Data Domain Tenant Unit Configuration.......................................155 Data Domain VTL Access Group Configuration............................ 156 Data Mover Configuration............................................................ 156 EDL Configuration Options...........................................................156 Enclosure Configuration............................................................... 157 Exported LUNs............................................................................. 157 Fibre Channel Device Configuration............................................. 157 Fibre Channel Device Mapping..................................................... 157 Fileserver Exports........................................................................ 158 Filesystem Mount Configuration.................................................. 158 Imported LUNs.............................................................................159 iSCSI iSNS Configuration.............................................................159 iSCSI Portal Configuration........................................................... 160 Least LUNs Per Port.................................................................... 160 LUN Capacity Per Node............................................................... 160 LUN Capacity Per Port................................................................ 160 LUN Mapping............................................................................... 160 LUN Source Ports.........................................................................161 LUN Source Ports for ruleset........................................................161 LUNs Per Node............................................................................. 161 LUNs Per Port.............................................................................. 161 Mirror Configuration..................................................................... 161 MTree Details...............................................................................162 MTree Quota Configuration......................................................... 162 NetBackup Catalog File Backup Configuration............................. 162 NetBackup Catalog Backup Configuration................................... 162 NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration............................... 163 NetBackup Disk Pool Configuration..............................................163 NetBackup Disk Volume Configuration......................................... 164 NetBackup Global Configuration.................................................. 164 NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Configuration................................... 165 NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Destination....................................... 165 NetBackup Media Server Configuration Details........................... 166 NetBackup Server Configuration Details...................................... 166 NetBackup Storage Server Configuration.................................... 166 NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration........................................ 167 NetBackup Storage Unit Group Configuration............................. 168 NetBackup VM Rule Configuration...............................................168 NetWorker Action Configuration.................................................. 168 Networker Client Storage Nodes Configuration........................... 170 Networker Protection Policy Configuration .................................170 NetWorker VBA Configuration..................................................... 170 NetWorker Workflow Configuration............................................. 170 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details.............................171 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details for Consistency Group............................................................................................171 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Details..................................... 172 RecoverPoint Replication Set Configuration................................ 173 RecoverPoint RPA Details............................................................ 173 RecoverPoint Splitter Details....................................................... 174 8 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Remote Mirror Configuration....................................................... 174 Save Pool Configuration............................................................... 174 Shared Memory Configuration..................................................... 175 Symmetrix LUN to Data Domain vDisks........................................176 Tape Library Drive Count By Library.............................................176 Tape Library Firmware Summary..................................................176 Tape Library Model Summary.......................................................176 Tape Library Slot Count By Library...............................................176 TSM Copy Group Configuration................................................... 177 TSM Defined Server Configuration...............................................177 TSM LAN Free Server Configuration............................................ 178 TSM Management Class Configuration........................................ 179 TSM Policy Set Configuration...................................................... 179 Virtual Data Mover Configuration.................................................180 Virtual Host Configuration............................................................180 Virtual Host Disk Configuration.................................................... 180 Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration...............................181 Virtualization Manager Configuration............................................181 VNX/CLARiiON RAID Group Configuration...................................181 VNX/CLARiiON Storage Pool Configuration................................ 182 Webserver Configuration............................................................. 182 Xsigo Virtual To Physical Port Mapping........................................182 Data Protection system templates............................................................ 183 Active Clone Job Details...............................................................183 Application Exposure for RPO missed ruleset...............................183 Application Exposure for RTE high ruleset................................... 183 Avamar Data Retained by Client................................................... 184 Avamar Domain Footprint.............................................................184 Avamar Garbage Collection Jobs..................................................184 Avamar Replication Summary ......................................................184 Backup 2-Day Comparison........................................................... 185 Backup Active Clients.................................................................. 185 Backup Active Jobs...................................................................... 186 Backup Active Groups.................................................................. 187 Backup All Clients.........................................................................187 Backup All Groups........................................................................ 190 Backup All Jobs - No Restarts......................................................190 Backup All Jobs............................................................................ 192 Backup All Jobs for Specific Client...............................................194 Backup All Large Jobs.................................................................. 197 Backup All Long Running Jobs......................................................199 Backup All Slow Jobs................................................................... 202 Backup Average Details For Specific Job.....................................204 Backup Average Full Details By Client......................................... 205 Backup Client Configuration for Pool...........................................205 Backup Client De-Dupe Rate Distribution.................................... 207 Backup Client De-Dupe Ratios..................................................... 207 Backup Client Size Monthly Comparison..................................... 207 Backup Client Summary...............................................................208 Backup Clients Not Backed Up.................................................... 208 Backup Cumulative Number Of Completed Jobs......................... 208 Backup Cumulative Size Of Completed Jobs............................... 209 Backup Data Domain Clone Details.............................................. 209 Backup Device Configuration for Pool......................................... 209 Backup Failed Clients................................................................... 210 Backup Failed Groups...................................................................212 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 9 CONTENTS Backup Failed Jobs.......................................................................213 Backup Failed Jobs For Client...................................................... 215 Backup Failed Jobs for Client for ruleset...................................... 217 Backup Failed Jobs for ruleset......................................................217 Backup Full History of Specific Job.............................................. 217 Backup Group Configuration for Pool...........................................219 Backup Group Job Status Details ................................................ 221 Backup Group Status...................................................................222 Backup Group Summary.............................................................. 222 Backup Hourly Job Status........................................................... 222 Backup Job Attempts.................................................................. 222 Backup Job Attempts for Specific Job........................................ 225 Backup Job Change Ratio Aggregate.......................................... 225 Backup Job Change Ratios.......................................................... 226 Backup Job Change Ratios By Client........................................... 226 Backup Job Change Ratios for Client...........................................227 Backup Job Configuration for Pool.............................................. 228 Backup Job Deduplication Ratio for Client................................... 228 Backup Job Details for Specific Volume.......................................228 Backup Job Device Mapping........................................................230 Backup Job Error Details............................................................. 230 Backup Job Error Details for Specific Job.................................... 231 Backup Job Error Distribution...................................................... 231 Backup Job Error Summary..........................................................231 Backup Job Media Details............................................................ 232 Backup Job Status By Server...................................................... 232 Backup Job Summary.................................................................. 232 Backup Job Summary for Group Run........................................... 233 Backup Last 5 Runs of Job.......................................................... 233 Backup Last n Runs of Client....................................................... 235 Backup Last n Successful Runs of Client..................................... 237 Backup Last Successful Full Run of Client................................... 239 Backup Last Successful Run of Client..........................................242 Backup Last Successful Run of Job............................................. 244 Backup Missed Clients.................................................................246 Backup Missed Jobs.................................................................... 247 Backup Open Files....................................................................... 249 Backup Open Files for Specific Job............................................. 249 Backup Partial Clients..................................................................250 Backup Partial Groups................................................................. 252 Backup Problem Clients...............................................................252 Backup Protected versus Avg Incremental.................................. 252 Backup Protected versus Backed Up...........................................252 Backup Report Card.................................................................... 253 Backup Replication Sync Times by Client.................................... 253 Backup Restore Details................................................................253 Backup Running Jobs.................................................................. 254 Backup Server Error Details........................................................ 255 Backup Server Group Client Mapping..........................................255 Backup Successful Clients...........................................................256 Backup Successful Groups.......................................................... 258 Backup Successful Jobs.............................................................. 258 Backup Successful Jobs with failed SLA for ruleset..................... 261 Backup to Data Domain - Clients with Low Dedup Ratio.............. 261 Backup Top 10 Largest Clients..................................................... 261 Backup Top 10 Least Successful Clients...................................... 262 10 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Backup Top 10 Longest Running Clients...................................... 262 Backup Top 10 Most Unreliable Clients........................................ 262 Backup Top 10 Smallest Clients................................................... 262 Backup VMs Not Backed Up........................................................262 Clients with Low Dedup Ratio...................................................... 262 Clone Attempts........................................................................... 263 Clone Attempts for Specific Clone Operation.............................. 264 Clone Job Media Details.............................................................. 264 Clone Job Media Details for Clone Operation...............................264 Clone Operations......................................................................... 265 Clone Summary........................................................................... 266 Successful Clone Operations....................................................... 266 Cloned Job Details....................................................................... 267 Cloned Job Details For Clone Operation...................................... 268 Estimated Protected Backup Capacity........................................ 268 Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Details.............................268 Exposure Details.......................................................................... 269 Exposure Time Exceeds RPO for ruleset..................................... 269 Failed Clone Operations............................................................... 270 Failed Maintenance Job Details....................................................270 Failed Restore Jobs...................................................................... 271 Failed Staging Operations............................................................ 272 Filesystems Not Backed Up......................................................... 272 Historical Successful Jobs........................................................... 273 Hosts Not Backed Up.................................................................. 275 Last 10 Failed Backups.................................................................275 Legato Networker Bootstrap Report............................................277 Maintenance Job Attempts.......................................................... 277 Maintenance Job Attempts for Specific Job................................ 278 Maintenance Job Details..............................................................278 Maintenance Job Errors...............................................................279 Maintenance Job Summary..........................................................279 Missed Restore Jobs................................................................... 280 NetBackup Backup Job Disk Media Details...................................281 NetBackup Clone Job Disk Media Details..................................... 281 NetBackup Failed Restarted Clone Operations.............................281 NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Backup Job..............282 NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Clone Operation...... 284 NetBackup Last Restarted Job For Specific Job......................... 284 NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Maintenance Job..... 286 NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Restore Job............. 287 NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Vault Job................. 288 NetBackup Restore Job Disk Media Details................................. 288 NetBackup Vault Attempts.......................................................... 289 NetBackup Vault Attempts for Specific Job................................ 290 NetBackup Vault Ejects............................................................... 290 NetBackup Vault Job Disk Media Details...................................... 291 NetBackup Vault Jobs.................................................................. 291 NetBackup Vault Preview............................................................ 292 Networker Data Domain Details for Job.......................................292 Networker Data Domain Details for Server.................................. 293 Networker Job Size by Client for Data Domain............................ 294 NetWorker Workflow Job Status.................................................294 RecoverPoint Protected Capacity............................................... 294 Restore Job Attempts................................................................. 294 Restore Job Attempts for Specific Job........................................295 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 11 CONTENTS Restore Job Error Details............................................................ 296 Restore Job Error Details For Specific Job.................................. 296 Restore Job Media Details........................................................... 296 Restore Job Summary................................................................. 297 Restore Top 10 Largest Clients.................................................... 297 Restore Top 10 Least Successful Clients..................................... 297 Snap Job Details.......................................................................... 297 Snap Job Summary......................................................................299 Staging Media Details.................................................................. 300 Staging Operations......................................................................300 Staging Summary........................................................................ 300 Successful Maintenance Job Details............................................ 301 Successful Restore Jobs.............................................................. 301 Successful Staging Operations.................................................... 302 Top 10 Backup Clients By Avg Daily Change................................ 303 Top 10 Backup Clients with Best De-Dupe Rate...........................303 Top 10 Backup Clients with Worst De-Dupe Rate........................ 303 TSM Backup Set Details.............................................................. 304 TSM Command Event Details...................................................... 304 TSM Database Backup Errors......................................................304 TSM Database Backups...............................................................305 TSM Delete Volumes................................................................... 305 TSM Expiration Errors................................................................. 305 TSM Expirations.......................................................................... 306 TSM Failed Migration Jobs.......................................................... 306 TSM Failed Reclamation Jobs...................................................... 307 TSM Migrated Item Count by Storage Pool................................. 307 TSM Migrated Size by Storage Pool............................................ 307 TSM Migration Errors For Specific Job....................................... 308 TSM Migration Jobs.................................................................... 308 TSM Migration Summary.............................................................308 TSM Move Errors........................................................................ 309 TSM Moves................................................................................. 309 TSM Reclaimed Item Count by Storage Pool...............................309 TSM Reclaimed Size by Storage Pool.......................................... 310 TSM Reclamation Errors For Specific Job....................................310 TSM Reclamation Jobs................................................................ 310 TSM Reclamation Summary......................................................... 310 TSM Storage Pool Copies............................................................. 311 TSM Storage Pool Copy Errors.....................................................311 TSM Successful Migration Jobs................................................... 312 TSM Successful Reclamation Jobs...............................................312 TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Idle Wait Times.........................313 TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Media Wait Times.....................313 TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Idle Wait Times........................... 314 TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Media Wait Times....................... 314 Uncloned Backups........................................................................ 314 Vault Job Media Details................................................................ 316 Database system templates...................................................................... 316 All Database Changes...................................................................316 Connection Status........................................................................317 Control File Details....................................................................... 317 Database Change Summary......................................................... 318 Database Config Changes for ruleset........................................... 318 Database Details...........................................................................318 Database Details For Server......................................................... 318 12 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Database Last 10 Changes............................................................319 Database Parameter Change Details............................................ 319 Database Parameters................................................................... 319 Database Schema Details For Server...........................................320 Database Server Details...............................................................320 Database Server Parameter Change Details................................ 320 Database Server Parameters........................................................321 Datafile Configuration Change Details.......................................... 321 Datafile Details............................................................................. 321 Datafile Details for Database........................................................322 Datafile Details for Tablespace.................................................... 322 Datafile Utilization....................................................................... 323 Datafile Utilization Trend Chart................................................... 323 Datafile Utilization for Tablespace............................................... 323 Index Configuration Change Details............................................. 324 Index Details For Database.......................................................... 324 Index Details For Schema............................................................ 325 Index Details For Tablespace....................................................... 325 Index Details for Table................................................................. 325 Logfile Configuration Change Details...........................................326 Logfile Details.............................................................................. 326 Partition Details for Database...................................................... 326 Partition Details for Index............................................................ 327 Partition Details for Table............................................................ 327 Table Configuration Change Details............................................. 327 Table Details for Database........................................................... 328 Table Details for Schema............................................................. 328 Table Details for Tablespace........................................................ 328 Tablespace Configuration Change Details....................................329 Tablespace Details....................................................................... 329 Tablespace Details for Database..................................................330 Tablespace Utilization..................................................................330 Top 10 Growing Tables by Rows.................................................. 330 Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Row Count........................... 331 Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Size...................................... 331 DPA system templates.............................................................................. 331 Agent Errors.................................................................................331 Analysis Engine History................................................................332 Analysis Engine Performance.......................................................332 DPA Client License Details for ruleset..........................................332 DPA Collector Log....................................................................... 332 DPA Listener Latency.................................................................. 333 DPA Listener Request Rate......................................................... 333 DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time...................................... 333 DPA Server Logs......................................................................... 333 HTTP Request Performance Statistics........................................ 334 Listener Performance.................................................................. 334 Node List..................................................................................... 334 Node Topology............................................................................ 334 Objects with Replication Exposures.............................................335 Publisher Performance................................................................ 335 Replication Alerts by Age by Group............................................. 335 Replication Alerts by Group......................................................... 335 Report History............................................................................. 335 Request History...........................................................................336 Scheduled Report History............................................................336 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 13 CONTENTS Unsupported Agents.................................................................... 337 Licensing system templates...................................................................... 337 Expired Licenses for ruleset......................................................... 337 License Conformance.................................................................. 337 License Details............................................................................. 337 License Details - Expired..............................................................338 License Summary........................................................................ 338 Nearly Expired Licenses for ruleset..............................................338 Media management system templates......................................................338 Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted By Device............. 339 Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted By Node............... 339 Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted Daily By Device.... 339 Backup Jukebox Number Of Volumes Mounted Daily.................. 339 Empty Media By Jukebox............................................................ 339 Empty Media By Jukebox RAG.................................................... 340 Empty Media by Pool and Jukebox.............................................. 340 Media Age Distribution................................................................ 340 Media Contents........................................................................... 340 Media Count.................................................................................341 Media Count Available Volumes By Jukebox.................................341 Media Count By Jukebox and State..............................................341 Media Count By Pool....................................................................341 Media Count By Pool and State................................................... 342 Media Count By Pool and State for ruleset.................................. 342 Media Count By Server................................................................342 Media Count By State................................................................. 342 Media Count of Offline Expired Volumes..................................... 342 Media Count of Online/Offline Volumes...................................... 343 Media Count Volumes Used By Jukebox...................................... 343 Media Details............................................................................... 343 Media Details For Cleaning Tapes................................................ 344 Media Details For Empty Volumes............................................... 345 Media Details For Frozen Volumes...............................................346 Media Details For Full Volumes.................................................... 347 Media Details For Offline Expired Volumes.................................. 349 Media Details for Offline Volumes................................................350 Media Details For Online Volumes................................................ 351 Media Details For Partial Volumes............................................... 352 Media Details For Used Volumes..................................................353 Media Details of Available Volumes..............................................354 Media Details Top 10 Oldest Volumes.......................................... 355 Media Details With Retention Over 8 Years................................. 356 Media Retention Distribution....................................................... 357 Media Size Distribution................................................................358 Media Summary...........................................................................358 Media Usage................................................................................358 Media Usage By Pool...................................................................358 Media Usage By Server............................................................... 358 Media Reclamation Distribution................................................... 358 RPO Violation Details...................................................................359 Root Cause..................................................................................359 Root Cause for CG Details...........................................................359 Root Cause for Job Details.......................................................... 360 TSM DR Media............................................................................ 360 Volume Expiration Report............................................................ 360 Operations system templates................................................................... 360 14 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Backup Device Availability........................................................... 360 Backup Device Availability By Server............................................361 Backup Device Availability RAG....................................................361 Backup Mount Requests.............................................................. 361 Empty Media plus Device Availability............................................361 Performance system templates.................................................................361 Aggregate Disk Activity............................................................... 362 Aggregate Disk Operations.......................................................... 362 Aggregate Disk Performance....................................................... 362 Aggregate Fibre Channel Device Performance............................ 362 Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Performance................................ 362 Aggregate LUN Performance...................................................... 363 Aggregate Processor Utilization.................................................. 363 Aggregate Tape Drive Performance.............................................363 Aggregate Tape Library Drive Performance.................................363 Aggregate Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance..................... 363 Backup Client Performance Distribution...................................... 363 Backup Client Slowest/Fastest Jobs for Client............................364 Backup Device Avg/Max Throughput by Device.......................... 366 Backup Device Performance Summary........................................366 Backup Device Performance Summary By Device....................... 366 Backup Device Throughput Aggregate.........................................367 Backup Device Throughput by Device..........................................367 Backup Device Throughput for Device.........................................367 Backup Top 10 Fastest Clients..................................................... 367 Backup Top 10 Slowest Clients.................................................... 368 Celerra Replication Performance................................................. 368 Celerra Replication Performance Summary................................. 368 Data Domain Average Replicated Capacity.................................. 369 Data Domain Data Transfer Rate................................................. 369 Data Domain Replication Time Lag ..............................................369 Disk Activity By Disk....................................................................369 Disk Activity By Host................................................................... 370 Disk Operations by Disk............................................................... 370 Disk Operations by Host.............................................................. 370 Disk Performance By Disk............................................................370 Disk Performance By Host...........................................................370 DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time....................................... 371 Fibre Channel Device Performance.............................................. 371 Fibre Channel Device Performance By Node................................ 371 Fibre Channel Device Performance Summary...............................371 Fibre Channel Port Performance.................................................. 371 Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node................................... 372 Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port.....................................372 Fileserver Average Response Times.............................................372 Fileserver Cache Hit Rates...........................................................372 Fileserver Cache Hit Rates By Node............................................ 373 Fileserver Client Performance......................................................373 Fileserver Data Throughput......................................................... 373 Fileserver Data Throughput By Protocol...................................... 373 Fileserver Filesystem Performance.............................................. 373 Fileserver Operations................................................................... 374 Fileserver Operations By Protocol............................................... 374 Fileserver Operations with Direction............................................ 374 Fileserver Performance Summary................................................375 Filesystem Disk Performance.......................................................375 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 15 CONTENTS Filesystem Operations By Partition..............................................375 Filesystem Operations by Direction............................................. 375 Filesystem Performance Summary.............................................. 376 Filesystem Throughput by Partition............................................. 376 Filesystem Throughput with Direction......................................... 376 Host Performance....................................................................... 376 Host Performance During Backup................................................ 377 Host Performance For Client....................................................... 377 LUN Operations........................................................................... 377 LUN Operations By LUN.............................................................. 378 LUN Performance........................................................................ 378 LUN Performance By Node..........................................................378 LUN Throughput.......................................................................... 378 LUN Throughput By LUN.............................................................379 Mirror Performance..................................................................... 379 Process Memory Usage For Specific Process..............................379 Processor Utilization By CPU...................................................... 379 Processor Utilization By Node..................................................... 379 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Data Lag................................. 380 RecoverPoint Consistency Group High Load Ratio...................... 380 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates............. 380 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates for Last Day...............................................................................................381 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Journal Lag..............................381 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Throughput............................. 381 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Time Lag.................................382 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Transaction Lag...................... 382 RecoverPoint RPA Compression..................................................382 RecoverPoint RPA Latency......................................................... 382 RecoverPoint RPA Throughput....................................................383 RecoverPoint RPA Writes............................................................383 RecoverPoint RPA Site Compression.......................................... 383 RecoverPoint RPA Site Latency.................................................. 383 RecoverPoint RPA Site Packet Loss............................................384 RecoverPoint RPA Site Throughput............................................ 384 RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput.......................................... 384 RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput for Last Day...................... 384 Remote Mirror Performance........................................................385 Server Performance During Backup.............................................385 Solid State Storage Performance................................................ 385 Tape Drive Performance By Drive................................................385 Tape Drive Performance By Node................................................386 Tape Drive Performance Summary.............................................. 386 Tape Drive Throughput on Server During Backup........................ 386 Tape Library Drive Performance.................................................. 386 Tape Library Drive Performance By Node.................................... 387 Tape Library Drive Performance Summary.................................. 387 Total Throughput......................................................................... 387 Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node........................ 387 Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port......................... 388 Virtual Host Disk Performance.....................................................388 Virtual Host Network Interface Performance...............................388 Virtual Host Processor Utilization................................................ 388 Webserver Response Time.......................................................... 389 Xsigo Aggregate Infiniband Port Performance.............................389 Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Node................................ 389 16 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Port................................. 389 Xsigo Virtual Port Queue Depth Summary................................... 390 Provisioning system templates................................................................. 390 Fileserver Top 10 Most Available Aggregates...............................390 Recoverability system templates.............................................................. 390 All Nodes Of Type Symmatrix CG.................................................391 Masking Configuration for Storage Array..................................... 391 Masking Configuration for Initiator...............................................391 MirrorView Configuration............................................................ 392 MirrorView/A Performance......................................................... 392 MirrorView/A Performance for CG..............................................393 RDF Configuration....................................................................... 393 RDF Configuration for CG........................................................... 394 RDF Configuration for DG............................................................394 RDFG Configuration.................................................................... 395 RDFG Performance..................................................................... 395 Recoverability Detailed Exposures...............................................396 Recoverability Detailed Exposures for ruleset..............................396 Recoverability Replicated Object Process View...........................396 Recoverability Replicated Object Storage Mapping..................... 397 Recoverability Excludes............................................................... 397 Recoverability Exposures Summary.............................................398 Recoverability Gaps.....................................................................398 Recoverability Host Analysis Status............................................ 399 Recoverability Obsolete Recovery Points.................................... 399 Recoverability Replication Configuration..................................... 400 Server to Storage Configuration..................................................400 Recoverability Server To Storage Mappings Topology................ 400 Recoverability Status................................................................... 401 Recoverability Status By Object...................................................401 Recoverability Status Monitor By Client.......................................401 Recoverability Storage To Server Mappings Topology................. 401 Recoverability Tasks ................................................................... 401 Recoverability Unprotected Nodes.............................................. 402 Recoverability Visualization......................................................... 402 Recoverability Visualization Details..............................................402 Remote Replication RPO for MV/A............................................. 402 Remote Replication RPO for SRDF/A..........................................403 Remote Replication RPO forecast for MV/A............................... 403 Remote Replication RPO forecast for SRDF/A............................403 Replication RPO Compliance....................................................... 403 Storage Replication Status.......................................................... 404 Resource Utilization system templates..................................................... 404 Aggregate Network Interface Performance.................................405 Aggregate Virtual Network Interface Performance......................405 BTD Storage Utilization By Node.................................................405 Backup Client Occupancy............................................................405 Backup Client Occupancy by Pool............................................... 405 Backup Device Utilization by Device............................................ 405 Backup Server Utilization............................................................ 406 CG Utilization.............................................................................. 406 Client Occupancy Summary........................................................ 406 Client Occupancy Trend.............................................................. 406 Current Memory Usage By Node................................................. 407 Data Domain Average Hourly Data Ingested.................................407 Data Domain Boost Statistics...................................................... 407 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 17 CONTENTS Data Domain Boost Storage Unit Statistics................................. 407 Data Domain Client Deduplication Ratio.......................................407 Data Domain Compression Factor................................................408 Data Domain Compression Ratio Count....................................... 408 Data Domain Daily Compression Statistics.................................. 408 Data Domain Data Ingested......................................................... 409 Data Domain Data Written To...................................................... 409 Data Domain DeDuplication Ratio................................................ 409 Data Domain File Distribution By Count ...................................... 409 Data Domain File Distribution By Size ..........................................410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization ............................................. 410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization for Warning/Critical Systems.... 410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Status Count.........................410 Data Domain Low System Compression Ratio Trend.....................411 Data Domain Reduction Ratios......................................................411 Data Domain System Utilization.................................................... 411 Data Domain Utilization.................................................................411 DataProtector Database Usage.................................................... 412 DataProtector System Dynamics................................................. 412 EDL 3D Compression Ratio.......................................................... 412 EDL 3D DeDupe Queue.................................................................412 EDL 3D Total Reduction Ratio...................................................... 413 Fabric Utilization.......................................................................... 413 Fibre Channel Port Utilization.......................................................413 Filesystem Aggregate Utilization.................................................. 413 Filesystem Average Disk Activity..................................................413 Filesystem Average Disk Activity for ruleset.................................414 Filesystem Disk Activity................................................................414 Filesystem Peak Snapshot Utilization........................................... 414 Filesystem Snapshot Utilization....................................................414 Filesystem Utilization................................................................... 414 Filesystem Utilization By Node..................................................... 415 Filesystem Utilization By Partition................................................415 Filesystem Utilization Current...................................................... 415 Filesystem Utilization for ruleset.................................................. 415 HP VLS Capacity Utilization Trend............................................... 416 HP VLS Throughput..................................................................... 416 MTree Daily Compression Statistics.............................................416 MTree Quota Utilization............................................................... 416 MTree Physical Capacity Statistics ............................................. 416 MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Trend.................................... 417 Memory Utilization....................................................................... 417 Memory Utilization By Node......................................................... 417 Memory Utilization Current.......................................................... 417 Network Interface Performance By Interface...............................417 Network Interface Performance By Node.................................... 418 Network Interface Performance Summary................................... 418 Network Interface Utilization By Interface and Direction............. 418 NetWorker VBA Utilization........................................................... 418 Process CPU Utilization............................................................... 419 Process CPU Utilization For Specific Process..............................419 Process Memory Usage............................................................... 419 RecoverPoint Journal Utilization.................................................. 419 System Statistics RAG................................................................. 419 TSM Client Occupancy Summary................................................ 420 18 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS TSM Database Utilization............................................................ 420 TSM Storage Pool Utilization...................................................... 420 Tape Library Aggregate Utilization............................................... 421 Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Trend..................................... 421 Tape Library Capacity Utilization..................................................421 Tape Library Compression Ratio...................................................421 Tape Library Deduplication Ratio..................................................421 Tape Library Slot Utilization Trend.............................................. 422 Tape Library Throughput............................................................. 422 Tape Library Usage By Library..................................................... 422 Tape Library Utilization................................................................422 Tape Library Utilization Trend......................................................423 Tape Library Volume Utilization Trend......................................... 423 Top 10 Offending Clients............................................................. 423 Top 10 Offending Jobs.................................................................423 Top 5 Busiest Servers..................................................................424 VTL Aggregate Storage Utilization.............................................. 424 Virtual Fibre Channel Port Utilization........................................... 424 Virtual Host Memory Utilization................................................... 424 Virtual Network Interface Performance By Interface................... 424 Virtual Network Interface Performance By Node.........................425 Virtual Network Interface Performance Summary....................... 425 Xsigo Infiniband Port Utilization...................................................425 ROI system templates.............................................................................. 425 Deduplication Cost Savings......................................................... 425 Deduplication ROI Trend..............................................................426 Scheduling system templates................................................................... 426 Active Clone Job Distribution.......................................................426 Backup Active Job Distribution.................................................... 426 Backup Client Schedule............................................................... 426 Backup Device Scheduling........................................................... 428 Backup Device Shared Usage...................................................... 429 Backup Device Usage.................................................................. 429 Backup Group Forecast............................................................... 429 Backup Job Distribution...............................................................429 Backup Job Distribution By Media Server.................................... 430 Backup Job Forecast................................................................... 430 Backup Job Forecast versus Actual............................................. 430 Backup Job Forecast versus Actual Summary.............................. 431 Backup Job Schedule................................................................... 431 Backup Job Schedule For Specific Client.....................................433 Backup Size Distribution..............................................................435 Backup Size Distribution By Media Server................................... 435 Maintenance Job Schedule..........................................................436 TSM Server Side Process Scheduling..........................................436 TSM Storage Pool Migration Schedule........................................ 436 TSM Storage Pool Reclamation Schedule....................................437 Service Level Management system templates.......................................... 437 Backup Daily Success Rate.......................................................... 437 Backup Jobs with Last Resolution................................................437 Clone SLA Status........................................................................ 440 Backup SLA Summary.................................................................. 441 Backup SLA Summary By Client................................................... 441 Restore Jobs with Last Resolution............................................... 441 Status system templates.......................................................................... 443 ACSLS ACS Status...................................................................... 443 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 19 CONTENTS ACSLS Lock Status..................................................................... 444 ACSLS Port Status...................................................................... 444 ACSLS Server Status.................................................................. 444 Backup Client Physical Occupancy.............................................. 445 Backup Client Status................................................................... 445 Backup Device Downed Devices.................................................. 445 Backup Device Errors.................................................................. 445 Backup Device Status..................................................................446 Backup Pool Status......................................................................447 Backup Server Error Summary.....................................................447 Backup Server Status.................................................................. 448 Backup Unavailable Device Count for ruleset...............................448 Battery Status............................................................................. 448 Battery Summary.........................................................................448 BTD Capacity...............................................................................448 BTD Health Status.......................................................................449 BTD Usage...................................................................................449 Card Status................................................................................. 449 Celerra Replication Status........................................................... 449 Client Occupancy........................................................................ 450 Client Occupancy by Server Trend.............................................. 450 Cluster Resource Status..............................................................450 Cluster Status for Cluster............................................................ 451 Collector Status for ruleset.......................................................... 451 Data Domain Active Streams........................................................451 Data Domain Boost Option Status................................................ 451 Data Domain Filesystem Archive Unit Status................................451 Data Domain Filesystem Cleaning Status.....................................452 Data Domain Filesystem Options................................................. 452 Data Domain Modes.....................................................................452 Data Domain System Capacity Licenses...................................... 452 Data Domain System Licenses..................................................... 453 Data Domain System User Status................................................453 DataProtector Database Status...................................................453 DataProtector Datafile Usage......................................................453 DataProtector Purge Preview......................................................453 DataProtector Record File Usage................................................ 454 DataProtector Service Status......................................................454 Device Availability for ruleset.......................................................454 Disk Array Status.........................................................................454 Disk Failed for ruleset.................................................................. 455 Disk Status.................................................................................. 455 EDL Failover Status..................................................................... 455 Fan Status................................................................................... 456 Fan Summary.............................................................................. 456 Fibre Channel Port Status........................................................... 456 Fibre Channel Port Summary By Node.........................................457 Fileserver Status..........................................................................457 Filesystem Disk Status.................................................................457 Filesystem Quota Status..............................................................457 Filesystem Snapshot Status........................................................ 458 Filesystem Status........................................................................ 458 Filesystem Status Summary........................................................ 459 Host Status................................................................................. 459 IP Duplex Mismatch for ruleset....................................................459 iSCSI Status................................................................................ 459 20 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CONTENTS LUN Status..................................................................................460 MTree Retention Lock Status......................................................460 Mirror Status............................................................................... 460 NetBackup Device Cleaning Status.............................................. 461 NetBackup Disk Pool Status.........................................................461 NetBackup Disk Volume Status.................................................... 461 NetBackup Storage Server Status...............................................462 Network Interface Link Pair......................................................... 462 Network Interface Link Pair Autonegotiation Status....................462 Network Interface Link Pair Duplex Status.................................. 463 Network Interface Status............................................................ 463 Network IP Configuration............................................................ 464 Network IP Configuration for IP.................................................. 464 Orphaned LUNs........................................................................... 465 Process Count............................................................................. 465 Process Count By Host............................................................... 465 Process Count Current................................................................465 Process Status............................................................................ 465 Processor Status......................................................................... 466 Processor Status Details............................................................. 466 PSU Status..................................................................................466 PSU Summary............................................................................. 466 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status............................467 RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status for Active RPAs.. 467 RecoverPoint Event Details......................................................... 468 RecoverPoint Event Summary.....................................................468 RecoverPoint Last 10 Event Details............................................. 469 RecoverPoint RPA Active Consistency Groups........................... 469 RecoverPoint Volumes................................................................ 469 RecoverPoint Volumes for Replication Sets.................................470 Remote Mirror Status.................................................................. 470 Replication Status........................................................................470 Tape Drive Cleaning Summary......................................................471 Tape Drive Count By State........................................................... 471 Tape Drive Count By Status......................................................... 471 Tape Drive Status.........................................................................471 Tape Library CAP Status............................................................. 472 Tape Library CAP Status Summary..............................................472 Tape Library Empty Volume Count.............................................. 472 Tape Library Slot Status.............................................................. 472 Tape Library Status Details.......................................................... 473 Tape Library Status Summary......................................................473 Tape Library Volume Status......................................................... 473 Thermometer Status....................................................................474 Thermometer Summary............................................................... 474 Thermometer Trend.....................................................................475 Thermometer Trend for Specific Thermometer........................... 475 TSM Client Filespaces................................................................. 475 TSM Client Occupancy................................................................ 475 TSM Database Status.................................................................. 476 TSM Database Usage.................................................................. 476 TSM Database Volume Status..................................................... 476 TSM Defined Server Status......................................................... 477 TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details....................................... 477 TSM Identify Duplicate Process Trend.........................................478 TSM Replication Node Status......................................................478 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 21 CONTENTS TSM Replication Process Details................................................. 478 TSM Replication Process Summary............................................. 479 TSM Device Path Status..............................................................479 TSM Filespace Summary............................................................. 480 TSM LAN Free Server Status...................................................... 480 TSM Recovery Log Usage........................................................... 480 Virtual Host Top 10 Longest Time Since Last Power On............... 481 VTL Status................................................................................... 481 Xsigo Infiniband Port Status.........................................................481 Troubleshooting system templates............................................................481 Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Errors........................................... 481 Fibre Channel Port Errors By Node..............................................482 Fibre Channel Port Errors By Port............................................... 482 Network Interface Errors.............................................................482 Network Interface Errors By Interface.........................................483 Network Interface Errors By Interface for ruleset....................... 483 Network Interface Errors By Node.............................................. 483 RecoverPoint RPA Packet Loss................................................... 483 Tape Drive Error Count................................................................484 Tape Drive Error Count By Node................................................. 484 Tape Drive Error Trend................................................................ 484 Tape Library Errors......................................................................484 Viewlet system templates.........................................................................485 Backup KPIs................................................................................ 485 Backup Size Distribution for Backup KPIs....................................485 Data Backed Up Daily for Backup KPIs........................................ 485 Data Collection Agent Errors....................................................... 485 Data Collection Agent Health.......................................................486 Data Collection Agents Down...................................................... 486 Objects Not Meeting RPOs......................................................... 486 RecoverPoint Protected Capacity by System..............................486 RecoverPoint Protected Capacity by CG.................................... 486 Unprotected Clients for Backup KPIs.......................................... 486 22 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Preface As part of an effort to improve its product lines, EMC periodically releases revisions of its software and hardware. Therefore, some functions described in this document might not be supported by all versions of the software or hardware currently in use. The product release notes provide the most up-to-date information on product features. Contact your EMC technical support professional if a product does not function properly or does not function as described in this document. Note This document was accurate at publication time. Go to EMC Online Support (https:// support.emc.com) to ensure that you are using the latest version of this document. Purpose This document provides a reference of all the predefined system reports that are installed with DPA. ISO9001 certification The management system governing the design and development of this product is ISO 9001:2008 certified. Audience This document is intended for system administrators. Readers of this document must be familiar with the following tasks: l l l Identifying the different hardware and software components that make up the backup and replication environment. Following procedures to configure backup and replication operations. Following guidelines to locate problems and implement solutions. Revision history The following table presents the revision history of this document. Table 1 Revision history Revision Date Description 01 April 29, 2016 First release of this document for EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 02 October 21, 2016 Update to Data Domain Client Deduplication Ratio on page 407 03 January 17, 2017 Update to Backup Replication Sync Times by Client on page 253 ISO9001 certification The management system governing the design and development of this product is ISO 9001:2008 certified. Related documentation The DPA documentation set includes the following publications: EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 23 Preface l Data Protection Advisor Custom Reporting Guide l Data Protection Advisor Data Collection Reference Guide l Data Protection Advisor Installation and Administration Guide l Data Protection Advisor Migrator Technical Notes l Data Protection Advisor online help system l Data Protection Advisor Product Guide l Data Protection Advisor Release Notes l Data Protection Advisor Report Reference Guide l Programmers' Guide to Using DPA REST API l Data Protection Advisor Security Configuration Guide l Data Protection Advisor Software Compatibility Guide l Other Technical Notes/White Papers Special notice conventions that are used in this document EMC uses the following conventions for special notices: NOTICE Identifies content that warns of potential business or data loss. Note Contains information that is incidental, but not essential, to the topic. Typographical conventions EMC uses the following type style conventions in this document: Table 2 Style conventions 24 Bold Used for names of interface elements, such as names of buttons, fields, tab names, and menu paths (what the user specifically selects or clicks) Italic Used for full titles of publications that are referenced in text Monospace Used for: l System code l System output, such as an error message or script l Pathnames, file names, prompts, and syntax l Commands and options Monospace italic Used for variables Monospace bold Used for user input [] Square brackets enclose optional values | Vertical bar indicates alternate selections - the bar means “or” {} Braces enclose content that the user must specify, such as x or y or z ... Ellipses indicate non-essential information that is omitted from the example EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Preface Table 2 Style conventions (continued) Where to get help EMC support, product, and licensing information can be obtained as follows: Product information For documentation, release notes, software updates, or information about EMC products, go to EMC Online Support at https://support.emc.com. Technical support Go to EMC Online Support and click Service Center. Several options for contacting EMC Technical Support appear on the site. Note that to open a service request, you must have a valid support agreement. Contact your EMC sales representative for details about obtaining a valid support agreement or with questions about your account. Online communities Go to the EMC Community Network at https://community.emc.com for peer contacts, conversations, and content on product support and solutions. Interactively engage online with customers, partners, and certified professionals for all EMC products. Your comments Your suggestions help to improve the accuracy, organization, and overall quality of the user publications. Send your opinions of this document to [email protected]. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide 25 Preface 26 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CHAPTER 1 Introduction This chapter contains the following topic: l Overview............................................................................................................28 Introduction 27 Introduction Overview DPA includes several hundred predefined system templates and control panels, which you can use to run reports on selected users in your backup and replication environment. Use these system templates to quickly and easily retrieve information and monitor your environment. This document provides reference information on the predefined system templates organized as follows: 28 l The reports that are available by object supported by DPA. l The system templates that are available in DPA and the reports within each system template. l The reports that are available through the Report Wizard and the system template that is used to generate the report. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CHAPTER 2 DPA Reports This chapter contains the following topics: l l Overview............................................................................................................30 Run Reports area menu items............................................................................ 30 DPA Reports 29 DPA Reports Overview This appendix lists the reports that are available through the Run Reports area and shows the system template that is used to generate the report. Reports by System Template on page 69 provides detailed information on the system templates available in DPA. Reports provide detailed information derived from the various objects in the DPA object inventory. When a report menu item is selected, the appropriate objects are passed to a system template which defines how the report is generated. The report results are then displayed. You can run reports on group objects or on single objects. When generating a report from a group object, all objects within the group are passed to the system template and the report results include data for all of the hosts within that group. The contents of the Run Reports area that displays varies depending on the object that is selected. Run Reports area menu items The following table lists the available Run Reports area menu items. Table 3 Run Reports area menu items 30 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Access Group Configuration Data Domain VTL Access Group Configuration on page 156 ACSLS ACS Status ACSLS ACS Status on page 443 ACSLS Lock Status ACSLS Lock Status on page 444 ACSLS Port Status ACSLS Port Status on page 444 ACSLS Server Status ACSLS Server Status on page 444 Action Configuration NetWorker Action Configuration on page 168 Active Clients Backup Active Clients on page 185 Active Clone Job Distribution Active Clone Job Distribution on page 426 Active Clones Active Clone Job Details on page 183 Active Job Distribution Backup Active Job Distribution on page 426 Active Jobs Backup Active Jobs on page 186 Active Streams Data Domain Active Streams on page 451 Aggregate Data Change Ratio Backup Job Change Ratio Aggregate on page 225 Aggregate Device Throughput Backup Device Throughput Aggregate on page 367 Aggregate Disk Activity Aggregate Disk Activity on page 362 Aggregate Disk Performance Aggregate Disk Performance on page 362 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Aggregate Fibre Channel Device Performance Aggregate Fibre Channel Device Performance on page 362 Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Errors Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Errors on page 481 Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Performance Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Performance on page 362 Aggregate Infiniband Port Performance Xsigo Aggregate Infiniband Port Performance on page 389 Aggregate Network Interface Errors Network Interface Errors on page 482 Aggregate Network Interface Performance Aggregate Network Interface Performance on page 405 Aggregate Processor Utilization Aggregate Processor Utilization on page 363 Aggregate Status NetBackup Device Cleaning Status on page 461 Aggregate Tape Drive Performance Aggregate Tape Drive Performance on page 363 Aggregate Utilization Filesystem Aggregate Utilization on page 413 Aggregate Utilization By Aggregate Network Interface Performance By Interface on page 417 Aggregate Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance Aggregate Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance on page 363 Aggregate Virtual Network Interface Performance Aggregate Virtual Network Interface Performance on page 405 Alerts During Backup Analysis Events During Backup All Media Details on page 343 All Clients Backup All Clients on page 187 All Groups Backup All Groups on page 190 All Jobs Backup All Jobs on page 192 All Jobs - No Restarts Backup All Jobs - No Restarts on page 190 All Maintenance Jobs Maintenance Job Details on page 278 Analysis Engine History Analysis Engine History on page 332 Analysis Engine Performance Analysis Engine Performance on page 332 Application Configuration Cluster Application Configuration for Application on page 154 Application Configuration Changes for Pools Backup Application Configuration Changes for Pools on page 102 Application Error Details Backup Server Error Details on page 255 Run Reports area menu items 31 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 32 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Application Growth Application Growth on page 87 Application Usage Application Usage on page 88 Application Usage Storage Pool Application Usage on page 100 Array Fan-out Ratio Array Fan-out Ratio on page 135 Attempts Clone Attempts for Specific Clone Operation on page 264 Attempts Restore Job Attempts for Specific Job on page 295 Audit User Changes Avamar Audit User Changes Details on page 101 Available Media Details of Available Volumes on page 354 Available Volumes Media Details of Available Volumes on page 354 Average Hourly Data Ingested Data Domain Average Hourly Data Ingested on page 407 Average Job Run Backup Average Details For Specific Job on page 204 Backup and Restore KPIs Backup and Restore KPIs on page 122 Backup Client Deduplication Ratio Details Backup Client De-Dupe Ratios on page 207 Backup Client Occupancy Backup Client Occupancy on page 405 Backup Device Status Backup Device Status on page 446 Backup Job Details for Volume Backup Job Details for Specific Volume on page 228 Backup Job Devices Backup Job Device Mapping on page 230 Backup Job Error Details Backup Job Error Details on page 230 Backup Job Error Distribution Backup Job Error Distribution on page 231 Backup Job Error Summary Backup Job Error Summary on page 231 Backup Server Details Backup Server Configuration on page 149 Backup Jobs with Last Resolution Backup Jobs with Last Resolution on page 437 Battery Configuration Battery Configuration on page 70 Battery Status Battery Status on page 448 Boost Files Data Domain Boost Files on page 154 Boost File Replication Statistics Data Domain Boost Statistics on page 407 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Boost File Unit Statistics Data Domain Boost Storage Unit Statistics on page 407 Boost Option Status Data Domain Boost Option Status on page 451 Capacity Overview Network Interface Configuration on page 82 Capacity Overview for Block Capacity Overview for Block on page 93 Capacity Overview for File Capacity Overview for File on page 93 Capacity Utilization HP VLS Capacity Utilization Trend on page 416 Card Configuration Card Configuration on page 70 Card Status Card Status on page 449 Catalog Backup Configuration NetBackup Catalog Backup Configuration on page 162 Catalog File Backup Configuration NetBackup Catalog File Backup Configuration on page 162 CG Utilization CG Utilization on page 406 Change Details BTD Change Details on page 106 Change Ratios By Client Backup Job Change Ratios By Client on page 226 Change Ratios By Job Backup Job Change Ratios for Client on page 227 Change Ratios By Job Backup Job Change Ratios on page 226 Chargeback Details By Cost Centre Chargeback Details By Cost Centre on page 119 Chargeback Details RecoverPoint Chargeback Details on page 120 Chargeback Details By Client Chargeback Details on page 118 Chargeback Total Cost of Data Retained Chargeback Total Cost of Data Retained on page 121 Chargeback Summary Chargeback Summary on page 120 Chargeback Summary RecoverPoint Chargeback Summary on page 121 Chargeback Summary By Cost Centre Chargeback Details By Cost Centre on page 119 Cleaning Tapes Media Details For Cleaning Tapes on page 344 Run Reports area menu items 33 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 34 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Client Configuration Backup Client Configuration for Pool on page 205 Client Configuration Change Details Backup Client Configuration Change Details on page 103 Client Configuration Changes Client Changes on page 124 Client Count Backup Client Count on page 139 Client Count By OS Type Backup Client Count By OS Type on page 139 Client Count By Server Backup Client Count By Server on page 139 Client Details Backup Client Configuration on page 136 Client Details Backup Server Group Client Mapping on page 255 Client Details Chargeback Details for Cost Centre on page 119 Client Occupancy by Pool Backup Client Occupancy by Pool on page 405 Client Occupancy by Server Trend Client Occupancy by Server Trend on page 450 Client Occupancy Details Client Occupancy on page 450 Client Occupancy Summary Client Occupancy Summary on page 406 Client Occupancy Trend Client Occupancy Trend on page 406 Client Schedule Backup Client Schedule on page 426 Client Status Backup Client Status on page 445 Client Storage Nodes Configuration Networker Client Storage Nodes Configuration on page 170 Client Summary Backup Client Summary on page 208 Client Usage Statistics Avamar Client Usage Statistics on page 88 Clients Not Backed Up Backup Clients Not Backed Up on page 208 Clients with Low Dedup Ratio Clients with Low Dedup Ratio on page 262 Clients Without Full Backup Clients Without Full Backup on page 125 Replication Sync Times by Client Backup Replication Sync Times by Client on page 253 Clone Operations Clone Operations on page 265 Clone Summary Clone Summary on page 266 Clone SLA Status Clone SLA Status on page 440 Cloned Backups Cloned Job Details on page 267 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Cloned Backups Cloned Job Details For Clone Operation on page 268 Cluster Configuration Cluster Configuration on page 154 Cluster Resource Status Cluster Resource Status on page 450 Cluster Status Cluster Status for Cluster on page 451 Collector Errors DPA Client License Details for ruleset on page 332 Collector Logs DPA Collector Log on page 332 Compression Factor Data Domain Boost Storage Unit Statistics on page 407 Compression Ratio EDL 3D Compression Ratio on page 412 Configuration Webserver Configuration on page 182 Configuration Options EDL Configuration Options on page 156 Connection Status Connection Status on page 317 Consistency Group Copy Details RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details on page 171 Consistency Group Copy Details RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details for Consistency Group on page 171 Consistency Group Copy Status RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status on page 467 Consistency Group Copy Status Details RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status for Active RPAs on page 467 Consistency Group Data Lag RecoverPoint Consistency Group Data Lag on page 380 Consistency Group Details RecoverPoint Consistency Group Details on page 172 Consistency Group High Load Ratio RecoverPoint Consistency Group High Load Ratio on page 380 Consistency Group Journal Lag RecoverPoint Consistency Group Journal Lag on page 381 Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates on page 380 Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates for Last Day RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates for Last Day on page 381 Consistency Group Throughput RecoverPoint Consistency Group Throughput on page 381 Consistency Group Time Lag RecoverPoint Consistency Group Time Lag on page 382 Run Reports area menu items 35 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 36 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Consistency Group Transaction Lag RecoverPoint Consistency Group Transaction Lag on page 382 Control File Configuration Control File Details on page 317 CPU Utilization Process CPU Utilization on page 419 CRR Consistency Group Details RecoverPoint Consistency Group Details on page 172 Daily Compression Statistics Data Domain Daily Compression Statistics on page 408 Daily Migration By Storage Pool TSM Daily Migration By Storage Pool on page 101 Daily Reclamation By Storage Pool TSM Daily Reclamation By Storage Pool on page 101 Daily Staging By Storage Pool Backup Daily Staging By Storage Pool on page 89 Daily Success Rate Backup Daily Success Rate on page 437 Daily Success Rate Against Target Backup Daily Success Rate Against Target on page 122 Data Backed Up Daily Backup Data Backed Up Daily on page 89 Data Backed Up Daily By Device Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Device on page 89 Data Backed Up Daily By Media Server Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Media Server on page 89 Data Backed Up Daily By Server Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Server on page 89 Data Backed Up Weekly Backup Data Backed Up Weekly on page 90 Data Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Media Server on page 90 Data Backed Up Weekly By Server Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Server on page 90 Data Change Ratio By Client Backup Job Change Ratios By Client on page 226 Data Change Ratio By Job Backup Job Change Ratios on page 226 Data Domain Boost Statistics Data Domain Boost Statistics on page 407 Data Domain Clone Details Backup Data Domain Clone Details on page 209 Data Domain Compression Ratio Count Data Domain Compression Ratio Count on page 408 Data Domain Data Ingested Data Domain Data Ingested on page 409 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Data Domain Data Written To Data Domain Data Written To on page 409 Data Domain DeDuplication Ratio Data Domain DeDuplication Ratio on page 409 Data Domain File Distribution by Count Data Domain File Distribution By Count on page 409 Data Domain File Distribution by Size Data Domain File Distribution By Size on page 410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Data Domain Filesystem Utilization on page 410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization for Warning Critical Systems Data Domain Filesystem Utilization for Warning/Critical Systems on page 410 Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Status Count Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Status Count on page 410 Data Domain Low System Compression Ratio Trend Data Domain Low System Compression Ratio Trend on page 411 Data Domain System Utilization Data Domain System Utilization on page 411 Data Domain Reduction Ratios Data Domain Reduction Ratios on page 411 Data Domain Replication Configuration Data Domain Replication Configuration on page 155 Data Domain Utilization Data Domain Utilization on page 411 Data Mover Change Details Data Mover Configuration Change Details on page 109 Data Mover Configuration Data Mover Configuration on page 156 Data Recovered Avamar Garbage Collection Data Recovered on page 88 Database Change Details All Database Changes on page 316 Database Configuration Database Details on page 318 Database Configuration Database Details For Server on page 318 Database Parameter Change Details Database Parameter Change Details on page 319 Database Parameters Database Parameters on page 319 Database Server Parameters Database Server Parameters on page 321 Database Status DataProtector Database Status on page 453 Database Usage DataProtector Database Usage on page 412 Database Utilization TSM Database Utilization on page 420 Datafile Change Details Datafile Configuration Change Details on page 321 Run Reports area menu items 37 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 38 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Datafile Configuration Datafile Details on page 321 Datafile Details Datafile Details for Database on page 322 Datafile Details Datafile Details for Tablespace on page 322 Datafile Usage DataProtector Datafile Usage on page 453 Datafile Utilization Datafile Utilization on page 323 Datafile Utilization Datafile Utilization Trend Chart on page 323 Datafile Utilization Trend Datafile Utilization for Tablespace on page 323 DB Backups TSM Database Backups on page 305 De-Dupe Details By Client Backup Client De-Dupe Ratios on page 207 De-Dupe Details By Job Backup Job Deduplication Ratio for Client on page 228 DeDupe Queue EDL 3D DeDupe Queue on page 412 Deduplication Cost Savings Deduplication Cost Savings on page 425 Deduplication ROI Trend Deduplication ROI Trend on page 426 Detailed Battery Status Battery Status on page 448 Detailed CAP Status Tape Library CAP Status on page 472 Detailed Fan Status Fan Status on page 456 Detailed PSU Status PSU Status on page 466 Detailed Thermometer Status Thermometer Status on page 474 Device Cleaning Status NetBackup Device Cleaning Status on page 461 Device Configuration Backup Device Config on page 139 Device Configuration Backup Device Configuration for Pool on page 209 Device Configuration Change Details Backup Device Configuration Change Details on page 103 Device Errors Backup Device Errors on page 445 Device Performance Summary Backup Device Performance Summary on page 366 Device Performance Summary By Device Backup Device Performance Summary By Device on page 366 Device Schedule (mounts) Backup Device Usage on page 429 Device Schedule (performance) Backup Device Scheduling on page 428 Device Status Backup Device Status on page 446 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Device Summary By Device Backup Device Performance Summary By Device on page 366 Device Throughput By Device Backup Device Throughput by Device on page 367 Device Utilization Backup Device Utilization by Device on page 405 Disk Activity By Disk Disk Activity By Disk on page 369 Disk Activity By Host Disk Activity By Host on page 370 Disk Array Configuration Disk Array Configuration on page 71 Disk Array Status Disk Array Status on page 454 Disk Configuration Disk Configuration on page 72 Disk Media Details NetBackup Backup Job Disk Media Details on page 281 Disk Performance By Disk Disk Performance By Disk on page 370 Disk Performance By Host Disk Performance By Host on page 370 Disk Pool Configuration NetBackup Disk Pool Configuration on page 163 Disk Pool Status NetBackup Disk Pool Status on page 461 Disk Status Disk Status on page 455 Disk Summary Disk Summary on page 73 Disk Volume Configuration NetBackup Disk Volume Configuration on page 164 Disk Volume Status NetBackup Disk Volume Status on page 461 Domain Footprint Avamar Domain Footprint on page 184 Duration of Backups Daily Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily on page 90 Duration of Backups Daily By Media Server Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server on page 90 Duration of Backups Daily By Server Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server on page 90 Duration of Backups Weekly Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly on page 90 Duration of Backups Weekly By Media Server Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server on page 91 Duration of Backups Weekly By Server Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server on page 91 EMC File Storage Change Details Celerra Change Details on page 107 Run Reports area menu items 39 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 40 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Empty Media Details For Empty Volumes on page 345 Error Details TSM Migration Errors For Specific Job on page 308 Error Details TSM Reclamation Errors For Specific Job on page 310 Error Trend Tape Drive Error Trend on page 484 Errors Backup Job Error Details for Specific Job on page 231 Errors Restore Job Error Details For Specific Job on page 296 Errors Tape Drive Error Trend on page 484 Errors By Node Tape Drive Error Count By Node on page 484 Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Estimated Protected Backup Capacity on page 268 Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Details Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Details on page 268 Events Array Fan-out Ratio on page 135 Events Backup Daily Success Rate on page 437 Events BTD Storage Utilization By Node on page 405 Exclusion Details Recoverability Excludes on page 397 Expirations TSM Expirations on page 306 Expired Licenses License Details - Expired on page 338 Exported LUNs Exported LUNs on page 157 Exposure Details Exposure Details on page 269 Exposure Details Recoverability Detailed Exposures on page 396 Exposure Summary Recoverability Exposures Summary on page 398 Failed Clients Backup Failed Clients on page 210 Failed Jobs Backup Failed Jobs on page 213 Failover Status EDL Failover Status on page 455 Failure Details One Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client on page 126 Failure Details Three Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client on page 130 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Failure Details Two Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client on page 133 Fan Configuration Fan Configuration on page 73 Fan Status Fan Status on page 456 Fibre Channel Device Configuration Fibre Channel Device Configuration on page 157 Fibre Channel Device Mapping Fibre Channel Device Mapping on page 157 Fibre Channel Device Performance Fibre Channel Device Performance on page 371 Fibre Channel Device Performance By Node Fibre Channel Device Performance By Node on page 371 Fibre Channel Device Performance Summary Fibre Channel Device Performance Summary on page 371 Fibre Channel Port Configuration Fibre Channel Configuration on page 73 Fibre Channel Port Errors By Node Fibre Channel Port Errors By Node on page 482 Fibre Channel Port Errors By Port Fibre Channel Port Errors By Port on page 482 Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node on page 372 Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port on page 372 Fibre Channel Port Status Fibre Channel Port Status on page 456 Fibre Channel Port Utilization Fibre Channel Port Utilization on page 413 Fileserver Average Response Times Fileserver Average Response Times on page 372 Fileserver Cache Hit Rates Fileserver Cache Hit Rates on page 372 Fileserver Cache Hit Rates By Node Fileserver Cache Hit Rates By Node on page 373 Fileserver Client Performance Fileserver Client Performance on page 373 Fileserver Exports Fileserver Exports on page 158 Fileserver Filesystem Performance Fileserver Filesystem Performance on page 373 Fileserver Operations Fileserver Operations on page 374 Fileserver Operations By Protocol Fileserver Operations By Protocol on page 374 Run Reports area menu items 41 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 42 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Fileserver Operations with Direction Fileserver Operations with Direction on page 374 Fileserver Performance Summary Fileserver Performance Summary on page 375 Fileserver Status Fileserver Status on page 457 Filesystem Archive Unit Status Data Domain Filesystem Archive Unit Status on page 451 Filesystem Configuration Filesystem Configuration on page 74 Filesystem Configuration Filesystem Configuration for Filesystem on page 75 Filesystem Configuration Summary Filesystem Configuration Summary on page 77 Filesystem Details Filesystem Details on page 77 Filesystem Details Filesystem Status on page 458 Filesystem Mount Configuration Filesystem Mount Configuration on page 158 Filesystem Performance Summary Filesystem Performance Summary on page 376 Filesystem Summary Filesystem Status Summary on page 459 Filesystem Options Data Domain Filesystem Options on page 452 Filesystem to LUN Mapping Celerra Filesystem to LUN Mapping on page 152 Filesystems Not Backed Up Filesystems Not Backed Up on page 272 Frozen Media Details For Frozen Volumes on page 346 Full Media Details For Full Volumes on page 347 Full Job History Backup Full History of Specific Job on page 217 Gaps Recoverability Gaps on page 398 Garbage Collection Jobs Avamar Garbage Collection Jobs on page 184 Grid Utilization BTD Storage Utilization By Node on page 405 Group Configuration Backup Group Configuration for Pool on page 219 Group Configuration Change Details Backup Group Configuration Change Details on page 104 Group Configuration Changes Backup Group Configuration Change Details on page 104 Group Count Backup Group Count on page 144 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Group Count By Server Backup Group Count By Server on page 144 Group Details Backup Group Configuration on page 141 Group Forecast Backup Group Forecast on page 429 Group Job Status Backup Group Job Status Details on page 221 Group Membership Backup Server Client Group Mapping on page 149 Group Status Backup Group Status on page 222 Group Summary Backup Group Summary on page 222 Host Configuration Host Configuration on page 79 Host Configuration Host Configuration for Host on page 79 Host Status Host Status on page 459 Host Utilization Host Performance For Client on page 377 Host Utilization During Backup Host Performance During Backup on page 377 Imported LUNs Imported LUNs on page 159 Index Change Details Index Configuration Change Details on page 324 Index Configuration Details Index Details for Table on page 325 Index Details Index Details for Table on page 325 Index Details Index Details For Schema on page 325 Index Details Index Details For Tablespace on page 325 Infiniband Port Configuration Xsigo Infiniband Port Configuration on page 87 Infiniband Port Performance by Node Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Node on page 389 Infiniband Port Performance by Port Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Port on page 389 Infiniband Port Status Xsigo Infiniband Port Status on page 481 Infiniband Port Utilization Xsigo Infiniband Port Utilization on page 425 iSCSI Adapter Configuration iSCSI Configuration on page 81 iSCSI Adapter Status iSCSI Status on page 459 iSNS Servers iSCSI iSNS Configuration on page 159 Job Attempts Backup Job Attempts for Specific Job on page 225 Run Reports area menu items 43 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 44 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Job Configuration Backup Job Configuration for Pool on page 228 Job Configuration Change Details Backup Job Configuration Change Details on page 105 Job Configuration Changes Backup Job Configuration Change Details on page 105 Job Details Backup All Jobs for Specific Client on page 194 Job Details Backup Client Slowest/Fastest Jobs for Client on page 364 Job Details Backup Failed Jobs For Client on page 215 Job Details Backup Job Configuration on page 144 Job Details Backup Server Group Job Mapping on page 152 Job Distribution Backup Job Distribution on page 429 Job Distribution By Media Server Backup Job Distribution By Media Server on page 430 Job Forecast Backup Job Forecast on page 430 Job Forecast versus Actual Backup Job Forecast versus Actual on page 430 Job Forecast versus Actual Summary Backup Job Forecast versus Actual Summary on page 431 Job Schedule Backup Job Schedule on page 431 Job Schedule Backup Job Schedule For Specific Client on page 433 Job Summary Backup Job Summary on page 232 Job Summary Backup Job Summary for Group Run on page 233 Journal Utilization RecoverPoint Journal Utilization on page 419 Jukebox Configuration Backup Jukebox Config on page 144 Last 5 Runs Backup Last 5 Runs of Job on page 233 Last Successful Backup Backup Last Successful Run of Job on page 244 License Details License Details on page 337 License Conformance License Conformance on page 337 License Details License Details on page 337 License Summary License Summary on page 338 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Lifecycle Policy Configuration NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Configuration on page 165 Lifecycle Policy Destinations NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Destination on page 165 Listener Latency DPA Listener Latency on page 333 Listener Performance Listener Performance on page 334 Listener Request Rate DPA Listener Request Rate on page 333 Logfile Change Details Logfile Configuration Change Details on page 326 Logfile Configuration Logfile Details on page 326 Long Running Jobs Backup All Long Running Jobs on page 199 LUN Configuration LUN Configuration on page 81 LUN Mappings LUN Mapping on page 160 LUN Status LUN Status on page 460 Maintenance Job Maintenance Job Details on page 278 Maintenance Job Attempts Maintenance Job Attempts for Specific Job on page 278 Maintenance Job Errors Maintenance Job Errors on page 279 Maintenance Job Schedule Maintenance Job Schedule on page 436 Maintenance Job Summary Maintenance Job Summary on page 279 Masking Configuration Masking Configuration for Storage Array on page 391 Masking Configuration Masking Configuration for Initiator on page 391 Media Age Distribution Media Age Distribution on page 340 Media Contents Media Contents on page 340 Media Count Media Count Trend on page 95 Media Count By Location Media Count By Location Trend on page 93 Media Count By Pool Media Count By Pool Trend on page 95 Media Count By Pool and Location Media Count By Pool and Location Trend on page 94 Media Count By Pool and State Media Count By Pool And State Trend on page 94 Media Count By Pool and State and Location Media Count By Pool and State and Location Trend on page 94 Media Count By State Media Count By State Trend on page 95 Run Reports area menu items 45 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 46 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Media Count By State and Location Media Count By State and Location Trend on page 95 Media Details Backup Job Media Details on page 232 Media Details Clone Job Media Details on page 264 Media Details Clone Job Media Details for Clone Operation on page 264 Media Details Staging Media Details on page 300 Media Details With Retention Over 8 Years Media Details With Retention Over 8 Years on page 356 Media Location Changes Media Location Change Details on page 110 Media Retention Distribution Media Retention Distribution on page 357 Media Size Distribution Media Size Distribution on page 358 Media To Be Destroyed Volumes To Be Destroyed on page 135 Media To Be Recycled Expired Volumes on page 125 Media Usage Media Usage Trend on page 96 Media Usage By Library Media Usage By Library Trend on page 95 Media Usage By Pool Media Usage By Pool Trend on page 96 Media Usage By Pool and Library Media Usage By Pool and Library Trend on page 96 Memory Configuration Memory Configuration Details on page 82 Memory Configuration Shared Memory Configuration on page 175 Memory Configuration Change Details Memory Configuration Change Details on page 110 Memory Status Current Memory Usage By Node on page 407 Memory Usage Process Memory Usage on page 419 Memory Utilization Memory Utilization By Node on page 417 Migration Jobs TSM Migration Jobs on page 308 Migration Summary TSM Migration Summary on page 308 Mirror Configuration Mirror Configuration on page 161 Mirror Performance Mirror Performance on page 379 Mirror Status Mirror Status on page 460 MirrorView Configuration MirrorView Configuration on page 392 MirrorView/A Performance MirrorView/A Performance on page 392 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report MirrorView/A Performance for CG MirrorView/A Performance for CG on page 393 Missed Clients Backup Missed Clients on page 246 Missed Jobs Backup Missed Jobs on page 247 Modes Data Domain Modes on page 452 Most Exposed Jobs Top 10 Most Exposed Jobs on page 131 Mount Requests Backup Mount Requests on page 361 Moves TSM Moves on page 309 MTree Daily Compression Statistics MTree Daily Compression Statistics on page 416 MTree Physical Capacity Statistics MTree Physical Capacity Statistics on page 416 MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Trend MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Trend on page 417 MTree Quota Utlization MTree Quota Utilization on page 416 MTree Retention Lock Status MTree Retention Lock Status on page 460 NetBackup Disk Media Details NetBackup Clone Job Disk Media Details on page 281 NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration on page 163 NetBackup Global Configuration NetBackup Global Configuration on page 164 NetBackup Master Server Configuration Settings NetBackup Server Configuration Details on page 166 NetBackup Media Server Configuration Details NetBackup Media Server Configuration Details on page 166 NetBackup Storage Server Configuration Details NetBackup Storage Server Configuration on page 166 NetBackup VM Rule Configuration NetBackup VM Rule Configuration on page 168 Network Interface Configuration Network Interface Configuration on page 82 Network Interface Configuration Network Interface Configuration for Interface on page 83 Network Interface Configuration Change Details Network Interface Configuration Change Details on page 111 Network Interface Errors By Interface Network Interface Errors By Interface on page 483 Run Reports area menu items 47 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 48 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Network Interface Errors By Node Network Interface Errors By Node on page 483 Network Interface IP Network IP Configuration on page 464 Network Interface Link Pair Network Interface Link Pair on page 462 Network Interface Link Pair Autonegotiation Status Network Interface Link Pair Autonegotiation Status on page 462 Network Interface Link Pair Duplex Status Network Interface Link Pair Duplex Status on page 463 Network Interface Performance By Interface Network Interface Performance By Interface on page 417 Network Interface Performance By Node Network Interface Performance By Node on page 418 Network Interface Status Network Interface Status on page 463 Network IP Configuration Network IP Configuration for IP on page 464 NetWorker Bootstraps Legato Networker Bootstrap Report on page 277 Node Topology Node Topology on page 334 Node Utilization Filesystem Utilization By Node on page 415 Number of Files Backed Up Daily Backup Files Backed Up Daily on page 91 Number of Files Backed Up Daily By Media Server Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Media Server on page 91 Number of Files Backed Up Daily By Server Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Server on page 91 Number of Files Backed Up Weekly Backup Files Backed Up Weekly on page 91 Number of Files Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Media Server on page 91 Number of Files Backed Up Weekly By Server Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Server on page 92 Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily on page 92 Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server on page 92 Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server on page 92 Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly on page 92 Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server on page 92 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server on page 93 Objects with Replication Exposures Objects with Replication Exposures on page 335 Obsolete Recovery Points Recoverability Obsolete Recovery Points on page 399 Offline Media Details for Offline Volumes on page 350 Offline Expired Volumes Media Details For Offline Expired Volumes on page 349 Online Media Details For Online Volumes on page 351 Open Files Backup Open Files on page 249 Open Files Backup Open Files for Specific Job on page 249 Orphaned LUNs Orphaned LUNs on page 465 Partial Media Details For Partial Volumes on page 352 Partially Successful Clients Backup Partial Clients on page 250 Partition Details Partition Details for Database on page 326 Partition Details Partition Details for Index on page 327 Partition Details Partition Details for Table on page 327 Performance Summary Celerra Replication Performance Summary on page 368 Performance Trend Celerra Replication Performance on page 368 Policy Configuration Changes Backup Group Configuration Change Details on page 104 Pool Capacity Usage Graph Pool Capacity Usage on page 97 Pool Capacity Usage Graph Pool Capacity Usage for Pool on page 97 Pool Configuration Backup Pool Configuration on page 145 Pool Configuration Changes Backup Pool Configuration Change Details on page 105 Pool Status Backup Pool Status on page 447 Portal Configuration iSCSI Portal Configuration on page 160 Problem Clients Backup Problem Clients on page 252 Process Status Process Status on page 465 Run Reports area menu items 49 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 50 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Processor Configuration Processor Configuration on page 83 Processor Status Processor Status on page 466 Processor Utilization By CPU Processor Utilization By CPU on page 379 Processor Utilization By Node Processor Utilization By Node on page 379 Protected Capacity RecoverPoint Protected Capacity on page 97 Protection Policy Configuration Networker Protection Policy Configuration on page 170 PSU Configuration PSU Configuration on page 84 PSU Status PSU Status on page 466 Publisher Performance Publisher Performance on page 335 Purge Preview DataProtector Purge Preview on page 453 Quota Status Filesystem Quota Status on page 457 RPA Site Compression RecoverPoint RPA Site Compression on page 383 RPA Site Latency RecoverPoint RPA Site Latency on page 383 RPA Site Packet Loss RecoverPoint RPA Site Packet Loss on page 384 RPA Site Throughput RecoverPoint RPA Site Throughput on page 384 RPA WAN Throughput RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput on page 384 RPA WAN Throughput for Last Day RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput for Last Day on page 384 RDF Configuration for CG RDF Configuration for CG on page 394 RDF Configuration for DG RDF Configuration for DG on page 394 RDF Configuration for Symmetrix RDF Configuration on page 393 RDFG Performance RDFG Performance on page 395 Recall List Media Details For Offline Expired Volumes on page 349 Reclamation Jobs TSM Reclamation Jobs on page 310 Reclamation Summary TSM Reclamation Summary on page 310 Record File Usage DataProtector Record File Usage on page 454 Recoverability Status Monitor by Client Recoverability Status Monitor By Client on page 401 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Recoverability Solutions Enabler Managed Storage Arrays Recoverability Solutions Enabler Managed Storage Arrays Recoverability Visualization Recoverability Visualization on page 402 Recoverability Visualization Details Recoverability Visualization Details on page 402 RecoverPoint Change Details RecoverPoint Change Details on page 112 Recycle List Media Details Top 10 Oldest Volumes on page 355 Remote Mirror Configuration Remote Mirror Configuration on page 174 Remote Mirror Performance Remote Mirror Performance on page 385 Remote Mirror Status Remote Mirror Status on page 470 Remote Replication RPO forecast for MV/A Remote Replication RPO forecast for MV/A on page 403 Remote Replication RPO forecast for SRDF/A Remote Replication RPO forecast for SRDF/A on page 403 Replication alerts by group Replication Alerts by Group on page 335 Replication Configuration Celerra Configuration Change Details on page 108 Replication Configuration Recoverability Replication Configuration on page 400 Replication Performance Summary Celerra Replication Performance Summary on page 368 Replication Performance Trend Celerra Replication Performance on page 368 Replication Process View Recoverability Replicated Object Process View on page 396 Replication RPO Compliance Replication RPO Compliance on page 403 Replication Set Configuration RecoverPoint Replication Set Configuration on page 173 Replication Status Replication Status on page 470 Replication Summary Avamar Replication Summary on page 184 Replication Time Lag Data Domain Replication Time Lag on page 369 Report Card Backup Report Card on page 253 Report History Report History on page 335 Reporter Median Report Run Time DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time on page 333 Request History Request History on page 336 Run Reports area menu items 51 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 52 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Request Summary Request Summary Restore Details Backup Restore Details on page 253 Restore Disk Media NetBackup Restore Job Disk Media Details on page 288 Restore Job Error Details Restore Job Error Details on page 296 Restore Jobs with Last Resolution Restore Jobs with Last Resolution on page 441 Restore Media Restore Job Media Details on page 296 Restore Summary Restore Job Summary on page 297 Retention Policy Configuration Avamar Retention Policy Configuration on page 136 RPA Active Consistency Groups RecoverPoint RPA Active Consistency Groups on page 469 RPA Compression RecoverPoint RPA Compression on page 382 RPA Details RecoverPoint RPA Details on page 173 RPA Latency RecoverPoint RPA Latency on page 382 RPA Packet Loss RecoverPoint RPA Packet Loss on page 483 RPA Throughput RecoverPoint RPA Throughput on page 383 RPA Writes RecoverPoint RPA Writes on page 383 Schedule Configuration Changes Backup Schedule Configuration Change Details on page 106 Schedule Details Backup Schedule Configuration on page 148 Scheduled Report History Scheduled Report History on page 336 Schema Configuration Database Schema Details For Server on page 320 Server Configuration Database Server Details on page 320 Server Configuration Changes Backup Server Configuration Change Details on page 106 Server Logs DPA Server Logs on page 333 Server Parameter Change Details Database Server Parameter Change Details on page 320 Server to Storage Configuration Server to Storage Configuration on page 400 Server to Storage Topology Recoverability Server To Storage Mappings Topology on page 400 Server Utilization Backup Server Utilization on page 406 Service Status DataProtector Service Status on page 454 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Share Change Details Fileserver Export Change Details on page 109 Shared Device Schedule (mounts) Backup Device Shared Usage on page 429 Size Distribution Backup Size Distribution on page 435 Size Distribution By Media Server Backup Size Distribution By Media Server on page 435 SLA Summary Backup SLA Summary on page 441 SLA Summary By Client Backup SLA Summary By Client on page 441 Snap Job Details Snap Job Details on page 297 Snap Job Summary Snap Job Summary on page 299 Snapshot Status Filesystem Snapshot Status on page 458 Snapshot Utilization Filesystem Snapshot Utilization on page 414 Solid State Storage Configuration Solid State Storage Configuration on page 84 Solid State Storage Performance Solid State Storage Performance on page 385 Splitter Details RecoverPoint Splitter Details on page 174 Staging Details Staging Operations on page 300 Staging Summary Staging Summary on page 300 Status Celerra Replication Status on page 449 Storage Array Capacity Usage Graph Storage Array Capacity Usage on page 98 Storage Array Raw Capacity Storage Array Raw Capacity on page 99 Storage Mapping Recoverability Replicated Object Storage Mapping on page 397 Storage Pool Application Growth Storage Pool Application Growth on page 99 Storage Pool Capacity Storage Pool Capacity on page 100 Storage Pool Configuration Celerra Storage Pool Configuration on page 153 Storage Pool Copies TSM Storage Pool Copies on page 311 Storage Pool Migration Schedule TSM Storage Pool Migration Schedule on page 436 Storage Pool Reclamation Schedule TSM Storage Pool Reclamation Schedule on page 437 Storage Pool Utilization TSM Storage Pool Utilization on page 420 Storage Server Status NetBackup Storage Server Status on page 462 Run Reports area menu items 53 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 54 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Storage to Server Topology Recoverability Storage To Server Mappings Topology on page 401 Storage Unit Configuration NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration on page 167 Storage Unit Configuration Changes NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration Change Details on page 111 Storage Unit Group Configuration NetBackup Storage Unit Group Configuration on page 168 Strike Summary Strike Summary on page 128 Successful Clients Backup Successful Clients on page 256 Successful Jobs Backup Successful Jobs on page 258 Symmetrix Change Details Symmetrix Change Details on page 113 Symmetrix LUN to Data Domain vDisks Symmetrix LUN to Data Domain vDisks on page 176 System Capacity License Details Data Domain System Capacity Licenses on page 452 System Dynamics DataProtector System Dynamics on page 412 System License Details Data Domain System Licenses on page 453 System User Status Data Domain System User Status on page 453 Table Change Details Table Configuration Change Details on page 327 Table Details Table Details for Database on page 328 Table Details Table Details for Schema on page 328 Table Details Table Details for Tablespace on page 328 Tablespace Change Details Tablespace Configuration Change Details on page 329 Tablespace Configuration Tablespace Details on page 329 Tablespace Details Tablespace Details for Database on page 330 Tablespace Utilization Tablespace Utilization on page 330 Tape Library Volume Utilization Trend Tape Library Volume Utilization Trend on page 423 Tape Drive Change Details Tape Drive Configuration Change Details on page 114 Tape Drive Configuration Tape Drive Configuration on page 85 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Tape Drive Performance By Drive Tape Drive Performance By Drive on page 385 Tape Drive Performance By Node Tape Drive Performance By Node on page 386 Tape Drive Performance Summary Tape Drive Performance Summary on page 386 Tape Drive Status Tape Drive Status on page 471 Tape Drive Status Details Tape Drive Status on page 471 Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Tape Library Aggregate Utilization on page 421 Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Trend Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Trend on page 421 Tape Library CAP Status Tape Library CAP Status on page 472 Tape Library Capacity Utilization Tape Library Capacity Utilization on page 421 Tape Library Change Details Tape Library Configuration Change Details on page 114 Tape Library Compression Ratio Tape Library Compression Ratio on page 421 Tape Library Configuration Tape Library Config on page 86 Tape Library DeDupe Ratio Tape Library Deduplication Ratio on page 421 Tape Library Empty Volume Count Tape Library Empty Volume Count on page 472 Tape Library Errors Tape Library Errors on page 484 Tape Library Slot Status Tape Library Slot Status on page 472 Tape Library Status Details Tape Library Status Details on page 473 Tape Library Throughput Tape Library Throughput on page 422 Tape Library Utilization Tape Library Utilization on page 422 Tape Library Utilization Trend Tape Library Utilization Trend on page 423 Tape Library Volume Status Tape Library Volume Status on page 473 Thermometer Configuration Thermometer Configuration on page 87 Thermometer Status Thermometer Status on page 474 Throughput Backup Device Throughput for Device on page 367 Throughput HP VLS Throughput on page 416 Throughput by Protocol Fileserver Data Throughput By Protocol on page 373 Run Reports area menu items 55 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 56 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Top 10 Clients By Avg Daily Change Top 10 Backup Clients By Avg Daily Change on page 303 Top 10 Clients with Best De-Dupe Rate Top 10 Backup Clients with Best De-Dupe Rate on page 303 Top 10 Clients with Worst De-Dupe Rate Top 10 Backup Clients with Worst De-Dupe Rate on page 303 Top 10 Fastest Clients Backup Top 10 Fastest Clients on page 367 Top 10 Growing Tables Top 10 Growing Tables by Rows on page 330 Top 10 Largest Clients Backup Top 10 Largest Clients on page 261 Top 10 Largest Tables By Row Count Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Row Count on page 331 Top 10 Largest Tables By Size Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Size on page 331 Top 10 Longest Time Since Last Power On Virtual Host Top 10 Longest Time Since Last Power On on page 481 Top 10 Offending Clients Top 10 Offending Clients on page 423 Top 10 Offending Jobs Top 10 Offending Jobs on page 423 Top 10 Slowest Clients Backup Top 10 Smallest Clients on page 262 Top 10 Unreliable Clients Backup Top 10 Most Unreliable Clients on page 262 Total Daily Duration by Group Backup Daily Total Group Duration on page 89 Total Job Size and Used Space for Data Domain NetWorker Total Job Size and Used Space for Data Domain on page 96 Total Reduction Ratio EDL 3D Total Reduction Ratio on page 413 Total Replicated Capacity Data Domain Total Replicated Capacity on page 93 Trend CPU Utilization Process CPU Utilization For Specific Process on page 419 Trend Media Usage Media Usage on page 358 Trend Thermometer Temperature Thermometer Trend for Specific Thermometer on page 475 TSM Backup Set Details TSM Backup Set Details on page 304 TSM Client Occupancy Details TSM Client Occupancy on page 475 TSM Client Occupancy Summary TSM Client Occupancy Summary on page 420 TSM Command Event Details TSM Command Event Details on page 304 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report TSM Copy Group Configuration TSM Copy Group Configuration on page 177 TSM Database Status TSM Database Status on page 476 TSM Database Usage TSM Database Usage on page 476 TSM Database Volume Status TSM Database Volume Status on page 476 TSM DB Backup Errors TSM Database Backup Errors on page 304 TSM Defined Server Configuration TSM Defined Server Configuration on page 177 TSM Defined Server Status TSM Defined Server Status on page 477 TSM Delete Volumes TSM Delete Volumes on page 305 TSM Device Path Status TSM Device Path Status on page 479 TSM DR Media Media Reclamation Distribution on page 358 TSM Expiration Errors TSM Expiration Errors on page 305 TSM Filespace Details TSM Client Filespaces on page 475 TSM Filespace Summary TSM Filespace Summary on page 480 TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details on page 477 TSM Identify Duplicate Process Trend TSM Identify Duplicate Process Trend on page 478 TSM LAN Free Server Configuration TSM LAN Free Server Configuration on page 178 TSM LAN Free Server Status TSM LAN Free Server Status on page 480 TSM Management Class Configuration TSM Management Class Configuration on page 179 TSM Move Errors TSM Move Errors on page 309 TSM Policy Set Configuration TSM Policy Set Configuration on page 179 TSM Recovery Log Usage TSM Recovery Log Usage on page 480 TSM Replication Node Status TSM Replication Node Status on page 478 TSM Replication Process Details TSM Replication Process Details on page 478 TSM Replication Process Summary TSM Replication Process Summary on page 479 TSM Server Side Processes TSM Server Side Process Scheduling on page 436 TSM Storage Pool Copy Errors TSM Storage Pool Copy Errors on page 311 TSM Top 10 Backups With Worst Idle Wait Times TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Idle Wait Times on page 313 Run Reports area menu items 57 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) 58 Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report TSM Top 10 Backups With Worst Media Wait Times TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Media Wait Times on page 313 TSM Top 10 Clients With Worst Idle Wait Times TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Idle Wait Times on page 314 TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Media Wait Times TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Media Wait Times on page 314 Uncloned Backups Uncloned Backups on page 314 Underlying Disk Activity Filesystem Disk Activity on page 414 Unconfigured Clients Backup Unprotected/Unconfigured Clients on page 123 Underlying Disk Details Filesystem Disk Configuration on page 78 Underlying Disk Performance Filesystem Disk Performance on page 375 Underlying Disk Status Filesystem Disk Status on page 457 Unprotected Clients Unprotected Clients on page 135 Unprotected Nodes Recoverability Unprotected Nodes on page 402 Unsuccessful Clients Backup Unsuccessful Clients on page 123 Used Media Details For Used Volumes on page 353 Used Volumes Media Details For Used Volumes on page 353 Utilization Filesystem Utilization By Partition on page 415 Vault Attempts NetBackup Vault Attempts for Specific Job on page 290 Vault Disk Media Details NetBackup Vault Job Disk Media Details on page 291 Vault Ejects NetBackup Vault Ejects on page 290 Vault Jobs NetBackup Vault Jobs on page 291 Vault Media Details Vault Job Media Details on page 316 Vault Preview NetBackup Vault Preview on page 292 VBA Configuration NetWorker VBA Configuration on page 170 VBA Utilization NetWorker VBA Utilization on page 418 Virtual Host Disk Configuration Change Details Virtual Host Disk Configuration Change Details on page 115 Virtual Data Mover Configuration Virtual Data Mover Configuration on page 180 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node on page 387 Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port on page 388 Virtual Fibre Channel Port Utilization Virtual Fibre Channel Port Utilization on page 424 Virtual Host Change Details Virtual Host Change Details on page 115 Virtual Host Change Details Virtual Host Change Details on page 115 Virtual Host Configuration Virtual Host Configuration on page 180 Virtual Host Disk Configuration Virtual Host Disk Configuration on page 180 Virtual Host Disk Performance Virtual Host Disk Performance on page 388 Virtual Host Memory Utilization Virtual Host Memory Utilization on page 424 Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration on page 181 Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Change Details Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Change Details on page 116 Virtual Host Network Performance Virtual Host Network Interface Performance on page 388 Virtual Host Processor Utilization Virtual Host Processor Utilization on page 388 Virtual Network Interface Performance By Interface Virtual Network Interface Performance By Interface on page 424 Virtual Network Interface Performance By Node Virtual Network Interface Performance By Node on page 425 Virtual Port Queue Depth Summary Xsigo Virtual Port Queue Depth Summary on page 390 Virtual To Physical Port Mapping Xsigo Virtual To Physical Port Mapping on page 182 Virtualization Manager Configuration Virtualization Manager Configuration on page 181 VMs Not Backed Up Backup VMs Not Backed Up on page 262 VNX/CLARiiON Change Details VNX/CLARiiON Change Summary on page 117 Volume Configuration Celerra Volume Configuration on page 153 Volume Configuration RecoverPoint Volumes for Replication Sets on page 470 Volume Details RecoverPoint Volumes on page 469 Run Reports area menu items 59 DPA Reports Table 3 Run Reports area menu items (continued) Run Reports area menu Item System Template used to generate the report Volume Expiration Report Volume Expiration Report on page 360 Volume Priority Configuration 60 Web Server Response Time Webserver Response Time on page 389 Workflow Configuration NetWorker Workflow Configuration on page 170 Workflow Job Status NetWorker Workflow Job Status on page 294 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CHAPTER 3 Reports by object This chapter describes the reports by object supported by DPA. You can choose the monitored object that you want to report on, then select the report type to be applied. l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Backup application reporting..............................................................................62 Data Domain reporting....................................................................................... 62 Virtualization reporting.......................................................................................63 Database reporting.............................................................................................63 HP EVA reporting...............................................................................................64 ACSLS Server reporting.....................................................................................64 Recoverability reporting.....................................................................................65 EMC File Storage reporting............................................................................... 65 EMC Disk Library reporting................................................................................65 RecoverPoint reporting......................................................................................66 Tape library reporting.........................................................................................66 Fibre Channel switch reporting.......................................................................... 66 IP switch reporting.............................................................................................67 Xsigo reporting...................................................................................................67 System reporting............................................................................................... 67 Data Protection Advisor reporting......................................................................68 Enterprise Application reporting.........................................................................68 Reports by object 61 Reports by object Backup application reporting Backup application reports are based on data gathered from the backup server and include reports from the following system templates: l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Data protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Return on investment reports in ROI system templates on page 425 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. Data Domain reporting Data Domain reports are based on data gathered from EMC Data Domain® storage appliances and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Licensing reports in Licensing system templates on page 337 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. 62 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by object Virtualization reporting Virtualization reports are based on data gathered from virtual machines and host servers and include reports from the following system templates: l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Data protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. Database reporting Database reports are based on data gathered from databases and include reports from the following system templates: l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Data protection reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. Virtualization reporting 63 Reports by object HP EVA reporting HP EVA reports are based on data gathered from HP Enterprise Virtual Array (EVA) disk arrays and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity Planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Data protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. ACSLS Server reporting ACSLS Server reports are based on data gathered from Automated Cartridge System Library Software (ACSLS) module and include reports from the following system templates: 64 l Capacity Planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Data protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l Licensing reports in Licensing system templates on page 337 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by object l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. Recoverability reporting Recoverability reports are specific to EMC VNX/CLARiiON and Symmetrix storage arrays and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity Planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 EMC File Storage reporting EMC File Storage reports are based on data gathered from AEMC File Storage Appliances and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset Management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. EMC Disk Library reporting EMC Disk Library reports are based on data gathered from EMC Disk Library (EDL and EDL 3D) and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Licensing reports in Licensing system templates on page 337 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Recoverability reporting 65 Reports by object RecoverPoint reporting RecoverPoint reports are based on data gathered from RecoverPoint system and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Tape library reporting Tape library reports are based on data gathered from tape libraries and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Licensing reports in Licensing system templates on page 337 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Fibre Channel switch reporting Fibre Channel switch reports are based on data gathered from Fibre Channel switches and include reports from the following system templates: 66 l Asset management in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by object IP switch reporting IP switch reports are based on data gathered from IP switches and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Xsigo reporting Xsigo reports are based on data gathered from Xsigo I/O Director and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l DPA in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance in Performance system templates on page 361 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 l Troubleshooting reports in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 System reporting System reports are based on data gathered from host operating systems, configuration, status, and performance of backup servers, media servers, and backup clients; and include reports from the following system templates: l Asset management reports in Asset Management system templates on page 70 l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l DPA in DPA system templates on page 331 l Data Protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Recoverability reports in Recoverability system templates on page 390 l Resource utilization reports in Resource Utilization system templates on page 404 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 IP switch reporting 67 Reports by object l Troubleshooting in Troubleshooting system templates on page 481 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. Data Protection Advisor reporting Data Protection Advisor reports are based on performance, status, and security of DPA itself and include reports from the following system templates: l DPA System reports in DPA system templates on page 331 Enterprise Application reporting Enterprise Application reports are based on data gathered from Enterprise Applications and include reports from the following system templates: l Capacity planning reports in Capacity Planning system templates on page 87 l Change management reports in Change Management system templates on page 101 l Chargeback reports in Chargeback system templates on page 117 l Compliance and risk mitigation reports in Compliance system templates on page 122 l Configuration reports in Configuration system templates on page 135 l Data protection reports in Data Protection system templates on page 183 l DPA reports in DPA system templates on page 331 l Performance reports in Performance system templates on page 361 l Scheduling reports in Scheduling system templates on page 426 l Service level management reports in Service Level Management system templates on page 437 l Status reports in Status system templates on page 443 Reports are also included in the Control Panels section of the DPA web console. 68 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide CHAPTER 4 Reports by System Template This chapter describes the system templates that are available in DPA when you choose the report type and then choose the monitor objects to apply the report to l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l What are system templates?..............................................................................70 Asset Management system templates................................................................70 Capacity Planning system templates.................................................................. 87 Change Management system templates............................................................101 Chargeback system templates...........................................................................117 Compliance system templates.......................................................................... 122 Configuration system templates....................................................................... 135 Data Protection system templates....................................................................183 Database system templates.............................................................................. 316 DPA system templates......................................................................................331 Licensing system templates............................................................................. 337 Media management system templates............................................................. 338 Operations system templates...........................................................................360 Performance system templates........................................................................ 361 Provisioning system templates.........................................................................390 Recoverability system templates......................................................................390 Resource Utilization system templates............................................................ 404 ROI system templates...................................................................................... 425 Scheduling system templates...........................................................................426 Service Level Management system templates..................................................437 Status system templates..................................................................................443 Troubleshooting system templates................................................................... 481 Viewlet system templates................................................................................ 485 Reports by System Template 69 Reports by System Template What are system templates? System templates define reports. They contain the logic, operators, sources, output formatting, and field names that are used by DPA to generate the report results. Reports > Custom Reports > System Templates contains all the report templates available in DPA by default. Report results are determined by the object(s) that are passed to the template. System templates cannot be modified. To change system template parameters or to create a custom template based on a system template, make a copy of the template and save it with a unique name. Asset Management system templates Asset Management reports show the physical configuration of a machine’s components. The asset management control panel provides a high-level view of a machine’s configuration. These reports provide information on: l Summary of the number of processors l Amount of memory l Number of network interfaces l Number of Fibre Channel HBAs l Disk and file system configuration on a machine For more specific details on the various reports, select one of the reports described in the following sections. Battery Configuration Returns the battery configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Battery Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the battery l Type - Type of battery Card Configuration Returns the card configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Card Configuration data source. 70 l Node - Name of the object l Adaptor - Identifier for the adaptor l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Serial - Serial number of the card l Type - Type of the card: Fibre Channel, iSCSI, Network l Manufacturer - Manufacturer of the card l Model - Model of the card l Name - Name of the card EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Description - Description of the card l Hardware Version - Version of the card hardware l Firmware Version - Version of the card firmware l Driver Name - Name of the card driver l Driver Version - Version of the card driver l Enclosure - Identifier for the enclosure containing the disk l Signature - Unique number assigned to the Storage Processor by the manufacturer l Memory - Amount of memory on the card l Read cache - Size of the card read cache l Write cache - Size of the card write cache l Buffer size - Size of the buffer Disk / Filesystem Capacity Returns the disk and file system capacity in a column chart. Uses data from the Disk Configuration and Filesystem Capacity data sources. l Size - Size of the disk in gigabytes l Disk number - Disk number for the enclosure (0–15) l Bus - Identifier for the disk bus l Capacity - Total capacity of the disk or file system (in MB) l Hostname - Name of the host on which the disk resides l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, and NTFS Disk Array Configuration Returns the disk array configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Array Config data source. l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the disk array l Sub name - Name of the storage array l System Type - Type of system; for example, CLARiiON l Manufacturer - Manufacturer of the disk array l Model - Model number of the disk array l Firmware - Version of software of the disk array l Volume delay - Volume Repair Delay parameter of the disk array l Cache page Size - Size of cache page (in KB) l Num devices - Number of logical devices l High watermark - Percentage of dirty pages to trigger a cache flush l Low watermark - Percentage of dirty pages to stop a cache flush Disk / Filesystem Capacity 71 Reports by System Template l Num disks - Number of physical disks that the array holds l Num RAID groups - Number of RAID groups that the array holds l Num storage groups - Number of storage groups l Unassigned cache pages - Number of unassigned cache pages l Num visible devices - Number of visible devices Disk Configuration Returns the disk configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Sub name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Device - Identifier for the disk from the operating system l System type - Type of system; for example, CLARiiON l Manufacturer - Manufacturer of the disk l Model - Model of the disk l Serial number - Serial number of the disk l Firmware revision - Firmware version of the disk l Size - Size of the disk (in GB) l Enclosure - Identifier for the enclosure containing the disk l Disk number - Disk number for the enclosure (0–15) l Bus - Identifier for the bus connected to the disk l Director - Identifier for the Symmetrix director l Interface - Identifier for the network interface l SCSI Id - Identifier for the SCSI interface l RAID group - RAID group the disk belongs to l Pool name - Name of the storage pool Disk Count By State Returns the disk count by state in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Count By State data source. l Node - Object associated with the disk l State - State of the disk l Disks - Count of disks in this state l Sub name - Identifier for the Storage Array Disk Count By Use Returns the disk count by use in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Count By Use data source. 72 l Node - Object associated with the disk l Use - Use of the disk EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Disks - Count of disks used for this purpose l Sub name - Identifier for the Storage Array Disk Summary Summary of the disks on a host in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Configuration data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the disk array l Disks - Disks that the array holds l Size - Size of the disk Fan Configuration Returns the fan configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Fan Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the fane l Make - Make of the fan l Model - Model of the fan l Serial - Serial number of the fan l Location - Case location of the fan Fibre Channel Configuration Returns the Fibre Channel configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config data source. l Hostname - Name of the switch l Port - Identifier for the Fibre Channel port: n If the port is named, the name of the port is used as the identifier n If the port is not named, the index for the port is used as the identifier l Sub name - If returning data for RecoverPoint, the name of site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Otherwise, the identifier for the Celerra Data Mover l Sub name 2 - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Controller - Number of the controller l WWPN - World Wide Port Name for the Fibre Channel interface l Mode - Indicates if the port is a Target or Initiator l OS Device - Device name from which Fibre Channel port is visible on the operating system (HBAs only) l Internal - Indicates if the Fibre Channel port is internal, that is, if the port is connected to internal hardware, and not a SAN (HP disk arrays only) l Type - Type of Fibre Channel port on the switch or HBA l Virtual - Indicates if the Fibre Channel port is virtual or physical l WWNN - World Wide Node Name of the Fibre Channel port Disk Summary 73 Reports by System Template l Auto neg - Indicates if autonegotation is enabled on this interface Fibre Channel Port Count Returns in the Fibre Channel port count in a column chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config data source. l Count - Number of ports on the switch Filesystem Configuration Returns the file system configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration data source. 74 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem ID - File system internal identifier l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Files - Maximum number of files on the file system (1000) l Allocated - Pre-allocated capacity of the file system. Note that this is not the same as the used capacity of the file system but applies to space that has been reserved but not necessarily used (in MB) l Snapshot Capacity - Amount of space reserved for the use of snapshots (in MB). If the total amount of data stored for snapshots is higher than the amount of space reserved for snapshots, additional space is claimed from the volume itself l Save Volume - Volume used to allocate checkpoints for this file system l Convert UCode - Force conversion of all directories to UNICODE format when accessed through both NFS and CIFS l Create UCode - Force UNICODE format directories to be created by default l SVO Enable - Perform "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) integrity checking of all operations on volume l SVO Allow RMAN - "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) integrity checks are compatible with volumes containing RMAN backup data l SVO Checksum - Perform "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) checksum calculation for all writes on volume l SVO Reject Errors - Reject operation and return an error to client if any of "SnapValidator" integrity checks fail (otherwise failure is simply logged) l Extent - Allow extents (in which application writes are written as a write of a larger group of related data blocks) l FS Size Fixed - File system remains a fixed size when volume size changes (for example, when adding disks to a traditional volume or when a snapmirrored volume relationship is broken) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Ignore Inconsistent - Ignore (at boot time) aggregate level inconsistencies that would normally be considered serious enough to keep the associated volume offline l Maximum Directory Size - Maximum size to which a directory can grow (in KB) l Minra - Filer performs minimal file read ahead (instead of employing speculative read-ahead) l A Time Update - A time on inode is always updated (otherwise a time on inode is not updated when a file is read l I2P - Inode to parent pathname translations are enabled l No Snap - Automatic snapshots are disabled l No Snap Dir - Snapshot directories are inaccessible l Sched Snap Name - How scheduled snapshots are named: create_time (name constructed using . (For example, hourly. 2007-06-20-1200)), ordinal (name constructed using . (For example, hourly.0, hourly.1, ...)) l NV Fail - Filer checks at boot time to verify that NVRAM is in a valid state l Try First - Specifies which policy to pursue first to reclaim space when volume is full: volume_grow (attempt to increase the size of the (flexible) volume), snap_delete (delete snapshots) l Fractional Reserve - Percentage of required reserved space actually reserved for overwrites of reserved objects l RAID Type - Type of RAID used: raid0, raid4, raid_dp l RAID Size - Maximum number of disks in each RAID group l Resync Snap Time - Mirror resynchronization snapshot frequency (in seconds) l Root - Volume is the root volume for the filer (or will become so at next reboot) l Snap Mirrored - Volume is a snapmirrored copy of another volume l Sec Style - Security Mode for access: UNIX, CIFS, Mixed l Op Locks - Indicates whether opportunistic locking is enabled on the file system l Volume Size - Size of the volume (in MB) l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected Filesystem Configuration for Filesystem Returns the file system configuration for filesystem in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Mapping and Filesystem Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem ID - File system internal identifier l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Files - Maximum number of files on the file system (1000) Filesystem Configuration for Filesystem 75 Reports by System Template 76 l Allocated - Pre-allocated capacity of the file system. Note that this is not the same as the used capacity of the file system but applies to space that has been reserved but not necessarily used (in MB) l Snapshot Capacity - Amount of space reserved for the use of snapshots (in MB). If the total amount of data stored for snapshots is higher than the amount of space reserved for snapshots, additional space is claimed from the volume itself l Save Volume - Volume used to allocate checkpoints for this file system l Convert UCode - Force conversion of all directories to UNICODE format when accessed through both NFS and CIFS l Create UCode - Force UNICODE format directories to be created by default l SVO Enable - Perform "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) integrity checking of all operations on volume l SVO Allow RMAN - "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) integrity checks are compatible with volumes containing RMAN backup data l SVO Checksum - Perform "SnapValidator" (for Oracle data) checksum calculation for all writes on volume l SVO Reject Errors - Reject operation and return an error to client if any of "SnapValidator" integrity checks fail (otherwise failure is simply logged) l Extent - Allow extents (in which application writes are written as a write of a larger group of related data blocks) l FS Size Fixed - File system remains a fixed size when volume size changes (for example, when adding disks to a traditional volume or when a snapmirrored volume relationship is broken) l Ignore Inconsistent - Ignore (at boot time) aggregate level inconsistencies that would normally be considered serious enough to keep the associated volume offline l Maximum Directory Size - Maximum size to which a directory can grow (in KB) l Minra - Filer performs minimal file read-ahead (instead of employing speculative read-ahead) l A Time Update - A time on inode is always updated (otherwise a time on inode is not updated when a file is read l I2P - Inode to parent pathname translations are enabled l No Snap - Automatic snapshots are disabled l No Snap Dir - Snapshot directories are inaccessible l Sched Snap Name - How scheduled snapshots are named: create_time (name constructed using . (For example, hourly. 2007-06-20-1200)), ordinal (name constructed using . (For example, hourly.0, hourly.1, ...)) l NV Fail - Filer checks at boot time to verify that NVRAM is in a valid state l Try First - Specifies which policy to pursue first to reclaim space when volume is full: volume_grow (attempt to increase the size of the (flexible) volume), snap_delete (delete snapshots) l Fractional Reserve - Percentage of required reserved space actually reserved for overwrites of reserved objects l RAID Type - Type of RAID used: raid0, raid4, raid_dp l RAID Size - Maximum number of disks in each RAID group EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Resync Snap Time - Mirror resynchronization snapshot frequency (in seconds) l Root - Volume is the root volume for the filer (or will become so at next reboot) l Snap Mirrored - Volume is a snapmirrored copy of another volume l Sec Style - Security Mode for access: UNIX, CIFS, Mixed l Op Locks - Indicates whether opportunistic locking is enabled on the file system l Volume Size - Size of the volume (in MB) l Internal - Indicates if the fibre channel port is internal (if the port is connected to internal hardware, and not a SAN) Filesystem Configuration Summary Summary of the file system configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Filesystem Count - Number of ports on the file system l Total Capacity - Total capacity for all selected clients (in MB) Filesystem Details Returns the file system details in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem ID - File system internal identifier l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Files - Maximum number of files on the file system (1000) l Allocated - Pre-allocated capacity of the file system. Note that this is not the same as the used capacity of the file system but applies to space that has been reserved but not necessarily used (in MB) l Snapshot capacity - Amount of space reserved for the use of snapshots (in MB). If the total amount of data stored for snapshots is higher than the amount of space reserved for snapshots, additional space is claimed from the volume itself l Save Volume - Volume used to allocate checkpoints for this file system l Used Space - Amount of space that is currently used on the file system in megabytes l Used Files - Total number of files that are on the file system l Used Snapshot Space - Amount of snapshot space used on the file system in megabytes Filesystem Configuration Summary 77 Reports by System Template Filesystem Disk Configuration Returns the file system disk configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Disk Configuration data source. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array on which the file system resides l Disk node - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Disk - Identifier of the disk l Disk Sub Name - Name of the storage array on which the disk resides l Manufacturer - Manufacturer of the disk l Model - Model of the disk l Serial Number - Serial number of the disk l Firmware Revision - Firmware version of the disk l Size - Size of the disk (in GB) Filesystem Summary Summary of the file system in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Capacity and Filesystem User Space data sources. l Used space - Total amount of used space on all hosts (in MB) l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Used Files - Total number of files that are on the file system l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS Filesystem Summary By Client Summary of the file system by client in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Capacity By Client and Filesystem User Space By Client data sources. 78 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Used Space - Total amount of used space on all hosts (in MB) l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Used Files - Total number of files that are on the file system l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS Host Configuration Returns the host configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Vendor - Vendor name l Controller - Controller name l Product - Product name l OS Class - Class of operating system (Windows or UNIX) l Version - Version of the operating system l iSCSI Name - Node name for machines with iSCSI interfaces. This field is not displayed for machines that do not have iSCSI interfaces l Host ID - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Configuration for Host Returns the host configuration for host in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Mapping and Host Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Controller - Controller name l Vendor - Vendor name l Product - Product name l OS Class - Class of operating system (Windows or UNIX) l Version - Version of the operating system l iSCSI Name - Node name for machines with iSCSI interfaces. This field is not displayed for machines that do not have iSCSI interfaces l Host Id - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Count Returns the host count in a column chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l Count - Number of hosts l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Configuration 79 Reports by System Template Host OS Distribution Returns the host OS distribution in a pie chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l Product - Product name l Hosts - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Summary By Class Returns the host summary by class in a pie chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l OS Class - Class of operating system (Windows or UNIX) l Hosts - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Summary By Platform Returns the host summary by platform in a pie chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l Product - Product name l Hosts - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Summary By Vendor Returns the host summary by vendor in a pie chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. l Vendor - Vendor name l Hosts - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name Host Summary By Version Returns the host summary by version in a pie chart. Uses data from the Host Configuration data source. 80 l Version - Version of the operating system l Hosts - ID or serial number of the host l Location - Hardware location l Mail Server - Mail server name EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template iSCSI Configuration Returns information on the configuration of iSCSI adapters on a object in a table report. Uses data from the iSCSI Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object on which the iSCSI adapter exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Name - Name of the iSCSI adapter LUN Configuration Returns the LUN configuration in a table report. Uses data from the LUN Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array on which the LUN resides l Name - Name of the LUN l LUN Name - Name of the LUN on the storage system to which the disk-based volume is mapped. Populated only for disk-based volumes l System Type - Type of system. For example, CLARiiON l LUN ID - Identifier for the LUN l Serial - Serial number of the LUN l Size - Size of the LUN (in GB) l Volume - Volume on which the LUN resides, if applicable l Type - Type of operating system to which the LUN is exported: AIX, HPUX, Image, Linux, Netware, Solaris, VMware, Windows l Description - Description of the LUN l Guarantee - Type of reserve on the LUN: Full, None l Created - Time the LUN was created l Create Time - Timestamp of the LUN creation l RAID Level - RAID level of the LUN l Idle Delay Time - Time spent idle waiting for a task (in seconds) l Idle Threshold - Maximum time spent idle before idle threshold action l Max Prefetch (Blocks) - Maximum number of pages read ahead l Prefetch Disable (Blocks) - Reading ahead is disabled l Prefetch Idle Count - Maximum number of pages read ahead while idle l Pool - Pool name l RAID Group - RAID group the disk belongs to LUNs And Filesystems On Same Volume for ruleset Returns details on LUNs and file systems are on the same volumes in a table report. Uses data from the File server exports and LUN Configuration data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists iSCSI Configuration 81 Reports by System Template l Alert - Identifier of the alert Memory Configuration Returns the memory configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Memory Configuration data source. l Physical Memory - Amount of physical memory (in MB) l Virtual Memory - Amount of virtual memory (in MB) Memory Configuration Details Returns details of the memory configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Memory Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Physical Memory - Amount of physical memory (in MB) l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Multiple Tape Drive Firmware Revisions for ruleset Returns the multiple tape drive firmware revisions in a table report. Report for Multiple tape drive firmware revisions rule. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. l Alert - Identifier of the alert Network Interface Configuration Returns the network interface configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Network Interface Config data source. 82 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Description - Optional description for the interface l MAC Address - MAC address of the interface l Autoneg - Indicates if the interface is set to auto negotiate l MTU - Maximum Unit of Transmission for the interface (largest packet size) (in bytes) l Failover - Standby interface if the primary interface goes down l Multicast - If enabled, the interface can send data to more than one address at the same time l Receive Buffer - Amount of data that can be received before sending a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Send Buffer - Amount of data that can be sent before receiving a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used l Virtual - Indicates if the network interface is virtual or physical l Jumbo Packets Enabled - Indicates that Jumbo Packets are enabled by default. Network Interface Configuration for Interface Returns the network interface configuration for interface in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Mapping and Network Interface Config data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Interface - Interface name l Description - Optional description for the interface l MAC Address - MAC address of the interface l Auto Neg - Indicates if the interface is set to auto negotiate. In addition, it also indicates that the interface will try to negotiate speed and duplex settings with the host that is connected to the interface l MTU - Maximum Unit of Transmission for the interface (largest packet size) (in bytes) l Failover - Standby interface if the primary interface goes down l Multicast - If enabled, the interface can send data to more than one address at the same time l Promiscuous - If enabled, all traffic is passed to the interface rather than just packets addressed to it l Send Buffer - Amount of data that can be sent before receiving a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used l Receive Buffer - Amount of data that can be received before sending a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used l Simplex - If enabled, the interface messages are filtered and not displayed l Virtual - Indicates if the network interface is virtual or physical l Jumbo Packets Enabled - Indicates that Jumbo Packets are enabled by default. Network Interface Count Returns the network interface count in a column chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Config data source. l Count - Number of interfaces Processor Configuration Returns the processor configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Processor Configuration data source. l Hostname - Hostname in which the processors are running l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Num - Processor number Network Interface Configuration for Interface 83 Reports by System Template l Make - Make of the processors. For example, Intel l Model - Model of the processor l Speed - Speed of the processor (in MHz) l Bus Speed - Speed of bus (in MHz) Processor Configuration Summary Summary of the processor configuration in a column chart. Uses data from the Processor Configuration data source. l Model - Model of the processor l Count - Number of processors PSU Configuration Returns the PSU configuration in a table report. Uses data from the PSU Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the PSU l Make - Make of the PSU l Model - Model of the PSU l Serial - Serial number of the PSU l Location - Location of the PSU Solid State Storage Configuration Returns the solid state storage configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Solid State Storage Configuration and Solid State Storage Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of machine hosting solid state storage device l Size - NVRAM (non-volatile random-access memory) capacity (in MB) l Window Size - Maximum size of data that can be received at one time by the solid state device (in MB) l PCI Error Count - Number of PCI errors on NVRAM l Error Count - Number of errors on NVRAM Spare Disk Count by Use for ruleset Returns the spare disk count in a table report. Report for Running out of spare disks rule. Uses data from the Disk Count By Use, Report Times, and User Input data sources. 84 l Node - Name of the object l Alert - Identifier of the alert EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Spare Disk Count for ruleset Returns the spare disk count in a table report. Report for Few spare disks rule. Uses data from the Disk Count By Use and User Input data sources. l Node - Name of the object l Alert - Identifier of the alert Tape Drive Configuration Returns the tape drive configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the device being monitored l Device Name - Name of the tape drive l Make - Make of the tape drive. For example, Quantum l Model - Model of the tape drive l Firmware - Firmware version running on the tape drive l Serial - Serial number of the tape drive l Interface Type - Type of interface the drive has. For example, SCSI, fibre l Interface Address - Address of the drive interface if fibre attached l Virtual - Indicates if the tape drive is a virtual tape drive l Controller Firmware - Firmware version for controller Tape Drive Firmware Revisions Returns the tape drive firmware revisions in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. l Model - Model of the tape drive l Firmware revisions - Firmware version running on the tape drive Tape Drive Firmware Summary Summary of the tape drive firmware in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. Note It is possible to gather data on only the firmware version of virtual tape drives, Physical tape drives are not reflected in this chart. l Firmware - Firmware version running on the tape drive l Count - Number of tape drives Spare Disk Count for ruleset 85 Reports by System Template Tape Drive Interface Summary Summary of the tape drive interface in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. l Interface Type - Type of interface the drive has. For example, SCSI, fibre l Count - Number of tape drives Tape Drive Model Summary Summary of the tape drive models in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Model Summary data source. l Model - Model of the tape drive l Count - Number of tape drives Tape Library Config Returns the tape library configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. 86 l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored. For normal tape libraries, this value is the name of the tape library. For devices supporting multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this value is the name of the manager l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a library directly. It is populated if monitoring a device that supports multiple libraries such as an EDL. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member. l Vendor - Tape library vendor. For example, StorageTek or Quantum l Model - Model of the tape library l Firmware - Firmware of the tape library l Serial - Serial number of the tape library l Num Hands - Number of robotic hands in the tape library l Num Slots - Number of slots in the tape library l Num Caps - Number of cartridge access ports in the tape library l Num Drives - Number of tape drives in the tape library l Num Modules - Number of modules in the tape library l Virtual - Indicates if this tape library is a virtual tape library l Dedup Enabled - Indicates if deduplication is enabled on the virtual tape library l Replication Enabled - Indicates if replication is enabled on the virtual tape library l Backup Window - Indicates if a backup window has been defined, during which deduplication operations will not take place l Backup Window Start Time - Start time of backup window (in seconds) l Backup Window End Time - End time of backup window (in seconds) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Thermometer Configuration Returns the thermometer configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Thermometer Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the thermometer l Make - Make of the thermometer l Model - Model of the thermometer l Serial - Thermometer Serial number l Location - Location of the thermometer Xsigo Infiniband Port Configuration Returns information on the InfiniBand ports on Xsigo switches in a table report. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the Xsigo Director object l Name - Identifier for the InfiniBand port Capacity Planning system templates Capacity Planning reports show the growth of the backup environment over time, which allows planning for future growth There are two types of Capacity Planning reports: l Backup reports, which show growth in the number of Jobs that were backed up and the amount of data backed up in those Jobs l Media reports, which show growth in the number of volumes and the amount of data managed by the backup server For more specific details on the various reports, select one of the reports described in the following sections. Application Growth Returns application growth in a table report. Uses data from the Application Growth data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Initiator - Path initiator l Component Name - Name of the component l Component Type - Type of component l Capacity - Total capacity (in GB) l Growth - Total growth (in GB) Thermometer Configuration 87 Reports by System Template Application Usage Returns details of application usage in a table report. Uses data from the Masking Configuration, Component LUN, and LUN Configuration data sources. l Disk Array Name - Name of the disk array l Hostname - Name of the host l Initiator - Initiator of the session l LUN - Logical unit number (LUN) through which the disk can be accessed by the source l Capacity - Size of the disk (in GB) l Component Name - Name of the component l Component Type - Type of component Avamar Client Usage Statistics Returns information on the Avamar client usage statistics in a table report. Uses data from the Avamar Garbage Collection Status, Backup Client Config, Backup Job Details, Last Backup Details, and Num Jobs data sources. l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Domain Name - Avamar domain to which the client belongs l Avg Daily Data Transferred - l Last Backup End Time - Time the last incremental backup finished on the client l Data Protected on Client - l Change Rate - l De-Dupe Rate - Average amount of data deduplicated l Retention of Last Backup - Length of time for which job is retained l Server - Name of the Avamar server l Total Data Transferred in Period - l # of successful backups - l Client Added/Deleted - Avamar Garbage Collection Data Recovered Returns information on the Avamar garbage collection process in a column chart. Uses data from the Avamar Garbage Collection Status data source. 88 l Server - Name of the Avamar server l Sub Name - Name of the Avamar client l ID - Identifier for the garbage collection process l Recovered - Number of bytes recovered by the collection process (in MB) l Recovered Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or deleted from the Recovered field to return the size of data recovered by garbage collection EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Daily Staging By Storage Pool Returns the backup daily staging by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Size Migrated By Storage Pool data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool l Size - Total amount of data migrated from the storage pool (in MB) Backup Daily Total Group Duration Returns the total duration of group runs for each 24 hour interval in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Duration data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Total Duration - Total duration of the group run l Noted - Timestamp associated with the total duration value Backup Data Backed Up Daily Returns the total data that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up in a window (in GB) Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Device Returns the total data by device that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size By Device data source. l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device l Total Size - Total amount of data (in MB) l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Media Server Returns the total data by media server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Data Backed Up Daily By Server Returns the total data by server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Daily Staging By Storage Pool 89 Reports by System Template Backup Data Backed Up Weekly Returns the total data that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Returns the total data by media server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Data Backed Up Weekly By Server Returns the total data by server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily Returns the total duration of jobs that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server Returns the total duration of jobs by media server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server Returns the total duration of jobs by server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly Returns the total duration of jobs that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l 90 Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Returns the total duration of jobs by media server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server Returns the total duration of jobs by server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Duration data source. l Total Duration - Total duration of backups up in a window (in seconds) l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Files Backed Up Daily Returns the total number of files that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Media Server Returns the total number of files by media server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Files Backed Up Daily By Server Returns the total number of files by server that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Files Backed Up Weekly Returns the total number of files that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Returns the total number of files by media server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Duration of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server 91 Reports by System Template Backup Files Backed Up Weekly By Server Returns the total number of files by server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Files data source. l Total Files - Total number of files backed up l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily Returns the total number of jobs that are backed up daily in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Media Server Returns the total number of jobs by media server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Daily By Server Returns the total number of jobs by server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Hourly Returns the total number of jobs that are backed up each week in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly Returns the total number of jobs that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Media Server Returns the total number of jobs by media server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. 92 l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server Returns the total number of jobs by server that are backed up weekly in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Server - Name of the server on which the backup occurred Capacity Overview for Block Returns the block capacity overview in a column chart. Uses data from the Disk Configuration, RAID Group Configuration, and Storage Pool Config data sources. l Capacity - Identifies the amount of potential capacity (in GB) l Type - Type of system. For example, CLARiiON l Sub Type - Capacity Overview for File Returns the file capacity overview in a column chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration, Filesystem Status, Storage Pool Configuration, and Volume Configuration data sources. l Value - (in MB) l Type - Type of system. For example, CLARiiON l Sub Type - Data Domain Total Replicated Capacity Returns the Data Domain total replicated capacity in a table report. Uses data from the Total Replicated Capacity data source. l Hostname - Hostname of replicating server l Destination Host - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Average Capacity - Average replicated capacity (in MB) Media Count By Location Trend Returns the media count by location trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Location data source. Note Volumes that are offline are not displayed. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Backup Number of Jobs Backed Up Weekly By Server 93 Reports by System Template Media Count By Pool and Location Trend Returns the count by pool and location trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and Location data source. Note Volumes that are offline are not displayed l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server l Pool - Name of the pool Media Count By Pool and State and Location Trend Returns the media count by pool and state and location trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and State and Location data source. Note Volumes that are offline are not displayed l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Pool - Name of the pool l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By Pool And State Trend Returns the media count by pool and state trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and State data source. 94 l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Name of the pool l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Media Count By Pool Trend Returns the media count by pool trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Name of the pool Media Count By State and Location Trend Returns the media count by state and location trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By State and Location data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Pool - Name of the pool l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By State Trend Returns the media count by state trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count By State data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count Trend Returns the media count trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Count data source. l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Usage By Library Trend Returns the media usage by library trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Usage By Location data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the tape library in which the volume is located l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored in that location (in MB) Media Count By Pool Trend 95 Reports by System Template Media Usage By Pool and Library Trend Returns the media usage by pool and library trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Usage By Pool and Location data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the tape library in which the volume is located l Media Usage - Amount of data broken down by pool and location (in MB) l Pool - Name of the media pool Media Usage By Pool Trend Returns the media usage by pool trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Usage By Pool data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Name of the tape pool l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored in that pool (in MB) Media Usage Trend Returns the media usage trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Usage data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored on all media (in MB) Networker Individual Job Size for Data Domain Returns the Networker individual job size for Data Domain in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Status, Backup Device Config, Pools On Data Domain, Backup Job Device Mapping, and Backup Job Details with Volume data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Job - Name of the backup job l Size - The size of the backup job l Device Access - Name of the Data Domain server instance. NetWorker Total Job Size and Used Space for Data Domain Returns the NetWorker total job size and the used space for Data Domain in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Status, Backup Device Config, Pools On Data Domain, Backup Job Device Mapping, Backup Job Details with Volume, and Filesystem Configuration data sources. 96 l Server - Name of the backup server l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain host EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total Job Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Filesystem Used Size - Total amount of used space on all hosts (in MB) Pool Capacity Usage Returns the pool capacity usage in a line chart. Uses data from the RAID Group Configuration and Storage Pool Config data sources. l Hostname - Name of the server l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l User Size - The free capacity on a storage pool over the time period l Free Capacity - l Used Capacity - The used capacity on a storage pool Pool Capacity Usage for Pool Returns the pool capacity usage for pool in a line chart. Uses data from the RAID Group Location and Storage Pool Config data sources. l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the host being monitored l Name - Storage Pool name l User Size - Amount of storage used by the pool (in MB) l Free Capacity - Free capacity of the storage pool (in MB) l Consumed Capacity - Amount of storage used by the pool (in MB) l Logical Capacity - Potential capacity of the storage pool (in MB) l Used Capacity - Amount of storage used by the pool (in MB) RecoverPoint Protected Capacity Returns the protected data capacity by RecoverPoint server in a table. Uses data from the Consistency Group Data Protected and Consistency Group Copy Configuration data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint server l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) Save Pool Detailed Usage Returns the detailed usage of save pool in a table report. Uses data from the Component LUN, Symmetrix Local Replications, and Symmetrix Snapshot Rule Status data sources. l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the host being monitored l Disk Array Name - Identifier for the array l Source Device -Name of the device on the storage array where the source object is located l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Snap Time - l Save Pool - Pool Capacity Usage 97 Reports by System Template l Used Capacity - Amount of storage used by the pool (in MB) l Changed - l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Component Name - Name of the component l Component Type - Type of the component Save Pool Usage Returns the usage of a save pool in a table report. Uses data from the Save Pool Configuration and Save Pool Status data sources. l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Array Name - Name of the array l Total Capacity - Total capacity (in GB) l Enabled Capacity - Enabled capacity (in GB) l Used Capacity - Amount of storage used by the pool (in GB) l Pool ID - Identifier for the pool l Used - Amount used (as a percentage) l State - State of the pool: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended Snapshot Utilization Returns the snapshot utilization in a line chart. Uses data from the Save Pool Configuration and Save Pool Status data sources. l Array Name - Storage array name l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Usage Percentage - Utilization of the allocated snapshot space Storage Array Capacity Returns the storage array capacity in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Array Status and Disk Configuration data sources. l Array Name - Storage array name l Total Raw Capacity - Identifies the amount of raw capacity (in GB) l Used Raw Capacity - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is used (in GB) l Available Raw Capacity - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is available (in GB) l Predicted Available - l Out of Space (Estimated Time) - Amount of time into the future at which the storage array will be out of space Storage Array Capacity Usage Returns the storage array capacity usage in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Array Status data source. l 98 Hostname - Name of the host being monitored EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Used Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is used (in GB) l Available Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is available (in GB) l Total Capacity - Identifies the amount of capacity (in GB) Storage Array Filling Up for ruleset Returns details when storage array is filling up in a table report. Report for Storage array is filling up rule. Uses data from the Disk Configuration, Disk Status, RAID Group Configuration, Storage Pool Config, and User Input data sources. l Array Name - Storage array name l Available Raw Capacity - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is available (in GB) l Type - l Pool - l Free Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is available (in GB) l Initial Consumed Capacity - l Alert - Identifier of the alert Storage Array Raw Capacity Returns the storage array raw capacity in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Array Config, Disk Array Status, Disk Configuration, Disk Status data sources. Raw capacity is considered to be the total usable capacity of any disk that has not been put in a RAID group or block storage pool (not taking into account loss of space caused by the RAID protection or other overhead). l Array Name - Storage array name l Type - l Total Raw Capacity - Identifies the amount of raw capacity (in GB) l Used Raw Capacity - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is used (in GB) l Available Raw Capacity - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is available (in GB) l Prediction Time - l Predicted Available - (in GB) Storage Pool Application Growth Returns the growth of the storage pool application in a table report. Uses data from the Pool Application Growth data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Initiator - Path initiator l Component Name - Name of the component l Component Type - Type of component l Capacity - Total capacity (in GB) l Growth - Total growth (in GB) l Pool Name - Name of the pool Storage Array Filling Up for ruleset 99 Reports by System Template l Type - Type of the pool Storage Pool Application Usage Returns the usage of the storage pool application in a table report. Uses data from the Component LUN, LUN Configuration, and Masking Configuration data sources. l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Initiator - l Hostname - l Disk Array Name - l Capacity - l LUN - Logical unit name (LUN) through which the disk can be accessed by the source Storage Pool Capacity Returns the capacity of the storage pool in a table report. Uses data from the RAID Group Configuration and Storage Pool Config data sources. l Array Name - Name of the storage array l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Type - l Raw Capacity - l User Capacity - l Used Capacity - l Subscribed - l Free Capacity - l Pool Type - Type of storage pool: Primary, Copy, or Active Data l Out of Space (Estimated Time) - Storage Pool Raw Capacity Periodic Returns the periodic storage pool raw capacity in a line chart. Uses data from the RAID Group Configuration and Storage Pool Config data sources. 100 l Disk Array - l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Free Capacity - l Pool Type - Type of storage pool: Primary, Copy, or Active Data l Type - l Disk Array - l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Free Capacity - l Type- EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template TSM Daily Migration By Storage Pool Returns the TSM daily migration by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Backup Set and TSM Total Size Migrated By Storage Pool data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool l Size - Total size of the migration jobs that were run on the storage pool TSM Daily Reclamation By Storage Pool Returns the TSM daily reclamation by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Size Reclaimed By Storage Pool data source. l Server - l Sub Name - l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been staged l Size - Change Management system templates Change Management reports show configuration changes that occur on the backup server over a given time. Change management reports display details of all of the configuration changes between the start time and end time of the report time window. Avamar Audit User Changes Details Returns information on changes made by users to Avamar objects in a table report. Uses data from the Avamar Audit data source. l Server - Host name or IP address of the Avamar server on which the backup application resides l Sub Name - Not applicable to Avamar l Domain Name - Avamar domain to which the client belongs l User - User who made the change l Object - Object type that was changed. For example, schedule, user, group, domain, dataset, or client l Operation - Description of the change l Start Time - Time the change started l End Time - Time the change took effect Backup Application Change Details Returns changes in configuration for the devices, groups, jobs, and clients of a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Server Mapping, Backup Client Config, and Backup Group Config data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server TSM Daily Migration By Storage Pool 101 Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Type - The type of configuration change; for example, client, group, job, or device. l Object - Data selection or object associated with the backup job l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Backup Application Change Details for ruleset Returns changes in configuration for the devices, groups, jobs, and clients of a backup server in a table report. Report for Backup Application configuration changed rule. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Server Mapping, Backup Client Config, and Backup Group Config data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Alert - Identifier of the alert Backup Application Change Summary Summary of the changes in configuration for the devices, groups, jobs, and clients of a backup server in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Server Mapping, Backup Client Config, and Backup Group Config data sources. l Type - Type of configuration change; for example, client, group, job, or device l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Count - Count of the number of the type of configuration change Backup Application Configuration Changes for Pools Returns the backup application configuration changes for pools in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Server Mapping, Backup Pool Device Config Mapping, Backup Pool Job Config Mapping, Backup Pool Group Config Mapping, Backup Client Config, Backup Pool Client Config Mapping, and Backup Group Config data sources. 102 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Pool - Pool of the volume that is required l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Type - Type of configuration change; for example, client, group, job, or device l Object - Data selection or object associated with change EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Application Last 10 Changes Returns the last 10 backup application changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config, Backup Device Config, Backup Group Config, and Backup Server Mapping data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Type - Type of policy l Object - Data selection or object associated with change l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Client Configuration Change Details Returns the details of backup client configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config and Backup Server Mapping data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Client - Name of the client l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Client Configuration Change Summary Summary of the changes to the backup client configuration in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Config and Backup Server Mapping data sources. l Added - A count of the number of client configuration changes added l Removed - A count of the number of modified client configuration changes l Modified - A count of the number of client configuration changes deleted Backup Device Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the backup device configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Device Alias - Alias for the drive, if available l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Device Class - Class of device: Disk, Tape l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 Backup Application Last 10 Changes 103 Reports by System Template l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the device is located l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No l Num Target Sessions - Number of target sessions l Max Sessions - Maximum number of client and server sessions l Send/Receive Timeout - Send and Receive timeout l Num Retries - Number of retries l Network Retry Interval - Network failure retry interval (in seconds) l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l Max Errors - Maximum number of errors l Device Access - Device access information l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Device Configuration Change Summary Summary of the backup device configuration changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Added - A count of the number of device configuration changes added l Modified - A count of the number of modified device configuration changes l Removed - A count of the number of device configuration changes deleted Backup Group Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the backup group configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Domain Name - Identifier for Application domain l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Group Configuration Change Summary Summary of the backup group configuration changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Group Config data source. 104 l Added - A count of the number of group configuration changes added l Modified - A count of the number of group modified configuration changes l Removed - A count of the number of group configuration changes delete EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Job Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the backup job configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Client - Name of the client l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Job - Name of a backup Job l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Schedule - Name of the backup schedule l Browse Policy - Browse policy of the NetWorker server l Retention Policy - Retention policy of the NetWorker server l Directive - Directive files of the NetWorker server l Backup Command - Commands available in the NetWorker server l Executable Path - Path for NetWorker server executable files l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Job Configuration Change Summary Summary of the backup job configuration changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Added - l Modified - l Removed - Backup Pool Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the backup pool configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Configuration data source. l Server - Hostname of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Backup Job Configuration Change Details 105 Reports by System Template Backup Schedule Configuration Change Details Returns a list of changes to backup schedules in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Schedule Config and Backup Schedule Config Dates data sources. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Group - Name of the group associated with the schedule l Schedule - Name of the schedule on the backup server l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Date Change - Backup Schedule Configuration Change Summary Summary of the backup schedule configuration changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Schedule Config and Backup Schedule Config Dates data sources. l Added - l Modified - l Removed - Backup Server Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the backup server configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Config data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Details of the specific changes that have taken place, including changed field value. l Hostname - FQDN of the backup server BTD Change Details Returns the details on the BTD changes in a table report. Uses data from the File Server Exports, Tape Library Configuration, and Tape Drive data sources. 106 l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Object - l Type - Type of export: CIFS, NFS l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template BTD Change Summary Summary information on the BTD changes in a column chart. Uses data from the File Server Exports, Tape Library Configuration, and Tape Drive Configuration data sources. l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Count - Number of changes l Type - BTD Last 10 Change Details Returns information on the last 10 changes in a table report. Uses data from the File Server Exports, Tape Library Configuration, and Tape Drive Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Celerra Change Details Returns the details of the Celerra changes in a table report. Uses data from the Data Mover Configuration, File server exports, Network Interface Config, Quota Configuration, Storage Pool Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Filesystem Mount Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, Processor Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, iSCSI Configuration, Disk Array Config, Memory Configuration, and Volume Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP Address of the EMC File Storage/Celerra l Sub Name - l Sub Name 2 - l Type - Type of file system. For example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if 'Modified' was indicated Celerra Change Summary Summary of the Celerra changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Data Mover Configuration, File server exports, Network Interface Config, Quota Configuration, Storage Pool Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Filesystem Mount Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, Processor Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, iSCSI Configuration, Disk Array Config, Memory Configuration, and Volume Configuration data sources. BTD Change Summary 107 Reports by System Template l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Change Count - Number of changes l Type - Type of file system. For example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS Celerra Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the Celerra configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Data Mover Configuration and Filesystem Configuration data sources. l Server - Name or IP Address of the EMC File Storage/Celerra l Type - Type of file system. For example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Celerra Last 10 Change Details Returns the details of the last ten Celerra changes in a table report. Uses data from the Data Mover Configuration, File server exports, Network Interface Config, Quota Configuration, Storage Pool Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Filesystem Mount Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, Processor Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, iSCSI Configuration, Disk Array Config, Memory Configuration, and Volume Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP Address of the EMC File Storage/Celerra l Sub Name - l Sub Name 2 - l Type - l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Data Domain Change Details Returns information on Data Domain changes in a table. Uses data from the Disk Configuration, Replication Rule Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, Network Interface Config, Network Interface IP Config, Symmetrix Local Replications, and LUN Configuration data sources. 108 l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Change Occurred On - The name of the object the change occurred on l Difference - Description of the change if Modified is indicated l Noted - Timestamp for the change EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Type - The type of configuration change. For example, Fibre Channel Port Configuration change, Network Interface configuration change Data Mover Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the Data Mover configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the File server exports, Fibre Channel Port Config, Network Interface Config, Processor Configuration, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Type - Type of Fibre Channel port on the switch or HBA l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Disk Array Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the disk array configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Array Config, Disk Configuration, and LUN Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Type - Type of system. For example, CLARiiON l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Fileserver Export Change Details Returns the details of the fileserver export changes in a table report. Uses data from the File server exports data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Name - Name of the file system being exported l Export - Name which the file system is being exported as l Type - Type of export: CIFS, NFS l Permission - Permissions on the export. For example, read only (NFS only) l Dedup Enabled - Indicates if deduplication was enabled on the export l Replication Enabled - Indicates if replication was enabled on the export l Backup Window - Identifier for backup window in which export took place l Backup Window Start Time - Start time for backup window (in seconds) l Backup Window End Time - End time for backup window (in seconds) l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change Data Mover Configuration Change Details 109 Reports by System Template l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Filesystem Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the file system configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Device - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Type - Type of file system; for example, UFS, EXT3, NTFS l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Media Location Change Details Returns the details of the media location changes in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Memory Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the memory configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Memory Configuration data source. 110 l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Physical Memory - Amount of physical memory (in MB) l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the NetBackup storage unit configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Storage Unit Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Name - Name of the storage unit l Media Server - Media Server with which the storage unit is associated l Storage Unit Type - Storage unit type; for example, Media Manager, Disk, NDMP, Fastrax l Media Sub Type - l On Demand Only - Indicates if the storage unit can be used for On Demand backups only (that is, only when a policy of schedule is explicitly configured to use this storage unit) l Path - Absolute path name to the directory used by Disk based storage unit l Robot Type - Type of robot on which the storage unit is located l Density - Cartridge density used by Media Manager storage units l Robot Number - Number of the robot associated with the storage unit l Max Concurrent Drives - Maximum number of drives used by a Media Manager storage unit l Max Concurrent Jobs - Maximum number of Jobs that can be multiplexed to a disk storage unit l Max Multiplexing - Maximum number of jobs multiplexed per drive. Multiplexing sends concurrent, multiple backups from one or several clients to a single drive l Max Fragment Size - Maximum fragment size used by the storage unit l NDMP Host - NDMP Host used by NDMP storage units l Disk Pool - Pool to which the storage unit belongs l High Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to trigger a cache flush l Low Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to stop a cache flush l Ok On Root - Indicates if the volume can be mounted on root file system l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Network Interface Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the network interface configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Network Interface Config data source. l Hostname - l Interface - Identifier for the network interface l MAC Address - Ethernet address for the network interface l Auto Neg - Indication of whether the interface is set to autonegotiate with a switch l Sub Name - NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration Change Details 111 Reports by System Template l Description - Network interface description l MTU - Maximum transmission unit. Size of the largest packet that a network protocol can transmit l Failover - If enabled, the interface can standby if the primary interface goes down l Multicast - If enabled, the interface can send data to more than one address at the same time l Promiscuous - If enabled, all traffic is passed to the interface rather than just packets addressed to it l Simplex - If enabled, the interface messages are filtered and not displayed l Receive Buffer - Amount of data that can be received before sending a reply. If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used. l Send Buffer - Amount of data that can be sent before receiving a reply. If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used. l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Jumbo Packets Enabled - Indicates that Jumbo Packets are enabled by default. RecoverPoint Change Details Returns the details of the RecoverPoint changes in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Configuration, Consistency Group Copy Configuration, RPA Configuration, and Splitter Configuration data sources. l Server - Name of the RecoverPoint host l Type - Type of RecoverPoint component that was changed l Object - Name of the component l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated RecoverPoint Change Summary Summary of the RecoverPoint changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Configuration, Consistency Group Copy Configuration, RPA Configuration, and Splitter Configuration data sources. l Added - l Modified - l Deleted - RecoverPoint Last 10 Changes Returns the last ten RecoverPoint changes in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Configuration, Consistency Group Copy Configuration, RPA Configuration, and Splitter Configuration data sources. l 112 Server - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Symmetrix Change Details Returns the details of the Symmetrix changes in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, Network Interface Config, Symmetrix Local Replications, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP Address of the Symmetrix host l Sub Name - Storage array identifier l Sub Name 2- l Type - l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Symmetrix Change Summary Summary of the Symmetrix changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, Network Interface Config, Symmetrix Local Replications, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Added - l Modified - l Deleted - Symmetrix Last 10 Change Details Returns the details of the last ten Symmetrix changes in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, Network Interface Config, Symmetrix Local Replications, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP Address of the Symmetrix host l Sub Name - Storage array identifier l Sub Name 2- l Type - Symmetrix Change Details 113 Reports by System Template l Object - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Tape Drive Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the tape drive configuration changes in a table report. Returns the details of the Symmetrix changes in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Configuration data source. l Hostname - l Library Name - Name of the library in which the tape drive is located. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member. l Device Name - Logical name of the device l Make - Tape drive make l Model - Model of the tape drive l Firmware - Firmware version of the tape drive l Serial - Serial number of the tape drive l Virtual - l Controller Firmware - Version of firmware running on the Controller l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Tape Library Configuration Change Details Returns the details of the tape library configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. 114 l Hostname - IP address of the server l Library Name - Name of the library in which the tape drive is located. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member. l Vendor - Name of the product vendor l Model - Model of the tape drive l Firmware - Firmware version of the tape drive l Serial - Serial number of the tape drive l Num Slots - Number of slots in the tape library l Num Drives - Number of drives in the tape library l Virtual - l Dedup Enabled - Indication of whether deduplication is enabled on the export l Replication Enabled - Indication of whether replication is enabled on the export l Backup Window - Identifier for the backup window in which the export takes place EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Backup Window Start Time - Start time for the backup window l Backup Window End Time - End time for the backup window l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Virtual Host Change Details Returns the details of virtual host changes in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration, Network Interface Config, Processor Configuration, Virtual Hosts, Virtual Host Configuration, Virtual Host Disk Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Virtualization Server - Hostname of the virtualization server l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Virtual Host Configuration Change Summary Summary of the virtual host configuration changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration, Network Interface Config, Processor Configuration, Virtual Hosts, Virtual Host Configuration, Virtual Host Disk Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Change Count - l Type - Virtual Host Disk Configuration Change Details Returns details of the virtual host disk configuration changes in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Disk Configuration data source. l Virtualization Server - Name of the virtualization server l Virtual Host - l Name - l Size - Capacity for the disk (in GB) l Virtual Disk - Virtual disk to which the disk maps l Datastore - Name of datastore on which the virtual disk is located l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Virtual Host Change Details Returns details of the virtual host changes in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration, Network Interface Config, Processor Virtual Host Change Details 115 Reports by System Template Configuration, Virtual Hosts, Virtual Host Configuration, Virtual Host Disk Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Virtualization Server - Name of the virtualization server l Virtual Host - l Hostname - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Virtual Host Last 10 Changes Details Returns details of the last 10 virtual host changes in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration, Network Interface Config, Processor Configuration, Virtual Hosts, Virtual Host Configuration, Virtual Host Disk Configuration, Filesystem Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Virtualization Server - Name of the virtualization server l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Change Details Returns the details of changes to the configuration of network interfaces on virtual machines in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration data source. l Virtualization Server - Name of the virtual machine l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Name - Identifier for the virtual interface l Virtual Network - Network on which the virtual interface is located l MAC Address - MAC Address of network interface l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated VNX/CLARiiON Change Details Returns details on VNX and CLARiiON changes in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, RAID Group Configuration, Network Interface Config, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Host Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l 116 Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the disk array EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Sub Name 2 - Identifier for the storage array on which the LUN resides l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if 'Modified' was indicated VNX/CLARiiON Change Summary Summary of VNX and CLARiiON changes in a column chart. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, RAID Group Configuration, Network Interface Config, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Host Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Count - l Type - VNX/CLARiiON Last 10 Change Details Returns details on the last ten VNX and CLARiiON changes in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Rule Configuration, RAID Group Configuration, Network Interface Config, Storage Pool Config, Save Pool Configuration, LUN Configuration, Host Configuration, Disk Configuration, Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, Network Interface IP Config, Save Pool Devices, Disk Array Config, Masking Configuration, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the disk array l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Sub Name 2 - Identifier for the storage array on which the LUN resides l Object - l Type - l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp for the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Chargeback system templates DPA provides chargeback reports that provide a financial cost analysis for the storage operations that have taken place in a customers environment. The chargeback reports use models based on the following inputs: l Size of data protected - Amount of data protected l Size of data transferred - Amount of data replicated from primary storage A cost based on these storage and transfer metrics is calculated for hosts and can be charged back to the business unit that is responsible for that client or set of clients. VNX/CLARiiON Change Summary 117 Reports by System Template The cost values per data protection and transfer are configured in a chargeback policy, which is then assigned to the host or subobject. Chargeback costs can then be totalled against a cost center in reports. If an object is not assigned a cost center, a default cost center is used in reports. The EMC Data Protection Advisor Installation and Administration Guide describes how to configure Chargeback Policies for storage. Chargeback Details Returns chargeback details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. 118 l Server - Name of the server on which the backups or restores occurred l Client - Name of the client on which the backups or restores occurred l Num. Backups - Total number of backups performed l Cost Per Num Backups - Cost per Backup (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Num Backups - Total cost for all number of backups l Cost Per GB Backed Up - Cost per gigabyte backed up (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Data Backed Up - Total cost for all gigabytes backed up l Backup Size - Gigabytes of data backed l Backup Cost - Total backup cost (number of backups and gigabytes backed up) l Num. Restores - Total number of restores performed l Cost Per Num Restores - Cost per restore (derived from the chargeback policy) l Restore Size - Total size of all restores l Cost Per GB Restored - Cost per gigabyte restored (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Data Restored - Total cost for all gigabytes restored l Cost for Num Restores - Total cost for all number of restores l Restore Cost - Total restore cost (number of restores and gigabytes restored) l Data Retained - Total of all data stored l Cost Per GB Retained - Cost per gigabyte stored (derived from the chargeback policy) l Retention Cost - Total cost of storing data l Cost Per Tape Used - Cost per tape used for backup (derived from the chargeback policy) l Num. Tapes - Total number of tapes used l Tape Cost - Total cost of tape usage l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Policy Used - Chargeback policy used to calculate chargeback costs for this object l Cost Centre - Cost center as defined in a client’s Object Properties dialog box EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Chargeback Details By Cost Centre Returns chargeback details by cost centre in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Num. Backups - Number of backups performed for that cost center l Backup Size - Gigabytes of data backed up for cost center l Num. Restores - Number of restores performed for cost center l Restore Size - Gigabytes of data restored for cost center l Data Retained - Gigabytes of data stored for cost center l Num. Tapes - Total number of tapes used for cost center l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Cost Centre - Cost center as defined in a client’s Object Properties dialog box Chargeback Details for Cost Centre Returns chargeback details for cost centre in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Cost for Num Restores - Cost for the number of restores performed for the cost center l Cost Per GB Retained - Cost per gigabyte retained for the cost center l Cost Per GB Restored - Cost per gigabyte restored for the cost center l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Num. Tapes - Number of tapes that are required l Backup Cost - Total backup cost (number of backups and gigabytes backed up) l Cost Per Num Restores - Total cost for all number of restores l Retention Cost - Total cost of storing data l Data Retained - Gigabytes of data stored for cost center l Tape Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Cost Per Tape Used - Cost per tape used for backup (derived from the chargeback policy) l Restore Cost - Total restore cost (number of restores and gigabytes restored) l Cost Per Num Backups - Cost per Backup (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Num Backups - Total cost for all number of backups l Restore Size - Gigabytes of data restored for cost center l Cost for Data Backed Up - Total cost for all gigabytes backed up l Num. Restores - Number of restores performed for cost center l Backup Size - Gigabytes of data backed up for cost center l Cost for Data Restored - Total cost for all gigabytes restored l Num. Backups - Number of backups performed for that cost center Chargeback Details By Cost Centre 119 Reports by System Template Chargeback History Returns chargeback history details in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Month - Chargeback Summary Returns chargeback summary in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. This report may be run from a RecoverPoint host in the configuration tree to display the aggregate chargeback costs for all consistency groups configured on that host, or from one or more individual consistency groups. l Num. Backups - Number of backups performed for that cost center l Backup Size - Gigabytes of data backed up for cost center l Num. Restores - Number of restores performed for cost center l Restore Size - Gigabytes of data restored for cost center l Data Retained - Gigabytes of data stored for cost center l Num. Tapes - Number of tapes that are required l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center Chargeback Summary By Cost Centre Returns chargeback summary by cost centre in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Cost - l Cost Centre - Cost center as defined in a client’s Object Properties dialog box Chargeback Total Cost Breakdown Returns the chargeback total cost breakdown in a pie chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, Backup Statistics, Num Media Written To, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Retention Cost - Total cost of storing data l Tape Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Backup Cost - Total backup cost (number of backups and gigabytes backed up) l Restore Cost - Total restore cost (number of restores and gigabytes restored) RecoverPoint Chargeback Details Returns the data protected and data transferred costs by server and consistency group in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Data Protected, 120 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Consistency Group Data Transferred, and Consistency Group Copy Configuration data sources. l Server - Name of the server on which the backups or restores occurred l Consistency Group - Name of the Consistency Group l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) l Data Transferred - Total amount of data transferred (in MB) l Cost Per GB Protected - Cost per gigabyte protected (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Data Protected - Total cost for all gigabytes protected l Cost Per GB Transferred - Cost per gigabyte transferred (derived from the chargeback policy) l Cost for Data Transferred - Total cost for all gigabytes transferred l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center l Policy Used - Chargeback policy used l Cost Centre - Cost center as defined in a client’s Object Properties dialog box RecoverPoint Chargeback Summary Summary of the data protected and data transferred costs by server and consistency group in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Data Protected, Consistency Group Data Transferred, and Consistency Group Copy Configuration data sources. l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) l Data Transferred - Total amount of data transferred (in MB) l Cost for Data Protected - Total cost for all gigabytes protected l Cost for Data Transferred - Total cost for all gigabytes transferred l Total Cost - Total of all chargeback costs for that cost center Chargeback Total Cost of Data Retained Returns information on the total cost of data retained associated with the capacity per client in a table. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping and Backup Client Occupancy by Client data sources. l Server - Name of the server l Client - Name of the client l Total Data Retained - Total data retained on the client l Group - Name of the groups associated with the clients l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Total Cost - Total of chargeback cost for data retained RecoverPoint Chargeback Summary 121 Reports by System Template Compliance system templates Compliance and risk mitigation reports display backup and restore statistics to allow administrators to measure data protection risk and policy compliance. For example, DPA provides backup and restore KPI, strike rate, and daily success rate reports. DPA also provides several reports to measure compliance for specific data protection regulations. For more specific details on the various reports, select one of the reports described in the following sections. Backup and Restore KPIs Returns the success rates and total gigabytes for backups, restores, and percentages of data and number of backups restored in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics, Num Failed Backup Jobs After DeDuplication, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Total Backups - Number of backups that completed l Total Restores - Number of restores that completed l Backup Success Rate - Success rate of backups l Restore Success Rate - Success rate of restores l Backup Data - l Restore Data - l % of Backups Restored - l % of Data Restored - l Successful Backups - All successful backups on a backup server l Failed Backups - All failed backups on a backup server l Successful Restores - All successful restores on a backup server l Failed Restores - All failed restores on a backup server Backup Daily Success Rate Against Target Returns the percentage of daily successful backups measured against the target success rate in a line chart. Uses data from the Backup Statistics and Trend Line data sources. l Success Rate - Success rate of backups l Target - Target success rate Backup Daily Success Rate And Data Returns the percentage of daily successful backups in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details for Clients with Failures, Num Jobs, and Total Size data sources. 122 l Successful Backup - All successful backups on a backup server l Failed Backups - All failed backups on a backup server l Total Backups - l Backup Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) Backup Success Rate Against Target Returns the percentage of successful backups measured against the target success rate in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics and Trend Line data sources. l Success Rate - Success rate of backups l Target - Target success rate Backup Unprotected/Unconfigured Clients Returns information on clients that have not had a backup in the last 3 days, the time of the last backup if greater than 3 days but less then a week, and the number of missed backups for the 3 day period in a table. Uses data from the Backup Client Config, Backup Schedule Config, Backup Group Config, Backup Server Mapping, Last Backup details by Client and Job, Num Jobs, and Report Times data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of backup server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Schedule Enabled - Whether the Job schedule is enabled or not l Client - Name of the client backed up l Client Active - Flag indicating whether the client is active l Group Active - Flag indicating whether the group is active l Last Backup - Time of the backup application completion l Time Since Last Backup - Time elapsed from the backup application completion l Number of Missing Backups - The number of missed backups within the 3 day period Backup Unsuccessful Clients Returns details of backups that were unsuccessful in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details for Clients with Failures data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Started - Time the backup started l Finished - Time the backup finished Client Additions Returns the client additions in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Client - Name of the client on the backup server Backup Success Rate Against Target 123 Reports by System Template l Differences - Client Changes Returns changes to configuration for all backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified Client Changes Summary Summary of the changes to configuration for all backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Differences - Client Deletions Returns the client deletions in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Differences - Client Modifications Returns the client modifications in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. 124 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Differences - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Clients Without Full Backup Returns the clients that have not received a full backup in a table report. Uses data from the Node Details and Num Jobs data sources. l Client - Name of the client on the backup server Compliance Overview Returns a compliance overview in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics, Num Failed Backup Jobs After DeDuplication, Num Jobs, Restore Details, and Restore Statistics data sources. l Period - l Backup Data - l Total Restores - Number of restores that completed l Restore Success Rate - l Restore Data - l Total Backups - Number of backups that completed l Backup Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period Expired Volumes Returns the media that is eligible for recycling in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located One Strike Failed Clients Returns the one strike failures in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Two Days Ago - (Hidden field) Status of the client one day ago. Can take the values 'failed' or 'partial' l Yesterday (Hidden field) Status of the client two days ago. If present can take the value 'success' Note the following regarding strikes and other elements of this report: l Strikes are based on clients. l Clients that have at least one failure in the last 24 hours, which is the last day, constitutes one strike. Clients Without Full Backup 125 Reports by System Template l If deduplication is enabled in Configure Report Settings in the DPA web console, the jobs on the client are deduplicated to discount earlier failures where a job later succeeded. l A partial success where some jobs are successful and some fail for a client, counts as strike. l If a client has a combination of missed/failed or missed/successful jobs, it is considered a partial client and is included in the strike count. Alternatively, a client with all missed jobs is included in the count. l Full or incremental Backup level does not make a difference; reports do not filter based on job level. One Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client Returns the one strike failures for specific clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 126 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Application status code associated with the job l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name One Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client 127 Reports by System Template l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Restore Rate Statistics for ruleset Returns the restore rate statistics in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics, Restore Statistics, and User Input data sources. l Max Backups Restored - l Max Data Restored - l % of Backups Restored - l % of Data Restored - l Alert - Identifier of the alert Strike Summary Returns the number of clients that have not been backed up for one or more days consecutively in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l One Strike - Count of the number of clients that have at least one failure in the last 24 hours, which is the last day l Two Strikes - Count of the number of clients that have at least one failure in the last 24–48 hour and last 24 hour period, which is the last two days l Three Strikes - Count of the number of clients that have at least one failure in the last three days Note the following regarding strikes and other elements of this report: 128 l Strikes are based on clients. l If deduplication is enabled in Configure Report Settings in the DPA web console, the jobs on the client are deduplicated to discount earlier failures where a job later succeeded. l A partial success where some jobs are successful and some fail for a client, counts as strike. l If a client has a combination of missed/failed or missed/successful jobs, it is considered a partial client and is included in the strike count. Alternatively, a client with all missed jobs is included in the count. l Full or incremental Backup level does not make a difference; reports do not filter based on job level. l If you run a 3-strike report with a time period of last day, the Strike Summary reportalso works but it only returns a one strike failed client count because you only ran it for the last day. If you run the Strike Summary report for last two days, it returns the count for one and two strike failures if any exist. If you run it for last week/ last three days, Strike Summary returns any failures in last three days. l The Strike Summary report is hard-coded to return failure counts only for consecutive failed clients for the last 3 days, maximum. It makes no difference to configure the report to run with a time period longer than 3 days; for example, if you run with time period of last month, it will not report on any 3-strikes within the last month. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Success Rate Against Target for ruleset Returns the success rate against the target in a table report. Report for Success rate below threshold rule. Uses data from the Backup Statistics and Trend Line data source. l Success Rate - l Target - l Alert - Identifier of the alert Three Strike Failed Clients Returns details on the clients with three strike failures in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Yesterday - (Hidden field) Status of the client one day ago. Can take the values 'failed' or 'partial' l Two Days Ago - (Hidden field) Status of the client two days ago. Can take the values 'failed' or 'partial' l Three Days Ago - (Hidden field) Status of the client three days ago. Can take the values 'failed' or 'partial' Note the following regarding strikes and other elements of this report: l Strikes are based on clients. l Clients that have at least one failure in the last three days from the time the report was run constitutes three strikes. l If deduplication is enabled in Configure Report Settings in the DPA web console, the jobs on the client are deduplicated to discount earlier failures where a job later succeeded. l A partial success where some jobs are successful and some fail for a client, counts as strike. l If a client has a combination of missed/failed or missed/successful jobs, it is considered a partial client and is included in the strike count. Alternatively, a client with all missed jobs is included in the count. l Full or incremental Backup level does not make a difference; reports do not filter based on job level. Three Strike Failed Clients for ruleset Returns details of three strike failed clients in a table report. Report for Three Strike Failures rule. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Alert - Identifier of the alert Success Rate Against Target for ruleset 129 Reports by System Template Three Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client Returns details of three strike failed for specific clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 130 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes) l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Top 10 Most Exposed Jobs Returns the last ten successful job for backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group in which the client is located l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred Top 10 Most Exposed Jobs 131 Reports by System Template l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the file system that was backed up l Domain name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Last Successful Start - Last successful start of the backup Top 5 Most Exposed Jobs Returns the last five successful Job for backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group in which the client is located l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the file system that was backed up l Domain name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Last Successful Start - Last successful start of the backup l Time Since Last Backup - Amount of time since the last backup Two Strike Failed Clients Returns the clients with two strike failures in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 132 l Client - Name of the client backed up l Yesterday - (Hidden field) Status of the client one day ago. Can take the values 'failed' or 'partial' l Two Days Ago - (Hidden field) Status of the client two days ago. If present can take the values ' failed ' or ' partial ' EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Three Days Ago - (Hidden field) Status of the client three days ago. If present can take the value 'success' Note the following regarding strikes and other elements of this report: l Strikes are based on clients. l Clients that have at least one failure in the last 24–48 hour and last 24 hour period from the time the report was run constitutes two strikes. l If deduplication is enabled in Configure Report Settings in the DPA web console, the jobs on the client are deduplicated to discount earlier failures where a job later succeeded. l A partial success where some jobs are successful and some fail for a client, counts as strike. l If a client has a combination of missed/failed or missed/successful jobs, it is considered a partial client and is included in the strike count. Alternatively, a client with all missed jobs is included in the count. l Full or incremental Backup level does not make a difference; reports do not filter based on job level. Two Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client Returns the specific clients with two strike failures in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application Two Strike Failed Jobs For Specific Client 133 Reports by System Template 134 l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes) l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Attempts - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Unprotected Clients Returns the time since the last successful backup of the client compared to the client's recovery point objective in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details and Node Details data sources. l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Recovery Point Objective - l Time Since Last Backup - Amount of time since the last backup Volumes To Be Destroyed Returns the media that should be destroyed due to high numbers of mount or relabel operations, or due to age of the media, in a table report. Uses data from the Report Times and Media Details data sources. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Remaining Lifetime - Configuration system templates Configuration reports display information on the configuration of the backup application. Array Fan-out Ratio Returns details on the array fan-out ratio in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config, iSCSI Configuration, and LUN Mapping data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Source - LUN that is mapped l Fan-out Ratio - l Port - Name of the Fibre Channel port l Controller - Number of the controller Unprotected Clients 135 Reports by System Template Avamar Retention Policy Configuration Returns information on the configuration of Avamar retention policies in a table report. Uses data from the Avamar Retention Policy Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the Avamar server l Sub Name - Not applicable to Avamar l Name - Name of the retention policy l Domain Name - Name of the Avamar domain associated with the retention policy l Enabled - Indicates if the policy is active l Read Only - Indicates if the policy is read only or writeable l Expiration Date - Date the policy expires l Duration - Duration that data should be backed up l Duration Type - Unit of duration. For example, days, weeks, or months l Override - Indicates if the policy overrides basic retention l Num Days Daily Kept - Number of days of daily backups to retain l Num Weeks Weekly Kept - Number of weeks of weekly backups to retain l Num Months Monthly Kept - Number of months of monthly backups to retain l Num Years Yearly Kept - Number of years of yearly backups to retain Backup Client Configuration Returns details on the configuration of all physical hosts configured on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config and Backup Server Mapping data sources. 136 l Server - Name of the backup server on which the client is configured l Client - Name of the client l Active - Indicates if the client is active l Software Version - Version of the backup software running on the client l Remote IP - Remote IP address of the client l OS Type - Type of client operating system l OS Version - Version of the client operating system l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the application domain l Browse Policy - Browse policy of the NetWorker client l Retention Policy - Retention policy of the NetWorker client l Directive - Directive files of the NetWorker server l Backup Command - Commands available on the NetWorker client l Executable Path - Path to the NSR executables on this client l Scheduled Backup - Indicates if the client is enabled for scheduled backup l Comment - User remarks for the client EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Save Operations - Save operation instructions in the form KEYWORD:TOKEN=STATE. Instructions are required if the Job attribute for this client contains non-ASCII names l File Inactivity Threshold - Number of days a file has not been accessed before it is counted as inactive. Zero indicates that no inactivity statistics were collected l File Inactivity Alert Threshold - Percentage of space that can be occupied by inactive files before a notification is generated. Zero indicates that no alert will be sent l Remote User - Username used for remote commands on the client or to access application-specific data l Application Information - Any application information for the client l NDMP - Indicates if the client is an NDMP client l NDMP Array Name - Logical name assigned to the array in NDMP NAS array configurations l Dedup Backup - Indicates if the client is a deduplication client l Dedup Node - Name of the deduplication object l SCSI - Indicates if the client is a SCSI backup client l VCB - Indicates if the client is a VCB backup client l Proxy Backup Host - Proxy client where the saves were run l Proxy Backup Type - Proxy method used for backups l Virtual Client - Indicates if the machine is a virtual client l Virtual Client Physical Hostname - Specifies the physical hostname, if this resource is for a virtual client. The hostname does not need to be fully qualified, and must be less than 64 bytes l Boost Enabled - Indicates if boost is enabled l Server Network Interface - Name of the network interface on the server to which the client is backed up l Priority - Priority of the client l Parallelism - Number of jobs that can run in parallel on this client l Contact - Text string of information identifying the client object’s administrator l Client Identifier - Unique identifier for the client instance l Archive Services - Indicates if archive services are available for the client l Remote Access - List of remote users permitted to recover files from the client l Index Path - Path to the client's index directory on the server. The path is either an absolute path or NULL. If NULL, the index resides in the index/clientname subdirectory of the EMC home directory l Owner Notification - Notification action used to send status message contents to the client owner l Hard Links - Indicates if hard link processing is enabled on the Windows client l Short Filenames - Indicates if short file name processing is enabled on the Windows client l BMR - Indicates if Bare Metal Recovery protection is enabled l BMR Options - List of Bare Metal Recovery options Backup Client Configuration 137 Reports by System Template 138 l Backup Type - Backup client type l CPUs - Number of processors in the client machine l Enabler In Use - Indicates if the client is using up a license count l Licensed Applications - List of licensed applications used by the client l Licensed PSPs - List of licensed EMC PowerSnap® platforms used by the client l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Registration Time - Time of registration l Last Access Time - Time last accessed l Password Set Time - Time that the password was set l Invalid Password Count - Number of invalid password entries l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Archive Delete - Indicates if archive deletion is permitted l Backup Delete - Indicates if backup deletion is permitted l Locked - Indicates if the client object is locked l Registration Administrator - Name of the administrator who registered the client l Option Set - Option set for the client specified on the TSM server l Aggregation - Indicates if client file aggregation is enabled when backing up l URL - URL for the web client l Node Type - Type of client object: Client, Server, NAS l Password Expiration Period - Number of days after which a password expires l Keep Mount Point - Indicates if the client can keep mount points during a session l Max Mount Points Allowed - Maximum number of mount points permitted for a client in a session l Auto Filespace Rename - Indicates if TSM prompts the client to rename file spaces when the client system upgrades to a client that supports Unicode l Validate Protocol - Indicates if the client has data validation enabled l GUID - Globally unique identifier of the client object l Transaction Group Max - Maximum number of files or directories that can be contained in a transaction group l Data Read Path - Transfer path when sending data: LAN path only, LAN-free path only, Any path l Data Write Path - Transfer path when receiving data: LAN path only, LAN-free path only, Any path l Session Initiation - Initiator of session: server or client, or server only l Client HLA - High-level address of the NAS file server (IP address or domain name) l Client LLA - Low-level address of the NAS file server (port number) l Collocation Group Name - Name of the collocation group, if collocation is enabled, for the client l Proxy Target - Specifies which objects are proxy objects (agents) for other objects EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Compression Location - Location of data compression l Proxy Node - Proxy object for deduplication if applicable l Deduplication Location - Location of data deduplication: ClientOrServer, ServerOnly l Client Direct - Client writes directly to the Data Domain/AFTD using DDBoost are enabled and no writes are made to the storage node l Block Based Backup - Indicates whether block-based backup is enabled l NAS File Access User - NAS file access user name l Storage Replication Policy - Storage replication policy name l NAS Management User - NAS management user name l NAS Device Manager - NAS device management user name l Hardware Type - The hardware type of the client Backup Client Count Returns the number of clients in the environment in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Clients data source. l Count - Number of backup clients Backup Client Count By OS Type Returns the number of clients by OS in the environment in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l OS Type - Type of client operating system l Count - Number of backup clients Backup Client Count By Server Returns the number of clients configured on each backup server in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client Count - Number of backup clients Backup Device Config Returns the configuration of the backup device in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Device Alias - Alias for the drive, if available l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Device Class - Class of device: Disk, Tape l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the device is located Backup Client Count 139 Reports by System Template l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No l Hardware Id - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Media Manager Path - Operating system path to the media manager l Firmware - Firmware version of the device l Make - Make of the array l Model - Model number of the array l Serial - Serial number of the device l Interface Type - Interface type of the tape drive, ISCSI or Fibre Channel l Interface Address - Address to the interface l Num Target Sessions - Number of target sessions l Max Sessions - Maximum number of client and server sessions l Send/Receive Timeout - Send and receive timeout l Num Retries - Number of retries l Network Retry Interval - Network failure retry interval (in seconds) l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l Max Errors - Maximum number of errors l Device Access - Device access information Backup Device Config in Jukebox Returns the configuration of the backup device in jukebox in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. 140 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Device Alias - Alias for the drive, if available l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Device Class - Class of device: Disk, Tape l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the device is located l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No l Hardware Id - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Media Manager Path - Operating system path to the media manager l Firmware - Firmware version of the device EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Make - Make of the array l Model - Model number of the array l Serial - Serial number of the device l Interface Type - Interface type of the tape drive, ISCSI or Fibre Channel l Interface Address - Address to the interface l Num Target Sessions - Number of target sessions l Max Sessions - Maximum number of client and server sessions l Send/Receive Timeout - Send and Receive timeout l Num Retries - Number of retries l Network Retry Interval - Network failure retry interval (in seconds) l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l Max Errors - Maximum number of errors l Device Access -Device access information Backup Device Count By Server Returns the backup device count by server in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client Count - Number of backup devices Backup Device Count By Type Returns the backup device count by type in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Count - Number of backup devices Backup Device Writable Count Returns the backup device writable count in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config data source. l Writable - Indicates if the device is writable l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No Backup Group Configuration Returns the backup group configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Domain Name - Identifier for Application domain l Policy ID - The name of the policy set that was last activated on the domain Backup Device Count By Server 141 Reports by System Template 142 l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Active - Indicates if the group is active l Effective Date - Date and time that the policy went active l Policy Type - Type of backup policy. For example, full or incremental l Policy Action - Policy action l Policy Description - Policy description l Preceding Action - Preceding action l Proxy List - VBA list l Offhost Backup Method - Method used for performing offhost backups l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Volume Pool - Volume pool the policy is configured to use l Limit Jobs Per Policy - Indicates if the policy is limited to run a number of Jobs l Max Jobs Per Policy - Maximum number of jobs that can be run on the policy, if Limit Jobs Per Policy is enabled l Job Priority - Priority that is assigned to Jobs in this policy l Frozen Image Clients - Indicates if Frozen Image backups are configured in this policy l Cross Mount Points - Indicates if the backups cross mount points l True Image Restore Information - Indicates if True Image Restore (TIR) information is gathered by this policy l True Image Move Detection - Indicates if True Image Restore information is gathered with move detection l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l File Restore Raw - Indicates if the File Restore Raw flag is set on a policy l Disaster Recovery Info - Indicates if Disaster Recovery Information is gathered l Block Level Incremental - Indicates if block level incremental backups are enabled l Multiple Data Streams - Indicates if the policy implements multiple data streams l Keyword Phrase - Keyword phrase associated with this policy l Checkpoint Restart - Indicates if checkpoints are configured on this policy l Checkpoint interval - Checkpoint interval that is used if checkpoint restarts are enabled l Remote Filesystems - Indicates if Remote File systems are backed up by this policy l Bare Metal Restore Info - Indicates if Bare Metal Restore Information is gathered l Snapshot Backup - Indicates if snapshot backups are enabled l Retain Snapshots - Indicates if snapshots will be retained l Snapshot Method - Method for performing snapshots l Offhost Backup - Indicates if offhost backup is enabled l Use Alternate Client - Indicates if an alternate client is used when performing offhost backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Alternate Client Name - Alternate client that is used for offhost backup if Use Alternate Client is set l Use Data Mover - Indicates if a data mover is used l Data Mover Type - Type of data mover to use if the Use Data Mover flag is set l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Auto Restart - Indicates if the group is configured for automatic restarts l Scheduled Start - Time of day that the group starts l Parallelism - Indicates if groups can be run simultaneously l Client Retries - Number of times a client attempts to retry l Level - Level of backup for the group l Schedule - Schedule used by the group l Num Days Inactive Backup Retained - Number of days to retain inactive backup data l Num Days Inactive Archive Retained - Number of days to retain inactive archive data l Interval - Group run interval l Restart Window - Group restart window l Forced Incremental - Indicates if forced incremental backup is enabled l Clones - Indicates if backup is cloned automatically l Clone Pool - Pool for backup clones l Success Threshold - Backup status considered as successful l Inactivity Threshold - File inactivity threshold l Inactivity Alert Threshold - File inactivity alert threshold l Snapshot Policy - Snapshot policy name l Snapshot Pool - Snapshot pool name l Specification Type - Type of backup specification l Management Class - The assigned default management class for the policy set l Registered Nodes - The number of client nodes registered to the policy domain l Description - Description of the policy domain l Last Update By - Administrator who made most recent changes l Last Updated - Date of last change l Managing Profile - Managing profile name l Changes Pending - Whether changes are being made but not activated l Data Pool List - The list of active-data pools in the domain l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow Backup Group Configuration 143 Reports by System Template Backup Group Count Returns a count of all backup servers across all backup groups in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Group Config data source. l Count - Total number of backup servers Backup Group Count By Server Returns a count of all backup servers across all backup servers in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Group Config data source. l Server - Hostname of backup server l Group Count - Number of backup groups Backup Job Configuration Returns a list of jobs that are configured on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the client is configured l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Job - Name of a backup Job l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Schedule - Name of the backup schedule l Resource ID - Identifier for NetWorker resource Backup Jukebox Config Returns information on the configuration of any tape libraries managed by the backup application in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Jukebox Config data source. 144 l Server - Hostname of the backup server that controls the jukebox l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox Host - Name of the host to which the jukebox is attached l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox l Num Devices - Number of devices in the jukebox l Num Slots - Number of slots in the tape library l Jukebox Number - Unique identifier for the jukebox l Jukebox Control Host - Host that controls the jukebox if the jukebox is in a shared environment l Type - Type of jukebox l Vendor - Name of the vendor l Model - Model of the device EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Serial - Serial number of the device l WWNN - World Wide Node Name Backup Jukebox Contents Returns details of the backup jukebox contents in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Flag that indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left (Symantec NetBackup only) Backup Pool Configuration Returns details about which jobs are backed up on each client within each group and with what schedule in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Configuration data source. This report returns data for NetWorker, NetBackup, and TSM l Server - Hostname of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Pool Type - Type of storage pool: Primary, Copy, Any, Backup, Archive l Description - Description of the backup pool l Device Class - Device class associated with the storage pool: Disk, Tape l Est. Capacity - Amount of estimated space of the backup pool (in MB) l Estimated Capacity - Amount of estimated space of the backup pool (in GB) l High Mig. Pct - Value at which the TSM server automatically starts migration for this storage pool. This value is determined when the number of volumes containing Backup Jukebox Contents 145 Reports by System Template data reaches this percentage of the total number of volumes in the storage pool. The total number of volumes includes the maximum number of scratch volumes 146 l Low Mig. Pct - Value at which the TSM server stops migration for this storage pool. This value is determined when the number of volumes containing data reaches this percentage of the total number of volumes in the storage pool l Next Storage Pool - Primary storage pool to which files are migrated l Reclaim Storage Pool - Primary storage pool as a target for reclaimed data from this storage pool l Max Size Threshold - Maximum size for a physical file that the server can store in the storage pool (in MB) l Overflow Location - Overflow location for the storage pool l Cache Migrated Files - Indicates that the migration process leaves a cached copy of a file in this storage pool after migrating the file to the next storage pool l Co-Locate - Indicates whether the server attempts to keep data belonging to a single client object, group of client objects, or client file space stored on as few volumes as possible l Reclamation Threshold - Value at which the TSM server reclaims a volume, based on the percentage of reclaimable space on a volume (as a percentage) l Offsite Reclamation Limit - Number of offsite volumes to have their space reclaimed during reclamation for this storage pool (in MB) l Max Scratch Volumes - Maximum number of scratch volumes that the server can request for this storage pool. Valid values are between 0 and 100000000 l Delay Period for Re-use - Number of days that must elapse after all files are deleted from a volume before the volume can be rewritten or returned to the scratch pool l Updated By - User ID of the user who updated the pool l Updated - Date and time change is made to the backup pool l Storage Pool Data Format - Data format to use to back up files to this storage pool and restore files from this storage pool l Copy Storage Pools - Names of copy storage pools where the server simultaneously writes data l CRC Data - Indicates whether a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) validates storage pool data when audit volume processing occurs on the server l Access - Specifies how client objects and server processes (such as migration and reclamation) can access files in the storage pool: n READWrite — Specifies that client objects and server processes can read and write to files stored on volumes in the storage pool n READOnly — Specifies that client objects can only read files from the volumes in the storage pool n UNAVailable — Specifies that client objects cannot access files stored on volumes in the storage pool l Enabled - If selected, indicates whether the pool is enabled and considered for selection l Archive - If selected, indicates that if the pool is set for archiving l Label Template - Template that is to be used when labeling volumes in this pool EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Retention Policy - Retention policy associated with the backup pool. Retention policies determine how long a volume is protected from being overwritten l Groups - Groups that are required to enter into the backup pool l Clients - Clients that are required to enter into the backup pool l Levels - Levels that are required to enter into the backup pool l Devices - Devices on which volumes are allowed to be mounted l Store Index Entries - Indicates if file index entries are generated for the backup pool l Auto Media Verify - Indicates if automated verification is performed while data is being written to a volume from the backup pool l Recycle To Pools - Indicates if recyclable volumes can be used by other pools l Recycle From Pools - Indicates if backup pool can recycle volumes from other pools l Vol Type Pref - Selection factor when a request is made for a write-able volume. Preferred type is considered first within a priority level l Max Parallelism - Number of parallel sessions per device allowed when saving to this backup pool l Mount Class - Class of mount requests for media belonging to the pool or for media being added to this pool l Worm Pool - Indicates if this pool uses WORM tapes and only WORM tapes l Create DLT Worm - Indicates whether any tapes labelled in this WORM pool are initialized as DLTWORM tapes, assuming that they are in DLTWORM capable drives l Barcode Prefix - Barcodes with this prefix value are selected for the pool l Pool Host - Host on which the backup pool resides l Pool User - Users allowed to access the backup pool l Pool Group - Group to which the backup pool belongs l Physical Volume Group 1 - Name of the first assigned physical volume group l Physical Volume Group 2 - Name of the second assigned physical volume group l Physical Volume Group 3 - Name of the third assigned physical volume group l Number Volumes - Total number of logical volumes in the volume group l Number Pending - Number of unfinished jobs in volume group l Number Recover - Number of jobs for transfer-out (if in group TR-LVG) or, at startup, the number of single-saved logical volumes in a dual-save group l Minimum Save - Minimum number of requested saves to retain when memory falls below the defined threshold l Deduplicated Data - Indicates backup data was deduplicated. Size of deduplicated data (in MB) l Num Duplicate Identification Processes - Number of duplicate identification processes that are specified as the default for the storage pool l Data Deduplicated By Client - Indicates data was deduplicated by backup client Backup Pool Configuration 147 Reports by System Template Backup Schedule Configuration Returns details on the schedules on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Schedule Config data source. 148 l Server - Hostname of backup server l SubName - Name of TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Schedule - Name of the schedule on the backup server l Group - Name of the group associated with the schedule l Calendar Backup - Indicates if this schedule is a calendar type backup l Calendar Retries Allowed - Indicates if retries are allowed after a run day l Frequency - Frequency of the schedule l Storage Unit Override - Storage unit that should be used by Jobs using this schedule l Volume Pool Override - Volume Pool that should be used by Jobs using this schedule l Retention - Retention used by Jobs using this schedule (in seconds) l Multiplexing - Value of the media multiplexing field l Sunday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Sunday l Sunday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Sunday l Monday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Monday l Monday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Monday l Tuesday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Tuesday l Tuesday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Tuesday l Wednesday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Wednesday l Wednesday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Wednesday l Thursday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Thursday l Thursday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Thursday l Friday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Friday l Friday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Friday l Saturday Window Start - Time of day that the window starts on a Saturday l Saturday Window Duration - Duration of the window on Saturday l Num Copies - Number of copies of data that should be made l Copy 1 Storage Unit - Storage unit that should be used by the first copy of data l Copy 1 Pool - Volume pool that should be used by the first copy of the data l Copy 1 Retention Level - Retention level to be associated with the first copy of the data l Copy 1 Failure Action - Failure action to take for the first copy of the data l Copy 2 Storage Unit - Storage unit that should be used by the second copy of data EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Copy 2 Pool - Volume pool that should be used by the second copy of the data l Copy 2 Retention Level - Retention level to be associated with the second copy of the data l Copy 2 Failure Action - Failure action to take for the second copy of the data l Copy 3 Storage Unit - Storage unit that should be used by the third copy of data l Copy 3 Pool - Volume pool that should be used by the third copy of the data l Copy 3 Retention Level - Retention level to be associated with the third copy of the data l Copy3 Failure Action - Failure action to take for the third copy of the data l Copy 4 Storage Unit - Storage unit that should be used by the fourth copy of data l Copy 4 Pool - Volume pool that should be used by the fourth copy of the data l Copy 4 Retention Level - Retention level to be associated with the fourth copy of the data l Copy 4 Failure Action - Failure action to take for the fourth copy of the data l Calendar Week Days - Week days selected if using a calendar schedule l Calendar Month Days - Month days selected if using a calendar schedule l Calendar Hours - Hours selected if using a calendar schedule l Window Start - Start time of backup window l Window Duration - Duration of the backup window l Enabled - Indicates if scheduling is enabled l Schedule Start Time - Start time of schedule l Schedule End Time - End time of schedule l Backup Type - Backup client type l Time Zone - Time zone used for schedule l Comment - User comment l Period - Indicates a weekly or monthly schedule l Action - Daily backup level for the schedule l Override - Override action for the schedule l Backup Application - Name of the backup application Backup Server Client Group Mapping Returns a list of clients that are included in a group in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Server - Hostname of backup server l Client - l Group - Group that is required to enter into the backup pool Backup Server Configuration This report shows configuration details of an individual backup server or group of backup servers. l Server - Hostname of backup server Backup Server Client Group Mapping 149 Reports by System Template 150 l Sub Name - l Application - Application name l Version - Application version l OS Type - Operating system on which the application is running l Hostname - Server TCP/IP address l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Port - Server port address l Password Set - Indicates if the server password is set l Install Date - Installation date of the server software l Restart Date - Last date and time when the server was started l Authentication On - Indicates if password authentication is set on or off l Password Expiration Period - Period after which the administrator or client object password expires (in days) l Invalid Sign-On Attempt Limit - Number of invalid sign-on attempts before a object is locked l Min Password Length - Minimum number of characters for the password l Registration - Indicates if the client object registration is open or closed l Availability - Indicates if the server is enabled or disabled l Accounting - Indicates if an accounting record is generated at the end of each client object session l Activity Log Retention - Number of days information is retained in the activity log, or the size of the log (in days) l Activity Summary Retention Period - Number of days information is retained in the SQL activity summary table (in days) l License Audit Period - Period after which the license manager automatically audits the backup server license (in days) l Last License Audit - Date and time when the last license audit occurred l License Compliance - Indicates if the server is in compliance (Valid) or out of compliance (Failed) with the license terms l Scheduler - Indicates if central scheduling is running (active or inactive) l Max Sessions - Maximum number of client/server sessions l Max Scheduled Sessions - Maximum number of client/server sessions available for processing scheduled work l Event Record Retention - Number of days central scheduler event records are retained (in days) l Client Action Duration - Duration of the period during which the client processes the schedule defined (in days) l Schedule Randomization Percentage - Randomization percentage. Indicates how much of the startup window is used for executing scheduled events in clientpolling mode l Query Schedule Period - Frequency with which clients poll the server to obtain scheduled work, in client-polling mode (in hours). If the value in this field is Client, the polling frequency is determined by the client object EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Max Command Retries - Maximum number of times that a client scheduler retries after a failed attempt to execute a scheduled command. If the value in this field is Client, the client object determines the maximum number of retries l Retry Period - Number of minutes between attempts by the client scheduler to retry after a failed attempt to contact the server or to execute a scheduled command (in minutes). If the value in this field is Client, the client object determines the number of minutes between retries l Scheduling Mode - Central scheduling modes supported by the server l Log Mode - Mode for saving recovery log records: roll-forward, normal l Database Backup Trigger - Backup manager automatically runs a backup of the database if the database backup trigger is enabled l Active Receivers - Active receivers for which event logging has begun l Configuration Manager -Indicates if the server is a configuration manager l Refresh Interval - Refresh interval. Interval that elapses before the managed server requests a refresh of any changes from a configuration manager l Cross Define - Indicates if cross definition of servers is allowed l Subfile Client - l Context Messaging - Indicates if context messaging is enabled or disabled l Server Free Status - Indicates if server-free data movement is on, off, or not supported l Server Free Batch Size - Amount of data that is copied in a single instance of server-free data movement (in MB) l TOC Load Retention - Approximate number of minutes that unreferenced Table of Contents data will be retained in the database (in minutes) l Machine GUID - Machine globally unique identifier (GUID) as of the last time that the server was started. This GUID identifies the host machine on which the current server resides l Archive Retention Protection - Indicates if archive data retention protection is activated or deactivated l Last Refresh - If the server is a managed server, specifies the date and time of the last successful refresh of configuration information from the configuration manager l Num Activity Log Records - Number of records in the activity log l Activity Log Size - Size of the activity log (in MB) l Deduplication Verification Level - Client-side deduplication verification level l Database Report Mode - Database reporting mode l Database Directories - Database data directories l Encryption Strength - l Capacity - Total capacity of the storage pool (in MB) l Usable Capacity - Amount of the pool that is available for storage (in MB) l IP Address - IP address of the backup server l Hardware ID - Hardware identifier of the backup server Backup Server Configuration 151 Reports by System Template Backup Server Group Job Mapping Returns a list of jobs that are included in a group in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the client is configured l Client - Name of the client l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Job - Name of a backup Job Backup Server Server Count Returns the number of clients in the environment in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Config data source. l Server Count - Number of clients in the environment Backup Server Server Count By Application Returns the number of backup servers of each application exist in the environment in a pie chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Config data source. l Application - Type of software. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Number of different values - Backup Server Server Count By Version Returns the number of backup servers of each version existing in the environment in a pie chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Config data source. l Version - Type of software. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Number of different values - Celerra Filesystem to LUN Mapping Returns the mapping between file systems and back-end storage on the storage, allowing you to identify where disks are shared across file systems, in a topology report. Uses data from the Filesystem to LUN Visualization data source. l Name - Name of disk volume presented to EMC Celerra l Type - Type of LUN l Group - Name of the group l ToolTip - l Source - LUN that is mapped l Target - Entity to which the LUN is mapped. This value can have multiple entries Celerra Replication Visualization Returns the configuration information for replication sources and targets in a topology report. Uses data from the Replication Visualization data source. l 152 Name - Name of the disk volume presented to EMC Celerra EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Type - Type of array l Label - Name of the field returned l Group - Name of the group l ToolTip - l Source - Name of the source l Target - Name of the target l Node - Node name l Network Status - Status of the network link being used by the replication set l Source Status - Status of the source of the replication set l Destination Status - Status of the target of the replication set Celerra Storage Pool Configuration Returns the configuration and options set for storage pools configured on EMC Celerra Storage in a table report. Uses data from the Storage Pool Configuration data source. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the EMC Celerra being monitored l Storage Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Pool ID - Unique identifier for the pool l Description - Description of the pool l Disk Type - If a disk volume, the type of disk volume. If a volume type other than disk, the type of the underlying disk volumes l Capacity - Total capacity of the storage pool (in MB) l Used Size - Amount of storage used by the pool (in MB) l Auto Size - Indicates if the storage pool is set to extend automatically. If enabled, the pool automatically extends with the unused disk volumes of the same profile, if available, whenever needed (in MB) l Dynamic - Indicates whether a storage pool automatically attempts to grow or shrink member volumes l Greedy - Indicates whether a storage pool attempts to create new member volumes before using existing space from current member volumes Celerra Volume Configuration Returns details on the volumes configured on EMC Celerra in a table report. Uses data from the Volume Configuration data source. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the EMC Celerra being monitored l Volume Name - Name of the EMC Celerra volume as displayed in the Celerra Manager l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume l Volume Type - Type of volume: disk, slice, stripe, meta, pool l Volume Size - Size of the volume (in MB) l Storage Pool - Storage pool associated with the volume l Storage System - Storage system on which the volume is located Celerra Storage Pool Configuration 153 Reports by System Template l LUN - Name of the LUN on the storage system that the disk based volume is mapped to (disk-based volumes only l Disk Type - If a disk volume, the type of disk volume. If a volume type other than disk, the type of the underlying disk volumes l Stripe Size - Size of the stripe (stripe volumes only) (in MB) Cluster Application Configuration for Application Returns details on the cluster application configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the disk array l Name - Logical name of the cluster Cluster Configuration Returns details on the cluster configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the disk array l Name - Logical name of the cluster l Description - Description of the cluster configuration l Type - Type of cluster: VCS, MSCS Data Domain Boost Details Returns the Data Domain Boost details in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Boost Files for Devices data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain l File Name - Name of the file that could not be backed up l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use Data Domain Boost Files Returns information on the Data Domain Boost files in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Boost Files data source. 154 l Host Name- Name or IP address of Data Domain l File Name - Name of the file that could not be backed up l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Data Domain Mtree To Tenant Unit Mapping Returns information on the Data Domain Mtree to tenant unit mapping in a table report. Uses data from the Mtree To Tenant Unit Mapping data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Name - Data Domain tenant name l Mtree - Mtree name Data Domain Network DNS Returns information on the Data Domain network DNS in a table report. Uses data from the Network DNS data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Domain Name Server - Domain Name Server name Data Domain NTP Configuration Returns information on the Data Domain NTP (Network Time Protocol) configuration. NTP servers allow hosts to have their system time synchronised. Uses data from the NTP Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Server - NTP Server name Data Domain Replication Configuration Returns information regarding Data Domain replication configuration in a report. Uses data from the Replication Config data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Source - The Data Domain system that receives data from backup applications l Destination - The Data Domain that receives data from the replication source Data Domain l Context Number - The context number for directory replication or a zero (0) for collection replication l Connection Host and Port - The destination system and port to connect to l Low Bandwidth Optimization - Flag indicating the status of low-bw-optim: enabled or disabled l Encryption Enabled - Flag indicating the state of encryption l Replication Enabled - Flag indicating if the replication process is enabled or disabled Data Domain Tenant Unit Configuration Returns information on the Data Domain tenant unit configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Tenant Unit Configuration data source. l Hostname -Name or IP address of the Data Domain l Name- Data Domain tenant name Data Domain Mtree To Tenant Unit Mapping 155 Reports by System Template l Number of Storage Units - Number of Data Domain storage units l Number of Mtrees - Number of Data Domain Mtrees l Number of Management Users - Number of management users Data Domain VTL Access Group Configuration Returns information about the configuration of VTL access groups in a table report. Uses data from the Access Group Configuration data source. A VTL access group is a collection of initiators (WWPNs or aliases) and the drives and changers they are allowed to access. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Group - Group Name l Initiator - Client Initiator l VTL - Target VTL l Drive - Target drive l Changer - VTL Changer l LUN ID - Target device's LUN number l Primary Port - Primary port configured l Port In Use - Port currently in use Data Mover Configuration Returns the Data Mover configuration details in a table report. Uses Data from the Data Mover Configuration data source. l Server - Name or IP Address of the EMC File Storage (EMC Celerra) l Data Mover Name - logical name of Data Mover l Slot - Slot on EMC Celerra unit l Role - Data Mover role l Unicode - Internationalization mode of the server if Unicode (or otherwise ASCII) l NTP Servers - IP addresses of NTP server hosts that mover uses to synchronize with l Failover Policy - Failover policy: none, manual, auto, retry l StandBy For - List of movers for which this mover is a standby l StandBys - List of standbys for this mover EDL Configuration Options Returns information on the configuration options on a VTL Unit in a table report. Uses data from the VTL Configuration Options data source. 156 l Node - Name of the EMC Disk Library l Option - Name of the configuration option l Value - Value of the configuration option EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Enclosure Configuration Returns the enclosure configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Enclosure Config data source. l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the array l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Enclosure Name - Name of the enclosure that the disk is in l Manufacturer - Manufacturer of enclosure l Model - Model of enclosure l Serial - Serial number of enclosure l Type - Type of enclosure l Rack Name - Identifier for disk rack l Slots - Enclosure slot capacity Exported LUNs Returns information on any LUNs that are exported from the selected objects as disks in a table report. Uses data from the Exported LUNs data source. l LUN Node - Name of the host from which the LUN is being exported l LUN - Name of the LUN before export l Disk Node - Name of the host to which the LUN is being exported l Disk - Name of the LUN as known by the host that imports the LUN l Manufacturer - Name of the disk manufacturer l Model - Model of the disk l Serial Number - Serial number of the disk l Firmware Revision - Firmware version of the disk l Size - Size of the exported LUN (in GB) Fibre Channel Device Configuration Returns the Fibre Channel device configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Devices data source. l Hostname - Name of the host in which the HBAs are installed l Device - Name of the device on the host where the HBAs are installed. For example, /dev/rmt/1n l WWPN - Fibre Channel World Wide Port Number of the target device Fibre Channel Device Mapping Returns the Fibre Channel device mapping details in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Device to Tape Drive Mapping data source. l Hostname - Name of the host in which the HBAs are installed l Device - Name of the device on the host where the HBAs are installed. For example, /dev/rmt/1n Enclosure Configuration 157 Reports by System Template l Tape Library - Name of the tape library in which the device is physically present l Tape Drive - Name of the tape drive within the library l Make - Make of the tape drive l Model - Model of the tape drive l Firmware - Firmware version of the tape drive l Serial - Serial number of the tape drive Fileserver Exports Returns details of file systems that are exported from a fileserver in a table report. Uses data from the File server exports data souce. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Name - Name of the file system being exported l Export - Name which the file system is being exported as l Type - Type of export: CIFS, NFS l SetUID - Indicates if the SetUID flag is supported on this export (where the caller may run a program with the privileges of the file owner) (NFS only) l Permission - Permissions on the export. For example, read only (NFS only) l Dedup Enabled - Indicates if deduplication was enabled on the export l Replication Enabled - Indicates if replication was enabled on the export l Backup Window - Identifier for backup window in which export took place l Backup Window Start Time - Start time for backup window (in seconds) l Backup Window End Time - End time for backup window (in seconds) Filesystem Mount Configuration Returns the configuration options for file systems mounted on EMC File Storage. Uses data from the Filesystem Mount Configuration data source. 158 l Hostname - Name or IP address of the EMC File Storage l Data Mover - Name of the Data Mover hosting the file system l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Mount Point - Pathname of the new mount l Disabled - Indicates if the file system mount is disabled l NT Credential - Indicates if the Celerra Network Server takes account of a user's Windows group memberships when checking an ACL for access through NFS l Prefetch - Indicates if prefetch processing is enabled l Read Only - Indicates that the mount is read-only on the Data Mover l Uncached - Indicates if well-formed writes (that is, multiples of a disk block and disk block aligned) are sent directly to the disk without being cached on the server. Enabling this option improves performance for applications such as databases that have many connections to a large file to the disk without being cached on the server. l Virus Scan - Indicates if the virus checker protocol is enabled EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Access Policy - Access-checking policy for the file system. The default policy is NATIVE. Access-checking policies apply only when the Data Mover's user authentication is set to the recommended default, ’NT’. An access-checking policy defines the file and directory permissions that are applied (UNIX mode bits, Windows ACLS, or both) when a user attempts to access a filesystem in a mixed NFS and CIFS environment. The policies are: NT, UNIX, NATIVE, SECURE, MIXED, MIXED_COMPAT l Lock Policy - Policy for the locking behavior of NFSv2 and NFSv3 clients when accessing files locked by NFSv4 or CIFS clients: nolock, writelock, or rwlock. The default is nolock l CIFS Sync Write - Indicates if the Celerra Network Server performs immediate, synchronous writes to the disk, independent of the CIFS write protocol option l CIFS Notify - Indicates if CIFS client notification is enabled for changes made to the directory file structure in the file system l CIFS Notify On Access - Indicates if CIFS client notification is enabled whenever a user accesses the file system l CIFS Notify On Write - Indicates if CIFS client notification is enabled whenever a user writes to the file system l CIFS Trigger Level - Specifies the deepest directory level to which the notification settings apply to the file system. The default setting is 512 l CIFS Op Locks - Indicates if opportunistic lock granting for CIFS client access is enabled on the file system Imported LUNs Returns information on imported LUNs in a table report. Uses data from the Imported LUNs data source. l Disk Node - Name of the host to which the LUN is being imported l Disk - Name of the disk that is the imported LUN l LUN Node - Name of the host from which the LUN is being imported l LUN - Name of the LUN before import l Serial - Serial number of the LUN l Volume - Volume on which the LUN resides, if applicable l Size - Size of the imported LUN (in GB) l Type - Type of LUN: iSCSI, Fibre Channel iSCSI iSNS Configuration Returns information on the names of the iSNS server configured on a object in a table report. Uses data from the iSCSI iSNS Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l iSNS Server - Name of the iSNS server for the object Imported LUNs 159 Reports by System Template iSCSI Portal Configuration Returns information about the addresses of iSCSI portals on a object in a table report. Uses data from the iSCSI Portal Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object on which the iSCSI portal exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Adapter ID - Identifier for the adapter l IP Address - IP Address of the iSCSI portal l Port - Port number of the iSCSI portal Least LUNs Per Port Returns the least LUNs per port in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config and LUN Mapping data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Port - Name of the server port l LUNs - Address of the LUN on the mapped endpoint LUN Capacity Per Node Returns the LUN capacity per object in a column chart. Uses data from the LUN Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Size - Size of the LUN (in GB) LUN Capacity Per Port Returns the LUN capacity per port in a column chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config, LUN Configuration, and LUN Mapping data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Port - Name of the server port LUN Mapping Returns the mapping between LUNs and Fibre Channel WWNs or iSCSI IQNs, depending on the protocol used to access the LUN, in a table report. Uses data from the LUN Mapping data source. 160 l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - l Name - Name of the LUN. /vol/ is stripped from the value before it is returned l Source - LUN that is mapped l Target - Entity to which the LUN is mapped. This value can have multiple entries l LUN - Address of the LUN on the mapped endpoint l Type - Type of LUN: iSCSI, Fibre Channel EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l OS Type - Operating system type of the mapped LUN LUN Source Ports Returns the LUN source port details in a table report. Uses data from the LUN Mapping data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - l Name - Name of the LUN l Source - LUN that is mapped l Target - Entity to which the LUN is mapped. This value can have multiple entries LUN Source Ports for ruleset Returns LUN source port details in a table report. Report for Too few source ports for LUN rule. Uses data from the LUN Mapping and User Input data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Name - Name of the LUN l Alert - Identifier of the alert LUNs Per Node Returns the LUNs per object details in a column chart. Uses data from the LUN Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l LUNs - Name of the LUNs on the storage system to which the disk-based volume is mapped LUNs Per Port Returns the LUNs per port details in a column chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config and LUN Mapping data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Name - Name of the LUN l Source - LUN that is mapped l Target - Entity to which the LUN is mapped. This value can have multiple entries Mirror Configuration Returns the mirror configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Mirror Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object on which the mirror resides l Path - Path to the mirror LUN Source Ports 161 Reports by System Template MTree Details Returns the MTree details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Access Filesystem Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Device Access - Device access information l MTree Name - MTree name MTree Quota Configuration Returns the MTree quota configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the MTree Quota Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Name - MTree name l Pre Compression Size - Pre-compression size (in MB) l Soft Limit - Soft limit value (in MB) l Hard Limit - Hard limit value (in MB) l Pre Compression Soft Limit Utilization - The Pre Compression Size divided by the Soft Limit value, then this value is multiplied by 100, displayed as a percentage (%) l Pre Compression Hard Limit Utilization - The Pre Compression Size divided by the Hard Limit value, then this value is multiplied by 100, displayed as a percentage (%) NetBackup Catalog File Backup Configuration Returns information on the files that are scheduled for backup as part of the NetBackup Catalog backup process in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Catalog Backup File Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup server l Pathname - Path to the catalog file that is backed up NetBackup Catalog Backup Configuration Returns information on the configuration of NetBackup Catalog backups in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Catalog Backup Config data source. 162 l Server - Name of the NetBackup Master Server l Schedule Type - Type of schedule that the catalog backup is following l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server to which the catalog is backed up l Media 1 Type - Type of media to which the catalog is backed up. For example, Disk, Removable Media for the first backup l Media 1 Target - Either the Media ID that the backup will occur to or the pathname for a disk based backup for the first backup l Media 1 Density - Density of the media that the backup is going to for the first backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Media 2 Type - Type of media to which the catalog will be backed up. For example, Disk, Removable Media for the second backup l Media 2 Target - Either the Media ID to which the backup occurs or the pathname for a disk based backup for the second backup l Media 2 Density - Density of the media that the backup is going to for the second backup NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration Returns NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration details in a table. Uses data from the NetBackup Disaster Recovery Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Group- Name of the catalogue Policy l Email - Email address to send disaster recovery details to l Disk Path - Disk path where the disaster recovery details are stored l Media ID - Disaster Recovery media ID l User - Name of the user who has access to the disaster media disk path l Password Enabled - Whether password is defined for the user or not l Critical Policy List - List of Critical Policies l Density - Disaster Recovery media density NetBackup Disk Pool Configuration Returns the NetBackup disk pool configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Disk Pool Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Pool - Name of the pool l Pool ID - Identifier for the disk pool l Storage Servers - Storage servers in the disk pool l Server Type - Type of NetBackup server: master, client l Disk Storage Type - Type of disk storage unit l Raw Size - Raw size of the disk pool (in GB) l Capacity - Effective capacity of the disk pool (in GB) l Volume Count - Number of volumes in the pool l System Tag - NetBackup-specified identifier for the Disk Volume l Low Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to trigger a cache flush l High Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to stop a cache flush l Max I/O Streams - Maximum permitted number of I/O streams l Comment - User-defined identifier or comment for the disk volume l Patchwork - Indicates the pool is associated with an enclosure l Visible - Indicates pool is visible and managed through the user interface l Single Storage Server - Pool is limited to a single storage server NetBackup Disaster Recovery Configuration 163 Reports by System Template l Open Storage - Managed as an Open Storage disk pool l Allow Roving Volumes - Allow active mounts and unmounts of disk volumes l Allow Optimized Duplication - Allow optimized duplication l Allow Span Images - Allow images to span volumes l Allow Basic Staging - Allow basic image staging l Allow Lifecycle Management - Allow image lifecycle management l Allow Capacity Management - Allow capacity management l Allow Image Fragmentation - Allow images to be fragmented l Allow Catalog Backup - Allow catalog backups l Allow Checkpoint/Restart - Allow checkpoint restarts l Allow Random Write Access - Allow random write access l Allow FT Channel Transfer - Allow transfer through FT channel l Allow Capacity Managed Retention - Allow capacity managed retention l Allow Capacity Managed Queuing - Allow capacity managed job queuing l Allow Virtual Image Construction - Allow virtual image construction l Meta Data - Describe client data during backup NetBackup Disk Volume Configuration Returns information of the disk volumes on a NetBackup Server in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Disk Volume Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume l Path - Path to the volume l Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Disk Type - If a disk volume, the type of disk volume. If a volume type other than disk, the type of the underlying disk volume l Capacity - Capacity of disk (in GB) l System Tag - NetBackup-specified identifier for the Disk Volume l Ok On Root - Indicates if the volume can be mounted on root file system l Read On Write - Indicates if reads are allowed on write-mounted volumes NetBackup Global Configuration Returns NetBackup Global Configuration details in a table. Uses data from the NetBackup Global Config data source. 164 l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Mail Admin - The email address of the administrator l Job Retry Delay (Minutes) - Job retry delay (in minutes) l Max. Jobs per Client - Maximum jobs per client l Backup Tries Period (Hours) - Backup tries in period (in hours) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Backup Tries per Period - Number of backup tries per period l Num. Days Logs Kept - Number of days log kept l Max. Drives per Master - Maximum drives per master server l Compress DB Files Interval - Compress DB files interval (in seconds). Returns 0 for no compression l Media Mount Timeout - Media mount timeout (in minutes). Returns 0 if unlimited l Shared Timeout - Multihosted media mount timeout (in seconds). Returns 0 if unlimited l Display Reports (Hours) - The number of hours ago that the start time for reports is. For example, if you set this to 24 hours, then the reports process data from 24 hours ago. The default is 24 hours. l Num. Days TIR Info Kept - Number of days TIR ( True-image-recovery) info is kept l Prep Interval (Hours) - Specifies the preprocessing interval. This interval is the minimum time in hours between client queries to discover new paths when NetBackup uses auto-discover-streaming mode. l Max. Backup Copies - Maximum number of backup copies l DB Clean Interval (Hours) - DB Clean Interval (in hours) l DB Clean Wait Time (Minutes) - DB Clean Wait Time (in minutes) l Policy Update Interval (Minutes) -Policy Update Interval (in minutes) NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Configuration Returns the NetBackup lifecycle policy configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Master Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Policy - Name of the Lifecycle policy l Data Classification - NetBackup Data Classification, if specified. For example, Gold or Bronze l Duplication Priority - Number representing NetBackup duplication priority. The higher the number, the greater the priority l State - Indicates whether policy is active or inactive NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Destination Returns the NetBackup lifecycle policy destination information in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Destination data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Master Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Policy - Name of the lifecycle policy to which the destination belongs l Destination Type - Type of storage destination l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Volume Pool - Name of destination volume pool l Server Group - Name of destination server group NetBackup Lifecycle Policy Configuration 165 Reports by System Template l Source - Indicates the source type. For example, the original client, or an image l Retention Type - Storage retention type: Fixed, Staged Capacity Managed, Expire After Duplication l Retention Level - Retention period l Preserve Multiplexing - Preserve multiplexing l Alternate Read Server - An alternate server that can read an image created by a different media server l State - Indicates whether the destination is active or inactive NetBackup Media Server Configuration Details Returns the NetBackup media server configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Media Server Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Master Server l Num Data Buffers - Number of data buffers used when writing backups to tape l Number Data Buffers for Disk - Number of data buffers used when writing backups to disk l Num Data Buffers for Restores - Number of data buffers used when restoring backups to disk l Size Data Buffers - Size of the data buffers used when writing to tape l Size Data Buffers for Disk - Size of each data buffer used when writing to disk l Network Buffer Size - Size of the buffer used when reading backup data from the network l Network Buffer Size for Restores - Size of the buffer used when sending restore data to the network NetBackup Server Configuration Details Returns NetBackup server configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Server Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Master Server l Parameter - Name of the configuration parameter l Value - Value of the parameter NetBackup Storage Server Configuration Returns the NetBackup storage server configuration in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Storage Server Config data source. 166 l Server - Name of the NetBackup Storage Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Name - Name of the storage unit l Type - Type of storage server: master, client l Storage Type - Type of storage unit l Open Storage - Indicates server is managed as an Open Storage server l Allow Roving Volumes - Allow active mounts and unmounts of disk volumes EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Allow Optimized Duplication - Enable optimized duplication l Allow Span Images - Allow images to span volumes l Allow Basic Staging - Allow basic image staging l Allow Lifecycle Management - Allow image lifecycle management l Allow Capacity Management - Allow capacity management l Allow Image Fragmentation - Allow images to be fragmented l Allow Catalog Backup - Allow catalog backups l Allow Checkpoint/Restart - Allow checkpoint restarts l Allow Random Write Access - Allow random write access l Allow FT Channel Transfer - Allow transfer through FT channel l Allow Capacity Managed Retention - Allow capacity managed retention l Allow Capacity Managed Queuing - Allow capacity managed job queuing l Allow Virtual Image Construction - Allow virtual image construction l Meta Data - Describe client data during backup l Disk Groups - Indicates if backup is aware of disk pools and enclosures l Allow Active Disk Group Management - Allow active management of disk groups l Allow Active Storage Server Management - Allow active management of storage servers l Preferred For Restore - Preferred storage server for restores l Required For Restore - Required storage server for restores l Required For Duplication - Required storage server for duplicates l Queue If Down - Queue jobs if storage server is down NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration Returns the configuration of NetBackup storage units in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Storage Unit Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Storage Server l Name - Name of the storage unit l Media Server - Media Server with which the storage unit is associated l Storage Unit Type - Storage unit type. For example, Media Manager, Disk, NDMP, Fastrax l Media Sub Type - l On Demand Only - Indicates if the storage unit can be used for On Demand backups only (that is, only when a policy of schedule is explicitly configured to use this storage unit) l Path - Absolute path name to the directory used by Disk based storage unit l Robot Type - Type of robot on which the storage unit is located l Density - Cartridge density used by Media Manager storage units l Robot Number - Number of the robot associated with the storage unit l Max Concurrent Drives - Maximum number of drives used by a Media Manager storage unit NetBackup Storage Unit Configuration 167 Reports by System Template l Max Concurrent Jobs - Maximum number of Jobs that can be multiplexed to a disk storage unit l Max Multiplexing - Maximum number of jobs multiplexed per drive. Multiplexing sends concurrent, multiple backups from one or several clients to a single drive l Max Fragment Size - Maximum fragment size used by the storage unit l NDMP Host - NDMP Host used by NDMP storage units l Disk Pool - Pool to which the storage unit belongs l High Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to trigger a cache flush l Low Water Mark - Percentage of dirty pages to stop a cache flush l Ok On Root - Indicates if the volume can be mounted on root file system NetBackup Storage Unit Group Configuration Returns the configuration of NetBackup storage unit groups in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Storage Unit Group Config data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Storage Server l Group - Name of the Storage Unit group l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Selection Strategy - Indicates if the storage unit is On-Demand-Only or not NetBackup VM Rule Configuration Returns details on current NetBackup VM Rule configuration in a table. Uses data from the NetBackup VM Rule Config data source. l Server - The name of the NetBackup Server l Bar Code Tag - Volume bar code prefix l Media Type - Volume media type code l Pool Name - Name of pool where the volume will be added l Max. Mounts/Cleanings - Maximum number of volume mounts or maximum cleanings available if this is a cleaning tape l Description - Barcode rule description NetWorker Action Configuration Returns Networker action configuration in a table report. Uses data from Action Configuration data source. 168 l Server - Name of the backup server l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Preceding Actions - List of actions preceding this action l Concurrent - Run this action at the same time as the preceding action l Comment -Action comment l Enabled - Field indicating if workflow is enabled or not EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Type - Action type option l Sub Type - Backup Subtype option l Schedule Period - Frequency to perform the action For example: weekly, monthly l Schedule Activity - Actions scheduled for the period For example: full, incremental l Num. Retries - Number of times to retry l Retry Delay - Delay in seconds to wait before retrying l Inactivity Timeout (Minutes) - Maximum number of minutes inactive l Parallelism - Maximum number of concurrent operations l Failure Impact - What to do when an operation fails l Soft Limit - Time limit after action starts to stop initiation l Hard Limit - Time limit after action starts to begin initiation l Notification- Notification mode when action is complete l Succeed After All Clients Succeed - Success only after all clients succeeded l Discover Type - Type of discovery For example: NAS Snapshot l Start Backup Only After All Probes Succeed - Start backup action only after all probes are fine l Destination Storage Node - Storage node for the cloned savesets l Source Storage Node - Storage node for the source savesets l Destination Pool - Target media pool for the cloned savesets l Retention - Amount of time to retain the cloned savesets l Success Threshold - Backup status considered as successful l Client Override - Can client override l Delete Source Savesets After Clone Completes - Delete the source savesets after the clone completes l Perform CFI - Perform CFI l Perform Bootstrap - Perform bootstrap l Saveset Type - Saveset Type for which to generate an index l Filter Time Enabled - Filter On Time Range l Filter Starttime - Time to start filter l Filter Endtime - Time to stop filter l Filter Clients Enabled - Filter Clients l Filter Clients - Filter Clients type l Filter Levels Enabled - Filter On levels l Filter Levels - Filter Levels type l Filter Savesets Enabled - Filter On Saveset type l Filter Savesets - Filter saveset type NetWorker Action Configuration 169 Reports by System Template Networker Client Storage Nodes Configuration Returns the NetWorker client storage object configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Networker Client Storage Nodes Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client - Name of the client l Storage Node - Name of the Storage Node l Type - Type of Media Server Networker Protection Policy Configuration Returns current Protection Policy configuration details. Uses data from the Networker Protection Policy Config data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Comment - Policy comment l Notification - Notification mode when policy is complete NetWorker VBA Configuration Returns information on NetWorker Virtual Basic Appliance (VBA) configuration in a table. Uses data from the VBA Configuration and VBA Status data sources. l Server - Name of the Networker server l Name - Name of the VBA l Comment - User defined comments l VCenter Host - Name or IP address of the vCenter host l Total Capacity - Total capacity (MB) l Policy List - Protection policy list l External Proxy Hosts - External proxy host list l Used Capacity - Used capacity of the VBA (MB) l Last Validated - Last Validated Checkpoint l Online - Indicates if the VBA is online l State - State of the VBA l Configuration Error - Configuration errors from the VBA NetWorker Workflow Configuration Returns Networker workflow configuration in a table report. Uses data from Workflow Configuration data source. 170 l Server - Name of the backup server l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Comment -Action comment EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Enabled - Field indicating if workflow is enabled or not l Notification- Notification mode when action is complete RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details Returns the RecoverPoint consistency group copy details in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Configuration data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the Copy l Copy OS - Operating system of the Copy. If the copies written are not all running the same operating system, this value will be Others/Mixed l Site - Location of the Copy l Role - Role of the Copy. For example, Production or Local Replica l Journal Compression - Level of compression enabled on the Journal: None, Medium, High l Required Protection Window - How far in time the replica image could be rolled back (in seconds) l Journal Lag Unlimited - Indicates if the journal lag is set to be unlimited l Max Journal Lag - Maximum journal lag for a copy (in MB) l Logged Writes Proportion - Proportion of journal allocated for target-side log (as a percentage) l Journal Size Limit - Maximum size of the journal (in MB) l Reservations Policy - Reservations Policy to be applied to the Copy: Auto, IF, SCSI-2, SCSI-3, PowerPath, PowerPath (non-auto) l Allow Distribution of Snapshots - Indicates if the Copy should allow distribution of snapshots that are larger than the capacity of journal volumes RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details for Consistency Group Returns the RecoverPoint consistency group copy details for consistency group in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Configuration data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Consistency group name l Copy OS - Operating system of the Copy. If the copies written are not all running the same operating system, this value will be Others/Mixed l Site - Location of the Copy l Role - Role of the Copy. For example, Production or Local Replica l Journal Compression - Level of compression enabled on the Journal: None, Medium, High l Required Protection Window - How far in time the replica image could be rolled back (in seconds) RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Details 171 Reports by System Template l Journal Lag Unlimited - Indicates if the journal lag is set to be unlimited l Max Journal Lag - Maximum journal lag for a copy (in MB) l Logged Writes Proportion - Proportion of journal allocated for target-side log (as a percentage) l Journal Size Limit - Maximum size of the journal (in MB) l Reservations Policy - Reservations Policy to be applied to the Copy: Auto, IF, SCSI-2, SCSI-3, PowerPath, PowerPath (non-auto) l Allow Distribution of Snapshots - Indicates if the Copy should allow distribution of snapshots that are larger than the capacity of journal volumes RecoverPoint Consistency Group Details Returns the RecoverPoint consistency group details in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Configuration and Consistency Group Status data sources. 172 l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Name - Name of the consistency group l Production Copy - Name of the copy that is the source of the transfer l Enabled - Indicates if the consistency group is enabled l Preferred RPA - RPA preferred to replicate this consistency group l Reservation Support - Indicates if reservation support is configured l Compression Enabled - Indicates if compression is enabled l Compression Level - Level of compression to use if enabled. A number between 1 and 10 l Minimize Lag - Indicates if RecoverPoint should use as much bandwidth as possible to minimize lag l Minimize Bandwidth - Indicates if RecoverPoint should preserve bandwidth to maintain lag within its limits l Priority - Amount of bandwidth allocated to this consistency group in relation to all other consistency groups: Idle, Low, Normal, High, Critical l Bandwidth Limited - Indicates if the consistency group should limit the amount of bandwidth it uses l Bandwidth Allocation - Bandwidth to which the consistency group is limited (MB/ second) l Hosts OS - Operating system of the hosts writing to the storage in the consistency group. If the hosts are not all running the same operating system, this value will be Others/Mixed l Global Cluster Mode - Global Cluster mode for the Copy group: None, Manual, Auto-data, Auto-quorum (shared data), Manual (shared data) l Allow Regulation - Indicates if RecoverPoint should be allowed to slow or stop the host application when approaching a policy limit l Transfer Data with Non Preferred RPA - Indicates if data should be transferred even when the group is handled by a non-preferred RPA l Measure Lag at Remote Appliance - Indicates if lag should be measured when writes reach the target RPA (as opposed to the journal) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l CDP System Optimized Lag - Indicates if the system should optimize the lag for CDP l CDP Fast First Time Init - Indicates if the CDP copy should perform fast first time initialization l CDP Snapshot Granularity - Snapshot granularity for CDP as a text string: Dynamic, Fixed(per second), Fixed(per write) l CDP Lag Size - Maximum allowed lag for CDP, if not using system optimization (in MB) l CDP Lag Time - Unit in which CRR lag is measured if CRR Lag Size is stored as a time (in seconds) l CDP Lag Writes - Number of writes, if CRR Lag Size is stored as a number of writes l CRR System Optimized Lag - Indicates if the system should optimize the lag for CRR l CRR Lag Size - Maximum allowed lag for CRR, if not using system optimization (in MB) l CRR Lag Time - Unit in which CRR lag is measured if CRR Lag Size is stored as a time (in seconds) l CRR Lag Writes - Number of writes, if CRR Lag Size is stored as a number of writes l CRR Fast First Time Init - Indicates if the CRR copy should perform fast first time initialization l CRR Snapshot Granularity - Snapshot granularity for CDP as a text string: Dynamic, Fixed(per second), Fixed(per write) l Set Name - Name of the replication set l Distributed - l Enabled - Indicates if the consistency group is active RecoverPoint Replication Set Configuration Returns the RecoverPoint replication set configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Configuration and Replication Set Configuration data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Name - Name of the replication set l Consistency Group Name - Name of the consistency group containing the replication set l Size - Size of the consistency group (in MB) RecoverPoint RPA Details Returns the RecoverPoint appliance details in a table report. Uses data from the RPA Configuration and RPA Status data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster RecoverPoint Replication Set Configuration 173 Reports by System Template l Site - Site at which RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Version - Version of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Status - Status of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Repository Volume - Status of the repository volume l Remote Connection - Status of the connection with the remote site l LAN - Status of the LAN interface l LAN Connection - Status of the local connection l WAN - Status of the WAN interface l WAN Connection - Status of the WAN connection l Data Link - Status of data links on the RecoverPoint Appliance l Volume Connections - Status of volume connections on the RecoverPoint Appliance RecoverPoint Splitter Details Returns the RecoverPoint splitter details in a table report. Uses data from the Splitter Configuration and Splitter Status data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the splitter is located l Name - Name of the Splitter l Type - Type of splitter l Status - Status of the splitter l RPA Connections - Status of connections to the RecoverPoint Appliance from the splitter l Volume Access - Level of access to the volume. For example, read-only or readwrite Remote Mirror Configuration Returns the remote mirror configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Remote Mirror Configuration data source. l Source node - Name of the object on which the source mirror resides l Source path - Path to the mirror source l Mirror node - Name of the object on which the remote mirror resides l Mirror path - Path to the remote mirror Save Pool Configuration Returns the save pool configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Save Pool Configuration data source. 174 l Array Name - Hostname or IP address of the host being monitored l Pool Name - Name of the pool EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Pool ID - Identifier for the pool l Total Capacity - Total capacity of the pool (in GB) l Enabled Capacity - Enabled capacity of the pool (in GB) Shared Memory Configuration Returns the shared memory configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Memory Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Physical Memory - Amount of physical memory (in MB) l Virtual Memory - Amount of virtual memory (in MB) l Read Cache - Read cache size (in MB) l Write Cache - Write cache size (in MB) l shmmax - System-wide maximum allowable shared memory segment size (in MB) l shmmni - System-wide minimum allowable number of shared memory segments l shmseg - Maximum number of shared memory segments that can be simultaneously attached to a single process. Not available on Solaris platforms l msgmap - Size of the free-space resource map used for assigning locations for new messages in shared memory. Not available on AIX and Solaris l msgmax - Maximum individual messages size allowed (in bytes) l msgmnb - Maximum total size of all messages that can be queued simultaneously on a message queue (in bytes) l msgmni - Maximum number of message queues that can exist simultaneously on the system l msgseg - Message segment size that is to be used when allocating message space in message queues. Not available on Solaris and AIX platforms l msgssz - Message segment size that is to be used when allocating message space in message queues (in bytes). Not available on AIX and Solaris l msgtql - Maximum number of messages that are allowed to exist on the system at any given time l semmap - Size of the free-space resource map used for allocating new System V IPC semaphores in shared memory. Not available on AIX, HP-UX 11.23, and Solaris l semmni - Maximum number of sets of IPC semaphores that can exist simultaneously on the system l semmns - System-wide maximum number of individual IPC semaphores that can be allocated for users. Not available on AIX l semmsl - Maximum number of Semaphores per semaphore set. Not available on AIX l semopm - Number of semaphore operations that can be performed per semop call. Not available on HP-UX l semume - Maximum number of IPC semaphores that a given process can have undo operations pending on Shared Memory Configuration 175 Reports by System Template Symmetrix LUN to Data Domain vDisks Returns Symmetrix LUN to Data Domain vDisk details in a table. Uses data from the LUN to LUN Mapping and LUN Configuration data sources. l Symmetrix Device - Symmetrix Device l Data Domain LUN - Data Domain vDisk l Size - Size of the Data Domain disk (in GB) l Pool - Data Domain pool name Tape Library Drive Count By Library Returns the number of tape drives that are configured on each library in a column chart. It is possible to map only virtual tape drives to tape libraries. Physical tape drives are not displayed in this chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored: For normal tape libraries, this value is the name of the tape library. For devices supporting multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this value is the name of the manager l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a library directly. It is populated if monitoring a device that supports multiple libraries such as an EDL. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member l Num Drives - Number of tape drives in the tape library Tape Library Firmware Summary Summary of the tape library firmware versions in a column chart. It is only possible to gather firmware information from virtual tape libraries. Physical tape libraries are not displayed in this chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. l Firmware - Firmware of the tape library l Count - Number of tape libraries Tape Library Model Summary Summary of the tape library models in a column chart. Includes all physical and virtual libraries managed by the virtual tape library. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. l Model - Model of the tape drive l Count - Number of tape drives Tape Library Slot Count By Library Returns the number of slots that are configured on each library in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration data source. 176 l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored: For normal tape libraries, this value is the name of the tape library. For devices supporting multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this value is the name of the manager l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a library directly. It is populated if monitoring a device that supports multiple libraries EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template such as an EDL. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member l Num Slots - Number of slots in the tape library TSM Copy Group Configuration Returns the TSM Copy Group Configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Copy Group Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM Server instance l Policy Domain Name - Policy domain of the copy group l Policy Set Name - Policy set of the copy group l Management Class Name - Management class of the copy group l Copy Group Name - Name of the copy group l Copy Group Type - Type of the copy group l Maximum Num. Versions Data Exists - Maximum number of backup versions retained l Maximum Num. Versions Data Deleted - Maximum number of backup versions deleted from client l Num. Days Extra Versions Retained - Number of days backup versions retained after being inactive l Num. Days Only Version Retained - Number of days backup versions retained after being deleted l Copy Mode - Can be modified or absolute l Copy Serialization - How to process modified files during backup l Copy Frequency (Days) - How frequently a file can be backed up in days l Copy Destination - Primary storage pool for data l Table Of Contents Destination - Primary storage pool for Table of Contents (TOC) l Last Updated By - Administrator who made most recent changes l Last Updated - Date of the last change l Managing Profile - Managing profile name l Changes Pending - Whether changes are pending TSM Defined Server Configuration Returns the TSM defined server configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Defined Server Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Defined Server - Name of the defined server. In previous DPA releases, this field was called LAN-free Server Name l Version - Server version l Hostname - IP address of the server TSM Copy Group Configuration 177 Reports by System Template l Port - Specifies the port for the TSM server if you are monitoring TSM remotely and there is more than one instance on a system. The default value is 1500 l Description - Server description l Node - Name of client object l Allow Replacement - Indicates if server definitions can be replaced l Locked - Indicates if client object is locked out of TSM l Compression - Type of compression performed by TSM on client files l Archive Delete Allowed - Indicates if the client object can delete its own archive files l URL - URL of the server l Registration Date - Date and time that the client object was registered l Password Set - Indicates if the server password is set l Password Set Date - When the server password was set l Invalid Sign-On Count - Maximum number of invalid sign on attempts allowed l Validate Protocol - Indicates if data validation is enabled l Registering Administrator - Name of the administrator that registered the client object l Roles - TSM server roles. For example, Storage Agent, Replication l Communication Method - Method of communication l SSL - Indicates if SSL is enabled l Virtual Volume Password Set Status - Status of the virtual volume password l Password Set Date - When the virtual volume password was set l Grace Delete Period (Days) - Grace deletion period (in days) TSM LAN Free Server Configuration Returns the TSM LAN-free server configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM LAN Free Server Configuration data source. In DPA 6.0, LAN-Free Server Configuration is renamed Defined Server Configuration. LAN-free Server Configuration is supported for backwards compatibility; however, Defined Server Configuration is preferred going forward. 178 l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l LAN Free Server - Name of the LAN-free Server l Version - Server version l Hostname - IP address of the server l Port - Specifies the port for the TSM server if you are monitoring TSM remotely and there is more than one instance on a system. The default value is 1500 l Description - Server description l Node - Name of client object l Allow Replacement - Indicates if server definitions can be replaced l Locked - Indicates if client object is locked out of TSM EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Compression - Type of compression performed by TSM on client files l Archive Delete Allowed - Indicates if the client object can delete its own archive files l URL - URL of the server l Registration Date - Date and time that the client object was registered l Password Set - Indicates if the server password is set l Password Set Date - When the server password was set l Invalid Sign-On Count - Maximum number of invalid sign on attempts allowed l Validate Protocol - Indicates if data validation is enabled l Registering Administrator - Name of the administrator that registered the client object TSM Management Class Configuration Returns TSM Management Class Configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Management Class Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM Server instance l Policy Domain Name - Policy domain of the management class l Policy Set Name - Policy set of the management class l Management Class Name - Management class name l Default Management Class -Whether this is the default management class for the policy set l Description - Description l Space Management Technique - File migration technique l Num. Days Since Non-Use Before Auto Migrate - Elapsed days of last access before file can be migrated l Migration Requires Backup -Whether backup version exists before migration l Migration Destination - Primary storage pool for migrated data l Last Updated By - Administrator who made most recent changes l Last Updated - Date of the last change l Managing Profile - Managing profile name l Changes Pending - Whether changes are pending TSM Policy Set Configuration Returns TSM Policy Set Configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Policy Set Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM Server instance l Policy Set Name - Policy set name l Policy Domain Name - Name of the domain the policy set is assigned to TSM Management Class Configuration 179 Reports by System Template l Default Management Class - The default management class assigned to this policy set l Description - Description l Last Updated By - Administrator who made most recent changes l Last Updated - Date of the last change l Managing Profile - Managing profile name l Changes Pending - Whether changes are pending Virtual Data Mover Configuration Returns the virtual data mover configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Data Mover Configuration data source. l Node - Hostname of the storage array l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Virtual Data Mover - Name of the virtual data mover Virtual Host Configuration Returns the configuration of virtual machines on a virtualization server in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Configuration and Virtual Host Status data sources. l Virtualization Server - Hostname of a Virtualization Server managed by Virtual Centre l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Virtual Machine Type - Type of virtual machine l Number CPU - Number of CPUs configured on the virtual machine l Maximum CPU - Maximum number of CPUs able to be configured on the virtual machine (in MHz) l Reserved CPU - Number of CPUs reserved on the virtual machine (in MHz) l Limit CPU - Number of CPU cycle that the virtual machine is limited to (in MHz) l Memory - Amount of memory configured on the virtual machine (in MB) l Reserved Memory - Amount of memory reserved for the virtual machine (in MB) l Limit Memory - Amount of memory that the virtual machine is limited to (in MB) l Status - Status of the virtual machine l CPU Used - CPU utilization of the virtual machine (in MHz) l Memory Used - Amount of memory used by the virtual machine (in MB) l Startup Time - Time virtual host was started Virtual Host Disk Configuration Returns the virtual host disk configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Disk Configuration data source. 180 l Virtualization Server - Hostname of a Virtualization Server managed by Virtual Centre l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Name - Name of the virtualization server l Size - Capacity of the disk (in MB) l Virtual Disk - Virtual disk to which the disk is mapped l Datastore - Name of the datastore on which the virtual disk is located Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration Returns the virtual host network interface configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration and Virtual Host Network Interface Status data sources. l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Virtualization Server - Hostname of a Virtualization Server managed by Virtual Centre l Name - Identifier for the virtual interface l Virtual Network - Network on which the virtual interface is located l MAC Address - MAC Address of network interface l Link Up - Indicates if the interface is currently connected l IP Address - IP address of the network interface Virtualization Manager Configuration Returns configuration information on Virtual Centre servers in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Centre Server Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the Virtual Centre Server host l Application Name - Name of the application running on the Virtual Centre server l Version - Version of the application l Vendor - Name of the application vendor l Operating System - Operating system running on the Virtual Centre host VNX/CLARiiON RAID Group Configuration Returns VNX and CLARiiON RAID group configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the RAID Group Configuration data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Name - Name of group l Type - Type of group l Logical Capacity - Identifies the amount of logical capacity (in GB) l Raw Capacity - Identifies the amount of raw capacity (in GB) l Used Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is used (in GB) l Free Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is free (in GB) l Max Disks - Maximum number of disks l Max Devices - Maximum number of devices Virtual Host Network Interface Configuration 181 Reports by System Template VNX/CLARiiON Storage Pool Configuration Returns the VNX and CLARiiON storage pool configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Storage Pool Config data source. l Hostname - Name of the host being monitored l Name - Name for the Storage Pool l Description - Description of the pool l Disk Type - Disk type used by the storage pool l Pool ID - Unique identifier for the pool l Capacity - Total capacity of the storage pool (in GB) l User Size - Amount of storage used by the pool (in GB) l Free Capacity - Total free capacity (in GB) l RAID Type - Type of RAID used l Pool Type - Type of storage pool. For example, primary, copy, or active data l Consumed Capacity - Total used capacity (in GB) l Num Disks - Number of disks storage pool holds l Is Mixed - l Full Threshold - l Subscribed Capacity - Total subscribed capacity (in GB) l % Subscribed - l Oversubscribed Capacity - Total capacity oversubscribed (in GB) l EFD Cache State - l Consumed - Webserver Configuration Returns information on webserver configuration in a table report. Uses data from the Webserver Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object running the webserver l Product - Webserver product l Version - Webserver version Xsigo Virtual To Physical Port Mapping Returns the mapping of virtual interfaces to physical ports on the Xsigo appliance in a table report. Uses data from the Physical to Virtual Port Mapping data source. 182 l Hostname - Name of the Xsigo Director object l Sub Name - Identifier for the switch l Virtual Type - Type of virtual port: 1 (virtual), 0 (physical) l Virtual Port - Identifier for virtual port mapped to the physical port l Physical Port - Identifier for the physical port EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Data Protection system templates Data protection is the main category for reports that present information about the backups that have taken place on a backup server. Data protection includes reports on any restores that have already occurred, and the current exposure of any backup clients. Note Size Offset and Size Scanned Offset values are gathered by the backup modules, but by default are not displayed in the reports. Size Offset is the number of bytes that should be added to or subtracted from the Size field to return the job size in bytes. Size Scanned Offset is the number of bytes that should be added to or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the job size in bytes. Active Clone Job Details Returns information on the status of clone jobs. Uses data from the Clone Job Status data source. l Server - Server which started the clone job l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the clone job took place l Clone ID - Identifier for the clone job l Clone - Object being cloned l Status - Status of the cloned job: Success, Failed, Started l Queue Start - Time the job went into the queue l Start Time - Time the job started l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Application Exposure for RPO missed ruleset Returns information on RPO missed exposures in a table report. Report for Application recovery point objective missed rule. Uses data from the User Input and Application Exposure data sources. l Current Backup Exposure - Amount of time for which the application has been exposed to data loss, measured as the difference between the restore point and the report's end time l Recovery Point Objective (Secs) - As specified in the Protection Policy l Alert - Identifier of the alert Application Exposure for RTE high ruleset Returns information on RTE high exposures in a table report. Report for Application restore time estimate too high rule. Uses data from the User Input and Application Exposure data sources. l Estimated restore time - l Backup Recovery Time Objective - As specified in the Protection Policy Data Protection system templates 183 Reports by System Template l Recovery Time Objective (Secs) - As specified in the Protection Policy l Alert - Identifier of the alert Avamar Data Retained by Client Returns the Data Retained value for all unexpired jobs on the Avamar server in a table. Uses data from the Avamar Data Retained by Client data source. l Client - Name of the Avamar client l Data Retained - Calculated as the sum of the Size Scanned of the earliest job on the client and the sum of the Bytes Modified Sent and the Bytes Modified Not Sent for the remaining jobs Avamar Domain Footprint Returns the names of the clients and the total size of all the successful, unexpired jobs per domain in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Domain Name - Name of the Avamar domain l Server - Name of the backup server on which the job took place l Clients Backed Up Within Domain - The names of the clients backed up within the domain l Data Written to Grid - The total size in MB of all successful, unexpired jobs on clients on the domain Avamar Garbage Collection Jobs Returns information on the Avamar garbage collection process in a column chart. Uses data from the Avamar Garbage Collection Status data source. l Server - Name of the Avamar server l Sub Name - Name of the Avamar client l ID - Identifier for the garbage collection process l Node Count - Number of Avamar objects involved in the collection process l Processed Index Stripes - Number of index stripes processed by garbage collection l Total Index Stripes - Total number of index stripes l Recovered - Number of bytes recovered by the collection process (in MB) l Recovered Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or deleted from the Recovered field to return the size of data recovered by garbage collection l Deleted Chunks - Number of chunks deleted by the collection process l Result - Status of the garbage collection process after completion l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job ended Avamar Replication Summary Returns the amount of data backed up and the percentage that is replicated in the last 24 hours, 24–48 hours, and over 48 hours in a table. Uses data from the Num Jobs, 184 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Uncloned Backup Jobs, Backup Server Status, Clone Job Details, Total Size Scanned (MB) data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Utilization - Percentage that is being utilized of the server l Under 24 Hours - Backed Up Logical - Amount of logical data backed up in the last 24 hours in MB l Under 24 Hours - Replicated Logical - Amount of logical data replicated in the last 24 hours as a percentage of data backed up for same time period (%) l 24–48 Hours - Backed Up Logical - Amount of logical data backed up in the last 24–48 hour period in MB l 24–48 Hours - Replicated Logical - Amount of logical data replicated in the last 24–48 hour period as a percentage of data backed up for same time period (%) l Over 48 Hours - Backed Up Logical - Amount of logical data backed up over 48 hours ago in MB l Over 48 Hours - Replicated Logical - Amount of logical data replicated over 48 hours ago as a percentage of data backed up for the same time period (%) l 24–48 Hours - Num Jobs - Internal field used for report row colours l 24–48 Hours - Num Replications - Internal field used for report row colours l Over 48 Hours - Num Jobs - Internal field used for report row colours l Over 48 Hours - Num Replications - Internal field used for report row colours l Expiry Date - The date of the earliest expiry for un-replicated backups l Current Exceptions - Field drills down to report Backup Unreplicated Clients - All Exceptions. This lists all backups that started over 24 hours ago and are not yet replicated, and all backups which are replicated but the gap between backup and replication was over 24 hours l All Exceptions - Field drills down to report Backup Unreplicated Clients - Current Exceptions. This lists all backups that started over 24 hours ago and are not yet replicated Backup 2-Day Comparison Returns comparison information on the two day backups in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Backups - Number of backups that completed l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in GB) l Period - Backup Active Clients Returns information on the active backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance Backup 2-Day Comparison 185 Reports by System Template l Group - Name of the group or policy under which the Job is running l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job is running l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job: pending, queued, initializing, started, completed, severed, restarted, in progress, future, failed - no restart l Error Code - Error code associated with the backup l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started l Num Jobs - Number of jobs l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup Backup Active Jobs Returns information on the active backup jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Active Jobs data source. 186 l Job Id - Job ID in the activity log l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy under which the Job is running l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job is running l Client - Name of the client l Job - Name of the Job l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job: pending, queued, initializing, started, completed, severed, restarted, in progress, future, failed - no restart l Error Code - Error code associated with the backup l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Active Groups Returns information on the active backup groups in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the group is located l Group - Name of the group in which the backup job occurred l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has never ran before l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run l Status - Status of the group: Never run, Started, Cloning, Completed, Queued l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that performed the backup. For example, NetWorker l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Backup All Clients Returns information on all clients backed up in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application Backup Active Groups 187 Reports by System Template 188 l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Archive Flag - Flag indicating whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Transferred - Size transferred to server (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Save Set size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Duration - l Num Jobs - Backup All Clients 189 Reports by System Template l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Groups Returns details of all the group runs that have occurred in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Details data source. l Server - Name of the server on which the group runs l Group - Name of the group that has run l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Start Time - Time the group started l End Time - Time the group ended l Status - Status of the group: Success, Fail l Application Status - Status of the Backup Exec group: Cancelled, Completed With Exceptions, Missed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application performing the backup l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Backup All Jobs - No Restarts Returns the details of all jobs, excluding failed restarts, in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Restarted Backup Job Details data sources. 190 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated Backup All Jobs - No Restarts 191 Reports by System Template l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Jobs Returns the details of all jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 192 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes Backup All Jobs 193 Reports by System Template l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Total number of secondary copies taken, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytesthat should be added or subtracted from from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Jobs for Specific Client Returns a list of all jobs that have run on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l 194 Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Session - session associated with the job l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) Backup All Jobs for Specific Client 195 Reports by System Template l 196 Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Number of seconds waiting for the backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - The ratio for the size of data compressed and deduplicated against the original data size over time EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Large Jobs Returns a list of all jobs greater than 500 GB that have run on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Session - session associated with the job l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed Backup All Large Jobs 197 Reports by System Template 198 l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the backup. This is hardcoded to full l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Long Running Jobs Returns a list of all completed jobs that have a total run time that is longer than 12 hours in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain Backup All Long Running Jobs 199 Reports by System Template l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid whenthe Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: l 200 n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) Backup All Long Running Jobs 201 Reports by System Template l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup All Slow Jobs Returns a list of all jobs that have run on a backup server that are less than 1 MB/ second in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 202 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies Backup All Slow Jobs 203 Reports by System Template l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Average Details For Specific Job Returns information on the average details for a backup of the selected Job on that client since records began in a table report. Only successful Jobs of the same backup level are considered. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 204 l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Average Full Details By Client Returns information on the full details for a backup by client on that client since records began in a table report. Only successful Jobs of the same backup level are considered. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job Backup Client Configuration for Pool Returns details on the configuration of all physical hosts configured on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Client Config Mapping and Backup Server Mapping data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the client is configured l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client l Pool - Pool of the volume that is required l Domain Name - Identifier for domain l Active - Identifies if the backup pool client is active l Software Version - Version of the backup software running on the client l Remote IP - Remote IP address of the client l OS Type - Type of client operating system l OS Version - Version of the client operating system l Server Network Interface - Network interface on the server or media server to which the client connects when running backups l Priority - Priority of the client l Parallelism - Number of jobs that can run in parallel on this client l Contact - Text string of information identifying the client object's administrator l Client Identifier - Unique identifier for the client instance l Archive Services - Indicates if archive services are available for the client l Remote Access - List of remote users permitted to recover files from the client l Index Path - Path to the client's index directory on the server. The path is either an absolute path or NULL. If NULL, the index resides in the index/clientname subdirectory of the EMC home directory l Owner Notification - Notification action used to send status message contents to the client owner l Hard Links - Indicates if hard link processing is enabled on the Windows client l Short Filenames - Indicates if short file name processing is enabled on the Windows client Backup Average Full Details By Client 205 Reports by System Template 206 l BMR - Indicates if Bare Metal Recovery protection is enabled l BMR Options - List of Bare Metal Recovery options l Backup Type - Backup client type l CPUs - Number of processors in the client machine l Enabler In Use - Indicates if the client is using up a license count l Licensed Applications - List of licensed applications used by the client l Licensed PSPs - List of licensed PowerSnap platforms used by the client l Resource ID - Identifier for the client l Registration Time - Time of registration l Last Access Time - Time last accessed l Password Set Time - Time that the password was set l Invalid Password Count - Number of invalid password entries l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Archive Delete - Indicates if archive deletion is permitted l Backup Delete - Indicates if backup deletion is permitted l Locked - Indicates if the client object is locked l Registration Administrator - Name of the administrator who registered the client l Option Set - Option set for the client specified on the TSM server l Aggregation - Indicates if client file aggregation is enabled when backing up l URL - URL for the web client l Node Type - Type of client object: Server, Client, NAS l Password Expiration Period - Number of days after which a password expires l Keep Mount Point - Indicates if the client can keep mount points during a session l Max Mount Points Allowed - Maximum number of mount points permitted for a client in a session l Auto Filespace Rename - Indicates if TSM prompts the client to rename file spaces when the client system upgrades to a client that supports Unicode l Validate Protocol - Indicates if the client has data validation enabled l GUID - Globally unique identifier of the client object l Transaction Group Max - Maximum number of files or directories that can be contained in a transaction group l Data Read Path - Transfer path when sending data: ANY, LAN, LAN-free l Data Write Path - Transfer path when receiving data: ANY, LAN, LAN-free l Session Initiation - Initiator of session: ServerOnly, ClientOrServer l Client HLA - High-level address of the NAS file server (IP address or domain name) l Client LLA - Low-level address of the NAS file server (port number) l Collocation Group Name - Name of the collocation group, if collocation is enabled, for the client l Proxy Target - Specifies which objects are proxy objects (agents) for other objects EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Compression Location - Location of data compression l Proxy Node - Proxy object for deduplication if applicable l Deduplication Location - Location of data deduplication l Client Direct - Client writes directly to the Data Domain/AFTD using DDBoost are enabled and no writes are made to the storage node. l NAS File Access User- NAS file access user name l Storage Replication Policy - Storage replication policy name l NAS Management User - NAS management user name l NAS Device Manager - NAS device management user name Backup Client De-Dupe Rate Distribution Returns the backup client deduplication rate distribution in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Last Backup Details data sources. l Range - l Count - Backup Client De-Dupe Ratios Returns the backup client deduplication ratios in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Last Backup Details data sources. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application l Avg Daily Change - l De-Dupe Ratio - l Change Rate - l De-Dupe Rate - Backup Client Size Monthly Comparison Returns the backup comparison between any two months per client in a table. Uses data from the Total Size, Report Times, and Total Size Scanned data sources. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Total Data Protected First Month - Total size of the data protected before deduplication for the first month (in GB) l Total Data Protected Second Month - Total size of the data protected before deduplication for the second month (in GB) l Total Data Backed Up First Month - Amount of data backed up for the first month (in GB) l Total Data Backed Up Second Month - Amount of data backed up for the second month (in GB) l Backed Up Change - Difference between how much data was backed up between the first month and the second month (in GB) Backup Client De-Dupe Rate Distribution 207 Reports by System Template l Protected Change - Difference between how much data was protected between the first month and the second month (in GB) l Backed Up - Change - Percentage change between how much data was backed up between the first month and the second month (in GB) l Protected - Change - Percentage change between how much data was protected (in GB) between the first month and the second month l 1st Month - Earliest start date for the first month l 2nd Month - End date for the second month Backup Client Summary Summary of the backup client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details, Backup Job Details for Clients with Failures, Backup Job Status, and Backup Statistics data sources. l Missed - Count of the number of clients with all missed jobs on them l Completed - Count of the total number of clients on the backup server that has at least one job on it l Partial - Indicates that some jobs succeeded and some failed during the reporting period. Partial, which indicates jobs with different status or mixed status values. The status could be Successful, Failure, or Missed. The Client Summary report will list a client as a Partial client when it has a mix of failed, successful, and missed jobs within the time period. l Failed - Count of the total number of clients after deduplication with only failed jobs on them l Successful - Indicates that all jobs processed on the client during the reporting period were successful l Success Rate - Success rate of clients on the backup server over the reporting period l Active - Count of the number of clients with active jobs running Backup Clients Not Backed Up Returns the clients that were not backed up in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config, Num Jobs, and Virtual Hosts data sources. Use this report to identify scheduling problems on the backup application or clients that continue to have repetitive failures. l Client - Name of the client on the backup server Backup Cumulative Number Of Completed Jobs Returns the backup cumulative number of completed jobs in an area chart report. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l 208 Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Cumulative Size Of Completed Jobs Returns the backup cumulative size of completed jobs in an area chart report. Uses data from the Total Size data source. l Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) Backup Data Domain Clone Details Drill down report from the Backup Jobs Details template that returns clone job details for a specific backup job in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Data Domain Clone Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Clone ID - Identifier for the clone job l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes Backup Device Configuration for Pool Returns backup device configuration for pool in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Device Config Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Pool - Name of the pool l Device Alias - Alias for the device, if available l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Device Class - Class of the device: Disk, Tape l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the device is located l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT or Ultrium-2 l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No l Hardware Id - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Firmware - Firmware version of the device l Resource ID - Resource identifier for the device l Media Manager Path - Operating system path the media manager l Num Target Sessions - Number of target sessions l Max Sessions - Maximum number of sessions l Send/Receive Timeout - Send and receive timeout Backup Cumulative Size Of Completed Jobs 209 Reports by System Template l Num Retries - Number of retries l Network Retry Interval - Network failure retry interval (in seconds) l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l Max Errors - Max errors l Device Access - Device access information Backup Failed Clients Returns information on all clients for which backups failed in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details for Clients with Failures data source. 210 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which a Job was backed up (NetBackup only) l Storage Unit - Name of the storage unit to which the Job was backed up l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Group - Name of the group/policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Error Code - Error code (if available) from the backup application l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Archive Flag - If selected, indicates that the backup Job is an archive Job l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that tool place before the Job completed (NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log Backup Failed Clients 211 Reports by System Template l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Failed Groups Returns information on all groups for which backups failed in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Details data source. 212 l Server - Name of the server on which the group runs l Group - Name of the group that has run l Start Time - Time the group started l End Time - Time the group ended l Status - Status of the group: Success, Fail l Application Status - Status of the Backup Exec group: Cancelled, Completed With Exceptions, Missed (Backup Exec only) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application performing the backup l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Failed Jobs Returns a list of all failed jobs on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window Backup Failed Jobs 213 Reports by System Template 214 l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backupwindow (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Failed Jobs For Client Drill down report for Backup Top 10 Most Unreliable Clients that returns all of the failed jobs on a client in a table report. Uses date from the Backup Job Details report. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id -Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy Backup Failed Jobs For Client 215 Reports by System Template 216 l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Failed Jobs for Client for ruleset Report for the Many backups failed rule that returns details for the backup failed jobs for client in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs, Report Times, and User Input data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client on which the Job took place l Num Fails - Number of jobs that have failed l Alert - Identifier of the alert Backup Failed Jobs for ruleset Report for Many backups failed rule that returns details on backup failed jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details, Report Times, and User Input data sources. l Num Failed - Number of jobs that have failed l Alert - Identifier of the alert Backup Full History of Specific Job Returns the details of all known backups of the selected client and Job in an table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group Backup Failed Jobs for Client for ruleset 217 Reports by System Template 218 l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Group Configuration for Pool Returns the backup group configuration for pool details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Group Config Mapping data source. l Server - Hostname of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Group - Name of the group associated with the schedule l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Pool - Pool of the volume that is required l Policy Type - Type of backup for the group. For example, full or incremental l Policy Action - Policy action l Policy Description - Policy description l Preceding Action - Preceding action l Offhost Backup Method - Method used for performing offhost backups Backup Group Configuration for Pool 219 Reports by System Template 220 l Active - Identifies if the backup pool client is active l Effective Date - Date and time that the policy went active l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Volume Pool - Volume pool the policy is configured to use l Checkpoint Restart - Indicates if checkpoints are configured on this policy l Checkpoint interval - Checkpoint interval that is used if checkpoint restarts are enabled l Limit Jobs Per Policy - Indicates if the policy is limited to a number of Jobs l Max Jobs Per Policy - If Limit Jobs Per Policy is enabled, the value of the limit l Job Priority - Priority that is assigned to Jobs in this policy l Frozen Image Clients - Indicates if Frozen Image backups are configured in this policy l Remote Filesystems - Indicates if Remote File systems are backed up by this policy l Cross Mount Points - Indicates if the backups cross mount points l True Image Restore Information - Indicates if True Image Restore (TIR) information is gathered by this policy l True Image Move Detection - Indicates if True Image Restore information is gathered with move detection l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l File Restore Raw - Indicates if the File Restore Raw flag is set l Disaster Recovery Info - Indicates if Disaster Recovery Information is gathered l Bare Metal Restore Info - Indicates if Bare Metal Restore Information is gathered l Multiple Data Streams - Indicates if the policy implements multiple data streams l Keyword Phrase - Keyword phrase associated with this policy l Block Level Incremental - Indicates if block level incremental backups are enabled l Snapshot Backup - Indicates if snapshot backups are enabled l Retain Snapshots - Indicates if snapshots will be retained l Snapshot Method - Method for performing snapshots l Offhost Backup - Indicates if Offhost backup is enabled l Use Alternate Client - Indicates if an Alternate client is used l Alternate Client Name - Alternate client that is used l Use Data Mover - Indicates if a data mover is used l Data Mover Type - Data mover type that is used l Resource ID - Resource ID of the group l Auto Restart - Indicates if the group is configured for automatic restarts l Scheduled Start - Time of day that the group starts l Parallelism - Parallelism of the group l Client Retries - Number of retries that clients attempt l Level - Level of backup for the group EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Schedule - Schedule used by the group l Num Days Inactive Backup Retained - Number of days to retain inactive backup data l Num Days Inactive Archive Retained - Number of days to retain inactive archive data l Interval - Group run interval l Restart Window - Group restart window l Forced Incremental - Indicates if forced incremental backup is enabled l Clones - Indicates if backup is cloned automatically l Clone Pool - Pool for backup clones l Success Threshold - Backup status considered as successful l Inactivity Threshold - File inactivity threshold l Inactivity Alert Threshold - File inactivity alert threshold l Snapshot Policy - Snapshot policy name l Snapshot Pool - Snapshot pool name l Specification Type - Type of backup specification Backup Group Job Status Details Returns group status details along with information about the jobs associated with the groups in a table. Because the Backup Group Job Status Details report uses the Group Job Id field to map groups and jobs, the Backup Group Job Status Details report works for any module that populates the Group Job Id field. Uses data from the Backup Group Status, Backup Job Details, Backup Group Config, and Report Times data sources. l Server- Name of the backup server l Group - Name of group associated with schedule l Status - Status of the group: started, completed, never run, cloning, queued l Level - Overall level of the jobs backed up in the group. Full, Incr, Manual, Cumulative, Incr, Differential Incr, Mixed l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Start Time- Earliest Job start time for job backed up in the group l End Time - Latest job end time for job backed up in the group l Expiry Date - Latest expiry time for jobs backed up in the group l Group Job Id - ID of the group job instance l Retention - Retention days l Client - Name of the Clients backed up l Job -Name of the jobs backed up l Group Start Time - Time the group started l Group End Time - Time the group ended l Group Status - Status of the Backup Exec group: Cancelled, Completed With Exceptions, Missed (Backup Exec only) l Group Duration - Time the group took to complete the job Backup Group Job Status Details 221 Reports by System Template l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job is running l Remaining Time to Expire - Difference between the expiry date and the report run end time Backup Group Status Returns the details of all backup groups in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the group is located l Group - Name of the group in which the backup job occurred l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has never ran before l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run l Status - Status of the group: Never run, Started, Cloning, Completed, Queued l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that performed the backup. For example, NetWorker l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Backup Group Summary Summary of the backup group in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Details, Backup Group Status, and Total Size data sources. l Completed - l Successful - Number of successful jobs l Failed - Number of failed jobs l Active - Number of active jobs l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period Backup Hourly Job Status Returns the backup hourly job status in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Successful - Number of successful jobs l Failed - Number of failed jobs Backup Job Attempts Returns details of the backup job attempts in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Attempts and Backup Job Details data sources. 222 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in MB) l Files - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - l Started In Window - l Finished In Window - l Time In Window - l Time Out Of Window - l Out Of Window Reason - l Trailing Space In Window - l Leading Space In Window - l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the Job completed Backup Job Attempts 223 Reports by System Template 224 l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Expires - l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - l Valid Retention - l Compliant - l Policy Used - l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Job Attempts for Specific Job Returns details of the backup job attempts for specific job in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Attempts data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Job Id - Unique ID of the backup Job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of the server instance, if applicable l Attempt - Attempt number (first, second, and others) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l PID - Identifier of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed Backup Job Change Ratio Aggregate Returns the ratio of data backed up to data protected and aggregated over all of the backup clients in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. l Last Incremental Size - Amount of data that was backed up on the last incremental backup of the backup client. For Avamar and TSM, this value is taken from the last backup of the client, as both products perform only incremental backups. l Last Incremental Rate - Ratio of the last incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. In environments in which very little data changes, this value would be expected to be low. For applications such as NetWorker, this value would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. l Average Incremental Size - Calculated by analyzing all of the incremental backups that have occurred on the client over the reporting period, and dividing the total data backed up by the number of the backups that have taken place. This value allows you to see if there is a significant discrepancy between the last incremental backup and the overall average. l Average Incremental Rate - Ratio of the average incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. For backup applications such as NetWorker, this would Backup Job Attempts for Specific Job 225 Reports by System Template l l typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Total Size - Total amount of data that has been backed up on this client over the reporting period. This includes full backups and incrementals. Size Rate - Ratio of the total amount of data that has been backed up to the amount of data that has been protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this value would be expected to be a multiple of the amount of data protected. For backup applications such as Avamar, this value should be a significantly smaller number than the amount of data protected. Backup Job Change Ratios Returns the ratio of data backed up to data protected in a table report. This ratio is calculated for each backup job on the client selected from the configuration tree. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l l l l l l l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. Last Incremental Size - Amount of data that was backed up on the last incremental backup of the backup client. For Avamar and TSM, this value is taken from the last backup of the client, as both products perform only incremental backups. Last Incremental Rate - Ratio of the last incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. In environments in which very little data changes, this value would be expected to be low. For applications such as NetWorker, this value would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Average Incremental Size - Calculated by analyzing all of the incremental backups that have occurred on the client over the reporting period, and dividing the total data backed up by the number of the backups that have taken place. This value allows you to see if there is a significant discrepancy between the last incremental backup and the overall average. Average Incremental Rate - Ratio of the average incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. For backup applications such as NetWorker, this would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Total Size - Total amount of data that has been backed up on this client over the reporting period. This includes full backups and incrementals. Size Rate - Ratio of the total amount of data that has been backed up to the amount of data that has been protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this value would be expected to be a multiple of the amount of data protected. For backup applications such as Avamar, this value should be a significantly smaller number than the amount of data protected. Backup Job Change Ratios By Client Returns the ratio of data backed up to data protected by client in a table report. This ratio is calculated for each backup job on the client selected from the configuration tree. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l 226 Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l l l l l l the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. Last Incremental Size - Amount of data that was backed up on the last incremental backup of the backup client. For Avamar and TSM, this value is taken from the last backup of the client, as both products perform only incremental backups. Last Incremental Rate - Ratio of the last incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. In environments in which very little data changes, this value would be expected to be low. For applications such as NetWorker, this value would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Average Incremental Size - Calculated by analyzing all of the incremental backups that have occurred on the client over the reporting period, and dividing the total data backed up by the number of the backups that have taken place. This value allows you to see if there is a significant discrepancy between the last incremental backup and the overall average. Average Incremental Rate - Ratio of the average incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. For backup applications such as NetWorker, this would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Total Size - Total amount of data that has been backed up on this client over the reporting period. This includes full backups and incrementals. Size Rate - Ratio of the total amount of data that has been backed up to the amount of data that has been protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this value would be expected to be a multiple of the amount of data protected. For backup applications such as Avamar, this value should be a significantly smaller number than the amount of data protected. Backup Job Change Ratios for Client Returns the ratio of data backed up to data protected for client in a table report. This ratio is calculated for each backup job on the client selected from the configuration tree. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l l l l l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. Last Incremental Size - Amount of data that was backed up on the last incremental backup of the backup client. For Avamar and TSM, this value is taken from the last backup of the client, as both products perform only incremental backups. Last Incremental Rate - Ratio of the last incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. In environments in which very little data changes, this value would be expected to be low. For applications such as NetWorker, this value would typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. Average Incremental Size - Calculated by analyzing all of the incremental backups that have occurred on the client over the reporting period, and dividing the total data backed up by the number of the backups that have taken place. This value allows you to see if there is a significant discrepancy between the last incremental backup and the overall average. Average Incremental Rate - Ratio of the average incremental size to the amount of data that is protected. For backup applications such as NetWorker, this would Backup Job Change Ratios for Client 227 Reports by System Template typically be in the range of 10–15%. For applications such as Avamar, this value would be expected to be significantly lower. l Total Size - Total amount of data that has been backed up on this client over the reporting period. This includes full backups and incrementals. l Size Rate - Ratio of the total amount of data that has been backed up to the amount of data that has been protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this value would be expected to be a multiple of the amount of data protected. For backup applications such as Avamar, this value should be a significantly smaller number than the amount of data protected. Backup Job Configuration for Pool Returns the backup job configuration for pool details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Job Config Mapping and Backup Server Mapping data sources. l Server - Hostname of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Pool of the volume that is required l Client - Clients that are required to enter into the backup pool l Job - Jobs that are allowed in the backup pool l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the backup job occurred l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Schedule - Name of the backup schedule l Resource ID - Identifier for the client Backup Job Deduplication Ratio for Client Returns the ratio of data deduplicated against data backed up over the time period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Data Protected - l Data Transferred - l Change Rate - l De-Dupe Rate - l De-Dupe Ratio - Backup Job Details for Specific Volume Returns backup job details with expiry of greater than or equal to eight years in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details with Volume data source. l 228 Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of the TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Storage Units - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Archive Flag - Indicates if the job is a backup or archive job l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, EMC NetWorker, Symantec NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs Backup Job Details for Specific Volume 229 Reports by System Template l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Retention - Retention days l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Job Device Mapping Returns the backup job device mapping in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Device Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the server instance, if applicable l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Group - Name of the group on the backup server l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Storage Node - Name of the storage object l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software Backup Job Error Details Returns details of all job errors on a backup server or client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Backup Job Errors data sources. 230 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Severity - Severity of the failure l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error - Error string l Error Code Summary - Summary of the error codes associated with the backup l Time - Time the failure took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing Backup Job Error Details for Specific Job Returns details of all job errors for a specific job in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Errors data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client on which the Job failed l Severity - Severity of the failure l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error - Error string l Time - Time the failure took place Backup Job Error Distribution Returns the backup job error distribution details in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available Backup Job Error Summary Summary of the backup job error details in a pie chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available Backup Job Error Details for Specific Job 231 Reports by System Template Backup Job Media Details Returns a list of volumes that a backup was written to in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details with Volume and Backup Job Media data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Volume Id - Unique identifier of the volume to which the backup Job was written l State - State of the media l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Jukebox in which the volume resides l Slot - Jukebox slot occupied by the volume l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire Backup Job Status By Server Returns backup job status by server details in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs and Num Jobs In Event State By Server data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Succeeded - Number of jobs that were successful over the reporting period l State - l Failed - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Queued - Time the backup went into the backup applications queue l Running - Backup Job Summary Summary of all jobs that were processed on a backup server or client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics and Num Jobs In Event State data sources. 232 l Completed - Total number of jobs that have completed over the reporting period l Succeeded - Number of jobs that were successful over the reporting period l Failed - Number of jobs that failed over the reporting period l Missed - Number of jobs that were missed over the reporting period (TSM only) l Active - Shows jobs which meet the following conditions: n Has an end time of the end of Unix time (the year 2038) - hi is how we track the latest status of a job n Was queued between the start of the report window and the end of the report window n Is in one of the following states: started, queued, severed, restarted, future, failed - no restart, pending, in progress l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in GB) l Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Job Summary for Group Run Summary of jobs that have run during the group run in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Completed - Total number of jobs that have completed over the reporting period l Succeeded - Number of jobs that were successful over the reporting period l Failed - Number of jobs that failed over the reporting period l Total Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in GB) l Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period Backup Last 5 Runs of Job Returns details about the last five runs of the same client and selected job in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job Backup Job Summary for Group Run 233 Reports by System Template 234 l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Last n Runs of Client Returns details of last jobs backup jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window Backup Last n Runs of Client 235 Reports by System Template n 236 Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the l Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Total number of secondary copies taken, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup; field hidden by default l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target; field hidden by default l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type; field hidden by default l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name; field hidden by default l l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered; field hidden by default Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Last n Successful Runs of Client Returns details of last jobs successful backup jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host Backup Last n Successful Runs of Client 237 Reports by System Template 238 l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Statu Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup applications Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Total number of secondary copies taken, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup; field hidden by default l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target; field hidden by default l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type; field hidden by default l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name; field hidden by default l l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered; field hidden by default Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Last Successful Full Run of Client Returns the backup last successful full run of client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred Backup Last Successful Full Run of Client 239 Reports by System Template 240 l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Total number of secondary copies taken, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type Backup Last Successful Full Run of Client 241 Reports by System Template l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Last Successful Run of Client Returns the backup last successful run of client details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 242 l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - AmAmount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when In Window is false. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Total number of secondary copies taken, if any l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup Backup Last Successful Run of Client 243 Reports by System Template l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Last Successful Run of Job Returns the backup last successful run of jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data sources. 244 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated Backup Last Successful Run of Job 245 Reports by System Template l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup; field hidden by default l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target; field hidden by default l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type; field hidden by default l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name; field hidden by default l l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered; field hidden by default Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Missed Clients Returns all clients for which backups were missed during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 246 l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy- Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Ran In Window - l Started In Window - l Finished In Window - l Time In Window - l Time Out Of Window - l Out Of Window Reason - l Trailing Space In Window - l Leading Space In Window - l Queued - Time the Job started queuing EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Valid Level - l Valid Retention - l Compliant - l Policy Used - Backup Missed Jobs Returns details of backup jobs that were missed in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job Backup Missed Jobs 247 Reports by System Template 248 l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - l Started In Window - l Finished In Window - l Time In Window - l Time Out Of Window - l Out Of Window Reason - l Trailing Space In Window - l Leading Space In Window - l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - l Valid Retention - l Compliant - l Policy Used - l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Backup Open Files Returns information about files that were not successfully backed up during a backup of a Job in a table report. Files may have been missed because they were in use by another application at backup time. Uses data from the Open Files data source. l Job Id - Unique identifier of the backup Job. Matches the ID column in Backup Job Details l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l File Name - Name of the filename that could not be backed up l Error Message - Reason why files were not backed up l Time - Start time of the Job associated with the file that could not be backed up Backup Open Files for Specific Job Returns information about files that were not successfully backed up during a backup of a Job in a table report. Files may have been missed because they were in use by another application at backup time. Uses data from the Open Files data source. l Job Id - Unique identifier of the backup Job. Matches the ID column in Backup Job Details l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l File Name - Name of the filename that could not be backed up l Error Message - Reason why files were not backed up Backup Open Files 249 Reports by System Template l Time - Start time of the Job associated with the file that could not be backed up Backup Partial Clients Returns information on all clients for which backups were partially successful during the reporting period in a table report. A client is partially successful if it had at least one failed Job and one successful job. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 250 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Partial Clients 251 Reports by System Template Backup Partial Groups Returns information on all the backup clients for which backup groups were partially successful during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Details data source. l Server - Name of the server on which the group runs l Group - Name of the group that has run l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Start Time - Time the group started l End Time - Time the group ended l Status - Status of the group: Success, Fail l Application Status - Status of the Backup Exec group: Cancelled, Completed With Exceptions, Missed (Backup Exec only) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application performing the backup l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Backup Problem Clients Returns details of the backup problem clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Failing - l Slow - l Long-running - l Large - l Status - Backup Protected versus Avg Incremental Returns the backup protected versus average incremental details in a column chart. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. l Average Incremental Size - Average incremental size (in MB) Backup Protected versus Backed Up Returns the backup protected versus backed up details in a column chart. Uses data from the Last Backup Details, Num Jobs, and Total Size (MB) data sources. l 252 Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) Backup Report Card Returns information about each client that was backed up over the reporting period and the number of successful and unsuccessful jobs on a daily basis in a report card. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Status - Indicates if the backup completed successfully Use this report to easily identify clients that have repetitive failures, or more importantly, clients that have not been backed up at all. For each day in the specified reporting period, a cell displays the backup status of each client: l If the cell for a client is completely green, all backups were successful for that client on that day. l If the cell is completely red, all backups failed for that client on that day. l If there is a mix of red and green, the proportion represents the percentage of backups that failed on that client on that day. l If a cell is white, no backups occurred for that client on that day. Backup Replication Sync Times by Client Returns the time difference between run of latest backup jobs and corresponding cloned job per clients in a table for Avamar, NetWorker, NeBackup, BackupExec, and Data Protector. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Clone Job Details data sources. l Client - Name of the Client the backup job took place on l Job - Name of the backup job l Last Successful Backup Time - The end time of the job l Replicate Client - Name of the client the clone job took place on l Last Successful Clone Time - The corresponding clone job end time l Time out of Sync - Duration calculated as the difference between the Last Successful Backup Time and Last Successful Clone Time. This field is populated only if the clone is out of sync with the backup. Backup Restore Details Returns the details of all restores that have been processed in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details data source. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Client - Name of the client being restored Backup Report Card 253 Reports by System Template l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Num Files - Number of files restored l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation (TSM only) l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Queued - Time the restore started queuing l Started - Time the restore started reading l Finished - Time the restore completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Backup Running Jobs Returns a list of jobs that are running now in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Status data source. 254 l Job Id - Job ID in the activity log l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy under which the Job is running l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job is running l Client - Name of the client l Job - Name of the Job l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the domain associated with the group EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status - Status of the Job: pending, queued, initializing, started, completed, severed, restarted, in progress, future, failed - no restart l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Error Code - Error code associated with the backup l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that performed the backup. For example, NetWorker l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup Backup Server Error Details Returns details on errors and warnings that have occurred on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Application Errors data source. l Application Id - Session ID or Process ID that the error is associated with l Server - Server on which the error occurred l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Client on which the error occurred l Severity - Severity of the message: Severe error, Error, Warning l Error Code - Error code of the message: message prefix, message number, message type l Error String - Text of the error message l Type - Type of the event l Source - Source of the event l Domain - Avamar domain of the event l Category - Category of event l Timestamp - Time the error started Backup Server Group Client Mapping Returns a list of clients that are included in a group in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Mapping data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the client is configured l Client - Name of the client l Group - Name of the group on the backup server Backup Server Error Details 255 Reports by System Template Backup Successful Clients Returns information on the status of all successfully backed-up clients processed during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 256 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies (including primary copy) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid Backup Successful Clients 257 Reports by System Template l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Successful Groups Returns the backup successful groups in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Group Details data source. l Server - Name of the server on which the group runs l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the backup job occurred l Start Time - Time the group started l End Time - Time the group ended l Status - Status of the group: Success, Fail l Application Status - Status of the Backup Exec group: Cancelled, Completed With Exceptions, Missed (Backup Exec only) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application performing the backup l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Backup Successful Jobs Returns a list of all successful jobs on a backup server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 258 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the media server on which the backup occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job (CommVault only) l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application (EMC Avamar only) l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window Backup Successful Jobs 259 Reports by System Template n 260 Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Successful Jobs with failed SLA for ruleset Returns backup successful jobs with failed SLA details in a table report. Report for Backup succeeded but failed SLA requirements rule. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Alert - Identifier of the alert Backup to Data Domain - Clients with Low Dedup Ratio Returns clients ordered by worst dedup ratio value in a table. Uses data from the Deduplication Status data source. l Client - Name of the Client l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain associated with the backup l Pre Deduplication - Size before local compression for client l Post Deduplication - Size after local compression for client l Dedup Ratio - Deduplication ratio for client calculated as (Pre Deduplication/Post Deduplication)-1/(Pre Deduplication/Post Deduplication) Backup Top 10 Largest Clients Returns the ten clients that have backed up the most amount of data during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Backups - Number of backups that completed l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in GB) l Files - Total number of files that were backed up (millions) l Share of Total - Backup Successful Jobs with failed SLA for ruleset 261 Reports by System Template Backup Top 10 Least Successful Clients Returns the backup top ten least successful clients in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Failures - l Failure Rate - Backup Top 10 Longest Running Clients Returns the backup top ten longest running clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Share of Total - l Duration - Total duration of all backup Jobs (in seconds) l Longest Run - Maximum duration of all backup Jobs (in seconds) Backup Top 10 Most Unreliable Clients Returns the top ten clients on a backup server or in a group that have failed most frequently during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Failure - l Share of Total - Backup Top 10 Smallest Clients Returns the top ten smallest clients based on the throughput of backup Jobs that have run on the clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in GB) l Backups - Number of backups that completed Backup VMs Not Backed Up Returns information on backup Virtual Machines (VMs) that are not backed up in a table. Uses data from the Successful Backup Job Details for Virtual Hosts and Virtual Hosts data sources. l Client - Name of the VM not backed up Clients with Low Dedup Ratio Returns information on backup to Data Domain clients with low deduplication ratio in a table report. Uses data from the Deduplication Status data source. Note that the dedup ratio field in this report are based on metrics at the time that the data was ingested on the Data Domain. It is not possible to report on the physical size of files being stored on the Data Domain. This is a current limitation within Data Domain. 262 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Client - Name of the Data Domain l Pre-Deduplication - Size before local compression for client l Post-Deduplication - Size after local compression for client l Dedup Ratio - Deduplication ratio for client calculated as (Pre Deduplication/Post Deduplication)-1/(Pre Deduplication/Post Deduplication) Clone Attempts Returns the clone attempt details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Attempts and Clone Operations data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Job Id - Identifier for the clone job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the clone: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the clone l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data cloned (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been cloned l Num Files - Number of files cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Clone ID - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup Clone Attempts 263 Reports by System Template l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Clone Attempts for Specific Clone Operation Returns the clone attempt for specific clone operation details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Attempts data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Job Id - Identifier for the clone job l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the clone: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the clone l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data cloned (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been cloned l Num Files - Number of files cloned l Start Time - Time the Job started l End Time - Time the Job completed Clone Job Media Details Drill down report for Clone Job Details that returns media details for a specific clone job in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Media data source. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone occurred l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool in which the volume is located l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire Clone Job Media Details for Clone Operation Returns details of the media used to back up jobs that have been cloned in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Job Media data source. l 264 Server - Server which started the clone job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume on which the clone job took place l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool associated with the volume l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire Clone Operations Returns clone operation details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Operations data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Policy Type - The type of session that gave rise to the clone job; possible values are "Copy" and "Replication" l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Clone Id - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance Clone Operations 265 Reports by System Template l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Clone Summary Summary of all the cloning operations that have occurred on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Num Clones, Num Clone Jobs In Event State, Total Clone Size, and Total Size data sources. l Completed- Number of cloning operations that were completed during the period specified. l Successful - Number of cloning operations that were successful during the period specified. l Failed - Number of cloning operations that failed during the period specified. l Active - Number of active clone operations during the reporting period. l Size - Total amount of data in megabytes that has been cloned during the period specified. Note that this data is not collected for NetBackup clones and duplications. l Ratio of Data Backed Up - Percentage of backup jobs that were successfully cloned. Note no value is returned for NetBackup. Successful Clone Operations Drill down report from the Clone Summary template that returns details on successful cloning operations in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Operations data source. 266 l ID - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was cloned l Media Server - Name of the media server to which the backup was cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Policy Type - The type of session that gave rise to the clone job; possible values are "Copy" and "Replication" l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Clone ID - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Cloned Job Details Returns details on jobs that have been cloned in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier of the clone job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the job was cloned l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the cloned Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the clone ran l Client - Name of the client on which the Jobs were cloned l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the cloned backup Job l Backup Status - Status of the original backup job l Level - Level of the cloned Job l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files cloned l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Clone Status - Status of the cloned Job l Clone Start Time - Time that the clone operation started l Clone End Time - Time that the clone operation ended l Clone Storage ID - Identifier of the NetWorker Clone l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group of the cloned job l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the backup job l Session - Number of sessions that are simultaneously accessing the device of the cloned job Cloned Job Details 267 Reports by System Template l Proxy - Proxy backup host of the backup job Cloned Job Details For Clone Operation Returns cloned job details for clone operation in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier of the clone job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the job was cloned l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the cloned Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the clone ran l Client - Name of the client on which the Jobs were cloned l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Job - Name of the cloned Job l Backup Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Level - Level of the cloned Job l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files cloned l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Clone Status - Status of the cloned Job l Clone Start Time - Time that the clone operation started l Clone End Time - Time that the clone operation ended l Clone Storage ID - Identifier of the NetWorker Clone Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Returns the total protected backup capacity of a NetWorker or Avamar environment in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details by Client and Job, Last Backup Details by Client and Job Within Filtered Group, and NetWorker Last Backup Details by Client and Job Within Filtered Group data sources. l Non-DB Protected Capacity - Total protected capacity for RMAN and nonMSSQL jobs (in MB) l MSSQL Protected Capacity - Total protected capacity for Avamar and Networker MSSQL jobs (in MB) Estimated Protected Backup Capacity Details Returns details of protected backup capacity of a NetWorker or Avamar environment in a table report. Uses data from the Last Backup Details by Client and Job, Last 268 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Details by Client and Job Within Filtered Group, and NetWorker Last Backup Details by Client and Job Within Filtered Group data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of the server instance l Client - Name of the client backed up l Non-DB Protected Capacity - Total protected capacity for RMAN and nonMSSQL jobs (in MB) l MSSQL Protected Capacity - Total protected capacity for Avamar and Networker MSSQL jobs (in MB) Exposure Details Returns information about the time since the last successful backup for the file systems of a client in a table report. Uses data from the Application Exposure data source. Run this report against a backup client, and not against the backup server itself. Run the report against a group of client file systems or databases to calculate an exposure for an application, business unit, office, or other group of objects. l Policy Used - The Data Protection Policy used in the calculation l Current Backup Exposure - Amount of time for which the application has been exposed to data loss, measured as the difference between the restore point and the report's end time l Average Backup Exposure - Average amount of time for which the application is exposed to data loss, measured as the average difference between sequential backups of each component of the application l Estimated Backup Recovery Time - Estimate of the time that it would take to restore the application, measured as the total time taken to carry out the backups needed for a restore (calculated from historical data or as a percentage of backup time) plus a minute for each individual backup l Backup Recovery Time Objective - As specified in the Protection Policy l Backup Recovery Point Objective - As specified in the Protection Policy l Storage Recovery Time Objective - As specified in the Protection Policy l Off-Line Data Overhead - True if the offline overhead value was added to the calculation, otherwise False l Restore Time Percentage - Restore time percentage l No Est Restore Time Reason - List of reasons why the Estimated Restore Time could not be calculated, if any Exposure Time Exceeds RPO for ruleset Returns details when exposure time exceeds RPO in a table report. Report for Backup exposure time exceeds recovery point object rule. Uses data from the Application Exposure data source. l Alert - Identifier of the alert Exposure Details 269 Reports by System Template Failed Clone Operations Returns failed clone operations details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Operations data source. l ID - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was cloned l Media Server - Name of the media server to which the backup was cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Policy Type - The type of session that gave rise to the clone job; possible values are "Copy" and "Replication" l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Clone ID - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the cloned Job completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Failed Maintenance Job Details Returns the failed maintenance job details in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Details data source. 270 l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Backup Application - Application on which the maintenance job occurred l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Schedule - Schedule used by the maintenance job l Job - Name of the maintenance job l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped l Object - Data selection or object operated on by the maintenance job l Job Id - Unique identifier for the maintenance job l Owner - Owner of the maintenance job l Status - Indicates if the maintenance job was successful or not l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database l Queue Start - Time the maintenance job was scheduled to run l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Duration - Time the job took l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Failed Restore Jobs Returns failed restore jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details data source. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed (TSM only) l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Num Files - Number of files restored l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset -Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned Failed Restore Jobs 271 Reports by System Template l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Queued - Time the restore started queuing l Started - Time the restore started reading l Finished - Time the restore completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Failed Staging Operations Returns details on the staging operations that have failed in a table report. Uses data from the Stage Operations data source. l ID - Identifier of the backup Job l Backup Application - Backup application on which the staging operation occurred l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Process Id - Unique identifier used to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been staged l Input Volumes - Name of the volume from which data has been staged l Output Volumes - Name of the volume to which data has been staged l Status - Completion status of the staging process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data staged (in MB l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the amount of data in bytes l Num Items - Number of items that were staged l Errors - String that contains the errors that occurred l Error Code - Error code associated with the error string l Start Time - Time that the staging operation started l End Time - Time that the staging operation ended Filesystems Not Backed Up Returns a list of those file systems that have not had asuccessful backup during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Filesystem Configuration Configuration data sources. l 272 Host - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Status - Status of the file system Historical Successful Jobs Returns details on historical successful jobs in a table report. Report for Slower than average and smaller than average rule. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) Historical Successful Jobs 273 Reports by System Template 274 l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup; field hidden by default l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target; field hidden by default l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type; field hidden by default l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name; field hidden by default l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered; field hidden by default l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions that are simultaneously accessing the device Hosts Not Backed Up Returns the hosts not backed up in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details, Node Details, and Virtual Hosts data sources. l Client - Name of the client not backed up Last 10 Failed Backups Returns the last ten failed backups in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed Hosts Not Backed Up 275 Reports by System Template 276 l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup (TSM only) l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed (Symantec NetBackup only) l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Number of Secondary Copies - Number of successful secondary copies l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Legato Networker Bootstrap Report Returns the entries in the NetWorker bootstrap report in a table report. Uses data from the NetWorker Bootstrap data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Saveset ID - ID of the bootstrap Job l Level - Level of the bootstrap Job l Volume - ID of the volume containing the bootstrap l File - Volume file location of the bootstrap l Record - Volume record location of the bootstrap l Write Time - Time that the bootstrap record was written Maintenance Job Attempts Returns the maintenance job attempt details in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Attempts and Maintenance Job Details data sources. l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Job Id - Identifier for the maintenance job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Schedule - Schedule used by the maintenance job l Job - Name of the maintenance job l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Description - Status description l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database Legato Networker Bootstrap Report 277 Reports by System Template l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Num Files - Number of files l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped l Object - Data selection or object operated on by the maintenance job l Owner - Owner of the maintenance job l Queue Start - Time the maintenance job was scheduled to run l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Backup Application - Application on which the maintenance job occurred l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Maintenance Job Attempts for Specific Job Returns the maintenance job attempts for specific job details in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Attempts data sources. l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Job Id - Identifier for the maintenance job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Description - Status description l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Num Files - Number of files l Start Time - Time the Job started l End Time - Time the job completed Maintenance Job Details Returns maintenance job details in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Details data source. 278 l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Job Id - Identifier for the maintenance job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Schedule - Schedule used by the maintenance job l Job - Name of the maintenance job l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Description - l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped l Object - Data selection or object operated on by the maintenance job l Owner - Owner of the maintenance job l Queue Start - Time the maintenance job was scheduled to run l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Backup Application - Application on which the maintenance job occurred l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Maintenance Job Errors Returns details on individual errors that have occurred on a client in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Errors data source. l Id - Unique identifier of the Maintenance job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Severity - Severity of the failure l Error - Error code description associated with the maintenance job l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Time - Time the failure took place Maintenance Job Summary Summary of all the maintenance operations that have occurred in a table report. Uses data from the Num Maintenance Jobs data source. l Succeeded - Number of maintenance operations that were successful during the period specified l Failed - Number of maintenance operations that failed during the period specified l Completed - Number of maintenance operations that were completed during the period specified l Success Rate (%) Percentage of maintenance jobs that were successful Maintenance Job Errors 279 Reports by System Template Missed Restore Jobs Returns missed restore job details in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details in a data source. 280 l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Queued - Time the restore started queuing l Start Time - Time the restore started reading l End Time - Time the restore completed l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Num Files - Number of files restored l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template NetBackup Backup Job Disk Media Details Returns NetBackup backup job disk media details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Disk Media and NetBackup Disk Volume Status data sources. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Path - Path to the volume l Pool - Pool in which the volume belongs l Disk Type - Type of underlying disk l Capacity - Capacity of volume (in GB) l Status - Active status of the volume l Administrative State - Administrative state of the volume l Internal State - Internal state of the volume: up, down NetBackup Clone Job Disk Media Details Returns NetBackup clone job disk media details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Job Disk Media and NetBackup Disk Volume Status data sources. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume l Path - Path to the volume l Pool - Pool associated with the volume l Disk Type - Type of disk volume if a disk volume, or the type of underlying disk volume if another volume type l Capacity - Capacity of volume (in GB) l Status - Active status of the volume l Adminsitrative State - Administrative state of the volume l Internal State - Internal state of the volume: up, down NetBackup Failed Restarted Clone Operations Returns NetBackup failed restarted clone operations details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Operations data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow NetBackup Backup Job Disk Media Details 281 Reports by System Template l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Clone ID - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Start Time - Time the clone operation started writing l End Time - Time the cloned operation completed NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Backup Job Returns NetBackup last restarted job for specific backup job details in table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 282 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplication - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Duration - l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Ran In Window - l Started In Window - l Finished In Window - l Time In Window - l Time Out Of Windows - l Out Of Window Reason - l Trailing Space In Window - l Leading Space In Window - NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Backup Job 283 Reports by System Template l Valid Level - l Valid Retention - l Compliant - l Policy Used - l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Clone Operation Returns NetBackup last restarted job for specific clone operation details in a table report. Uses data from the Clone Operations and Restarted Jobs data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Job Type - Type of job: Backup, Restore, Clone, Maintenance, Vault l Job ID - Identifier for all job types l Restarted Job - Original job ID for the last failed restore job l Start Time - Start time of the last failed restarted job l End Time - End time of the last failed restarted job l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this clone l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that cloned the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was cloned l Clone Job Name - Name of the cloned Job l Client - Name of the client on which the clone took place l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the clone job l Status - Status of the cloned Job: Success, Failed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size in bytes l Size Scanned - Size of the files scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Job size in bytes l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job NetBackup Last Restarted Job For Specific Job Returns NetBackup last restarted job for specific job details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. 284 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Ran In Window - l Started In Window - l Finished In Window - l Time In Window - l Time Out Of Window - l Out Of Window Reason - l Trailing Space In Window - l Leading Space In Window - l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Retention - l Expires - Date that a Job will expire NetBackup Last Restarted Job For Specific Job 285 Reports by System Template l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Valid Level - l Valid Retention - l Compliant - l Policy Used - l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Maintenance Job Returns the NetBackup last restarted job for specific maintenance job details in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Details and Restarted Jobs data sources. 286 l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped l Job Id - Identifier for the maintenance job l Restarted Job - Original job ID for the last failed restore job l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Job - Name of the maintenance job l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database l Owner - Owner of the maintenance job l Schedule - Schedule used by the maintenance job l Restore Job Type - Type of job: Backup, Restore, Clone, Maintenance, Vault EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Object - Data selection or object operated on by the maintenance job l Queue Start - Time the maintenance job was scheduled to run l Started - Time the job started l Finished - Time the job completed l Backup Application - Application on which the maintenance job occurred l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Restore Job Returns NetBackup last restarted job for specific restore job details in a table report. Uses data from the Restarted Jobs and Restore Details data sources. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Job Type - Type of job: Backup, Restore, Clone, Maintenance, Vault l Job ID - Identifier for all job types l Restarted Job - Original job ID for the last failed restore job l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Num Files - Number of files restored l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Queue Start - Time the restore started queuing l Started - Time the restore started reading l Finished - Time the restore completed NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Restore Job 287 Reports by System Template l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job NetBackup Last Restarted Job for Specific Vault Job Returns NetBackup last restarted job for specific vault job details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Details and Restarted Jobs data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Job Type - Type of job: Backup, Restore, Clone, Maintenance, Vault l Job ID - Identifier for all job types l Restarted Job - Original job ID for the last failed restore job l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l Group - Name of the Policy associated with the vault l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client l Profile - Name of the vault profile l Owner - Owner of the vault job l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the Job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Robot - Name of the robot l Vault - Name of the vault l Storage Unit - Name of the storage unit l Expiry Date - Date that the Job will expire l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log NetBackup Restore Job Disk Media Details Returns NetBackup restore job disk media details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Disk Volume Status and Restore Job Disk Media data sources. l 288 Server - Name of the server that started the restore job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume on which the restore took place l Path - Path to the volume l Pool - Pool in which the volume belongs l Disk Type - Type of underlying disk l Capacity - Capacity of volume (in GB) l Status - Active status of the volume l Adminsitrative State - Administrative state of the volume l Internal State - Internal state of the volume: up, down NetBackup Vault Attempts Returns NetBackup vault attempt details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Attempts and NetBackup Vault Details data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l Job Id - Identifier for the vault job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l Group - Name of the Policy associated with the vault l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client l Profile - Name of the vault profile l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the Job l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Owner - Owner of the vault job l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Robot - Name of the robot l Vault - Name of the vault l Session ID - Identifier of the session l Num Ejected - Number ejected NetBackup Vault Attempts 289 Reports by System Template l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that the Job will expire l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log NetBackup Vault Attempts for Specific Job Returns NetBackup vault attempts for specific job details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Attempts data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l Job Id - Identifier for the vault job l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the Job l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data that was backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Start Time - Time the backup started to write to tape l End Time - Time the backup finished writing to tape NetBackup Vault Ejects Returns NetBackup vault eject details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Ejects data source. 290 l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l Type - Type of vault l Robot - Name of the robot l Vault - Name of the vault l Session - Vault job session l Volume Group - Name of the volume group EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Volume - Name of the volume NetBackup Vault Job Disk Media Details Returns NetBackup vault job disk media details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Job Disk Media data source. l Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Group - Name of the policy associated with the vault l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client l Profile - Name of the vault profile l Queue Start - Time the vault job entered the queue l Start Time - Time the vault job started l End Time - Time the vault job finished l Volume Id - Unique identifier of the volume l App Job Id - NetBackup Job Identifier l Path - Path to the Volume l Pool - Pool the volume belongs to l Disk Type - Type of disk l Capacity - Capacity of volume (in GB) l Status - Status of the volume l Adminsitrative State - Administrative state of the volume: up, down l Internal State - Internal state of the volume: up, down NetBackup Vault Jobs Returns NetBackup vault job details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l Group - Name of the Policy associated with the vault l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client l Profile - Name of the vault profile l Owner - Owner of the vault job l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the Job NetBackup Vault Job Disk Media Details 291 Reports by System Template l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Robot - Name of the robot l Vault - Name of the vault l Storage Unit - Name of the storage unit l Session ID - Identifier of the session l Num Ejected - Number ejected l Expiry Date - Date that the Job will expire l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log NetBackup Vault Preview Returns NetBackup vault preview details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Preview data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the NetBackup Media Server l Vault - Name of the vault l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Policy - Name of the policy l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client l Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this vault Job l Volume - Name of the volume l Size - Amount of data (in MB) l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed Networker Data Domain Details for Job Returns NetWorker Data Domain details for job in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Access Filesystem Details, Backup Device Status, Backup Device Config, Backup Job Details with Volume, Data Domain Last Synch Time for Server, Filesystem Configuration, and Pools On Data Domain data sources. 292 l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Job - Name of the Job backed up l End Time - Time the job completed EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Device Name - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Device Path - Device driver path for the device l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain l Data Domain Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Destination - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Synchronised - Indicates whether data is synchronized l Replicated - Indicates whether data is replicated Networker Data Domain Details for Server Returns NetWorker Data Domain details for server in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Access Filesystem Details, Backup Device Config, Backup Device Status, Backup Job Device Mapping, Backup Job Details, Clone Job Media, Clone Operations, Data Domain Last Synch Time for Server, Filesystem Configuration, Pools On Data Domain data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Device Name - Name of the device on which the file system is located. For example, /dev/vol0 l Client - Name of the client backed up l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Dedupe Ratio - Difference between the Deduplication Ratio and the Total Compression Factor (as a percentage) l End Time - Time the job completed l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Path - Device driver path for the device l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain l Export - Export name l Destination - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Data Domain Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Synchronised - Indicates whether data is synchronized l Replicated - Indicates whether data is replicated l Clones Replicated - Indicates if clone jobs were successfully replicated or not Networker Data Domain Details for Server 293 Reports by System Template Networker Job Size by Client for Data Domain Returns NetWorker job size by client for Data Domain details in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Device Status, Backup Job Details with Volume, and Pools On Data Domain data sources. l Device Access - Device access information l Client - Name of the client backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) NetWorker Workflow Job Status Returns workflow job status details in a table. Drilling down on the report returns details for all, successful and failed backup and clone operations associated with the workflow job. Uses data from the Workflow Jobs data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id -Job Id associated with the workflow l Status -The status of the workflow l Start Time -Start time data was gathered l End Time -Time the data is valid until RecoverPoint Protected Capacity Returns the Protected Data per Recoverpoint server in a table. Uses data from RecoverPoint Protected Capacity data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) Restore Job Attempts Returns the restore job attempt details in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details and Restore Attempts data sources. 294 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Owner - Owner of the restore job EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Num Files - Number of files restored l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Queued - Time the restore started queuing l Started - Time the restore started reading l Finished - Time the restore completed l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Restore Job Attempts for Specific Job Returns restore job attempts for specific job details in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Attempts data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this restore l Job Id - Identifier for the restore job l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Attempt - Attempt number. For example, first, second, and others l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l PID - PID of the underlying system process l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Description - Status description l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) Restore Job Attempts for Specific Job 295 Reports by System Template l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Num Files - Number of files restored l Started - Time the restore started reading l Started - Time the restore completed Restore Job Error Details Drill down report from the Restore Details and Failed Restores templates that returns information on restores that have not completed due to error in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details and Restore Job Errors data sources. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Client - Name of the client on which the restore took place l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Severity - Severity of the restore, if applicable l Error - Error string associated with the restore l Err Code - Error code of the restore l Time - Time the error occurred l Queue Start - Time the restore started queuing Restore Job Error Details For Specific Job Returns specific restore jobs that have not completed due to error in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Job Errors data source. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Not applicable l Client - Name of the client on which the restore took place l Severity - Severity of the restore, if applicable l Error - Error string associated with the restore l Err Code - Error code of the restore l Time - Time the error occurred Restore Job Media Details Returns a list of volumes that a backup was written to in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Job Media data source. 296 l Volume Id - Unique identifier of the volume to which the restore Job was written l State - State of the restore: success, failed l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Online - Indicates if the volume is online EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Jukebox - Jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in jukebox occupied by volume l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire Restore Job Summary Summary of the restore job details in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Statistics data source. l Completed - Total number of jobs that have completed over the reporting period l Size - Total size of restores that completed (in GB) l Succeeded - Number of jobs that were successful over the reporting period l Failed - Number of jobs that failed over the reporting period l Missed - Number of jobs that were missed over the reporting period l Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period Restore Top 10 Largest Clients Returns the restore top ten largest clients in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Statistics data source. l Restores - Number of restores that completed l Size - Total size of restores that completed (in GB) l Files - Total number of files that were restored (millions) l Share of Total - Restore Top 10 Least Successful Clients Returns the restore top ten least successful clients in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Statistics data source. l Failures - Total number of failures l Failure Rate - Percentage of failures Snap Job Details Returns all snap job details in a table. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place Restore Job Summary 297 Reports by System Template 298 l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - session associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Level - Level of the backup. This is hardcoded to full l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when In Window is false. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Started - Time the backup went into the backup applications started l Finished - Time the backup went into the backup applications ended l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Size Transferred - Size transferred to server (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Save Set size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Snap Job Summary Returns a summary of snap jobs in a table. Uses data from the Num Jobs in Event State and Backup Statistics data sources. l Completed - Completed snap jobs l Succeeded - Successful snap jobs l Failed - Failed snap jobs Snap Job Summary 299 Reports by System Template l Success Rate - Success rate of snap backups over the reporting period l Active - Active snap jobs Staging Media Details Returns staging media details in a table report. Uses data from the Staging Media data source. l Server - Name of the server l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l State - State of the media l Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Online - Indicates if the media is online or not l Jukebox - Jukebox in which the volume resides l Slot - Jukebox slot occupied by the volume l Expiry Date - Date of expiry of the volume Staging Operations Returns staging operations details in a table report. Uses data from the NetWorker Storage Node Config and Stage Operations data sources. l Id - Identifier of the backup Job l Backup Application - Backup application on which the staging operation occurred l Server - Name of the backup server l Process Id - Unique identifier used to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been staged l Input Volumes - Name of the volume from which data has been staged l Output Volumes - Name of the volume to which data has been staged l Status - Completion status of the staging process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data staged (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the amount of data in bytes l Num Items - Number of items that were staged l Errors - String that contains the errors that occurred l Error Code - Error code associated with the error string l Start Time - Time that the staging operation started l End Time - Time that the staging operation ended Staging Summary Summary of all the staging operations that have occurred on a NetWorker server in a table report. Uses data from the NetWorker Storage Node Config, Num Stages, and Total Staging Size data sources. l 300 Completed - Number of staging operations that were completed during the period specified EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Num Stages - Number of staging operations that have occurred during the period specified l Total Staging Size - Total amount of data that has been staged during the period specified (in GB) Successful Maintenance Job Details Returns details on all maintenance Jobs that were successful on the PureDisk server during the specified period in a table report. Uses data from the Maintenance Job Details data source. l Id - Unique identifier of the maintenance job l Backup Application - Application on which the maintenance job occurred l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Client - Name of the client on which the maintenance job took place l Schedule - Schedule used by the maintenance job l Job - Name of the maintenance job l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped l Object - Data selection or object operated on by the maintenance job l Job Id - Identifier for the maintenance job l Owner - Owner of the maintenance job l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code associated with the maintenance job l Size - Size of data associated with the maintenance job, if any (in MB). For example, data reclaimed from database l Queue Start - Time the maintenance job was scheduled to run l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Duration - Duration the job took l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Successful Restore Jobs Returns successful restore job details in a table report. Uses data from the Restore Details data source. l Id - Unique identifier for the restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned job on the backup server on which the job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group Successful Maintenance Job Details 301 Reports by System Template l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Queued - Time the restore started queuing l Start Time - Time the restore started reading l End Time - Time the restore completed l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Status - Status of the restore: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally backed up l Size - Amount of data restored (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Num Files - Number of files restored l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restore l Backup Label - Name of the backup that is being restored l Recorded Date Time - Timestamp of the restore l Number Of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job Successful Staging Operations Returns successful staging operations details in a table report. Uses data from the Stage Operations data source. 302 l Id - Identifier of the backup Job l Backup Application - Backup application on which the staging operation occurred l Server - Name of the backup server l Process Id - Unique identifier used to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been staged l Input Volumes - Name of the volume from which data has been staged l Output Volumes - Name of the volume to which data has been staged l Status - Completion status of the staging process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data staged (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the amount of data in bytes l Num Items - Number of items that were staged l Errors - String that contains the errors that occurred l Error Code - Error code associated with the error string l Start Time - Time that the staging operation started l End Time - Time that the staging operation ended Top 10 Backup Clients By Avg Daily Change Returns the top ten backup client by average daily change in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Statistics, Last Backup Details, and Report Times data sources. l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application l Daily Change - Amount of daily change Top 10 Backup Clients with Best De-Dupe Rate Returns the top ten backup clients with best deduplication rate in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Last Backup Details data sources. l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Avg Daily Change - Amount of daily change l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application l Change Rate - Change rate l De-Dupe Rate - Deduplication rate Top 10 Backup Clients with Worst De-Dupe Rate Returns the top ten backup clients with worst deduplication rate in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Last Backup Details data sources. l Client - Name of the client that was backed up l Daily Change - Amount of daily change l Protected - Amount of data on the backup client that is being protected. For applications such as NetWorker and NetBackup, this is determined by looking at the last full backup of the client. For applications like Avamar, the statistics are derived directly from the application Top 10 Backup Clients By Avg Daily Change 303 Reports by System Template TSM Backup Set Details Returns TSM backup set details in a table report. A backup set is a collection of active files that reside on a TSM server. Uses data from the TSM Backup Set data source. l Name - Name of the backup set l Client - Name of the client object l Type - Type of data: file, image, application l Create Time - Date and time the backup set was created l Retention - Retention days l Device Class - Name of the device class l Description - User-defined description of the device class l Has Table of Contents - Indicates if a table of contents is available. A value of 1 indicates whether the table of contents is available l Volumes - Volume names containing the data displayed in a comma-separated list l Filespaces - Filespace names displayed in a comma-separated list l Size - Size of the backup set (in MB) l Expiry - Expiration date TSM Command Event Details Returns TSM command event details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Command Events data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server that generated the command l Backup Server - Name of the backup server on which the command ran l Media Server - Media server on which the command ran l Group - Name of the group associated with the command event l Schedule - Name of the schedule associated with the command event l Client - Name of the client on which the command event ran l Job - Name of the command that ran, or the names of the files backed up or restored (if available l Status - Indicates if the command ran successfully or not l Error Code - Error code of the command l Queue Start - Time the command started queueing l Start Time - Time the command started l End Time - Time the command completed TSM Database Backup Errors Returns TSM database backup error details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Database Backup Errors data source. 304 l Id - Unique identifier of the database (catalog) process matching with the TSM Database Backup data source l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Error - Error message string TSM Database Backups Returns TSM database backup details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Database Backup data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Level - Priority of the process l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been backed up l Status - Completion status of the database (catalog) backup process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Items - Number of items backed up l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Delete Volumes Returns delete volume process details on the TSM server in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Delete Volume data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - UniqUnique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Volume - Name of the volume to delete l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool in which the volume is located l Status - Completion status of the delete volume process: Success, Failed l Num Items - Number of items that were deleted l Size - Amount of data deleted (in MB) l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Expiration Errors Returns errors related to a specific expiration job in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Expiration Errors data source. l ID - Unique identifier of the database (catalog) process matching with the TSM Expiration data source TSM Database Backups 305 Reports by System Template l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error l Error - Error message string TSM Expirations Returns the expiration processes running on the TSM server in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Expiration data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Status - Completion status of the expiration process: Success, Failed l Node Details - Details of the TSM server objects on which expiration is occurring. This includes the object name, filespace name, filespace ID, domain name, management class and type of files being expired. For example, BACKUP and ARCHIVE l Objects Examined - Objects that were scrutinized during the expiration process l Backup Objects Deleted - Backup objects that were deleted during the expiration process l Archive Objects Deleted - Archive objects that were deleted during the expiration process l DB Volumes Deleted - Database volumes that were deleted during the expiration process l Recovery Plans Deleted - Recovery plans that were deleted during the expiration process l Num Errors - Number of errors during the expiration process l Num Items - Number of items deleted l Size - Amount of data deleted (in MB) l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Failed Migration Jobs Returns details of all failed TSM migration jobs in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Migration data source. 306 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been migrated l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been migrated EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the migration process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data migrated (in MB) l Num Items - Total number of items migrated from the storage pool l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Failed Reclamation Jobs Returns details on failed TSM reclamation jobs that have occurred in the last day in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Reclamation data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been reclaimed l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been reclaimed l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the reclamation process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data reclaimed (in MB) l Num Items - Number of items reclaimed l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Migrated Item Count by Storage Pool Returns the total number of items migrated by storage pool over the period specified in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Items Migrated By Storage Pool data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been migrated l Items - Total number of items migrated from the storage pool l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been migrated TSM Migrated Size by Storage Pool Returns the total amount of data migrated by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Size Migrated By Storage Pool data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server TSM Failed Reclamation Jobs 307 Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool l Size - Total amount of data migrated from the storage pool (in MB) TSM Migration Errors For Specific Job Returns information on the errors related to a specific migration job in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Migration Errors data source. l Id - Unique identifier of the migration process matching with the Migration data source l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error l Error - Error message string TSM Migration Jobs Returns details of all TSM migration jobs in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Backup Set and TSM Migration data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been migrated l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been migrated l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the migration process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data migrated (in MB) l Num Items - Total number of items migrated from the storage pool l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Migration Summary Summary of all the TSM Migration jobs that have occurred on a server in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Backup Set, TSM Num Migration Jobs By Storage Pool, TSM Total Items Migrated By Storage Pool, and TSM Total Size Migrated By Storage Pool data sources. 308 l Completed - Number of migration jobs that have completed l Succeeded - Number of migration jobs that have succeeded l Failed - Number of migration jobs that have failed l Size - Total size of the migration jobs l Items - Total number of items migrated from the storage pool EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template TSM Move Errors Returns TSM move error details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Move Errors data source. l ID - Unique identifier of the data move process matching with the TSM Move data source l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error l Error - Error message string TSM Moves Returns TSM move details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Move data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Status - Completion status of the data move process: Success, Failed l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been moved l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been moved l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been moved l Num Items - Total number of items moved from the storage pool l Size - Amount of data moved (in MB) l Un-Readable Files - Files that were not moved because they cannot be read l Un-Readable Bytes - Bytes that were not moved because they cannot be read l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed TSM Reclaimed Item Count by Storage Pool Returns the total number of items reclaimed by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Items Reclaimed By Storage Pool data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been reclaimed l Items - Total number of items reclaimed from the storage pool TSM Move Errors 309 Reports by System Template TSM Reclaimed Size by Storage Pool Returns the total amount of data reclaimed by storage pool in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Total Size Reclaimed By Storage Pool data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool l Size - Total amount of data reclaimed from the storage pool (in MB) l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been moved l Start Time - Time the process started TSM Reclamation Errors For Specific Job Returns errors for a specific reclamation job in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Reclamation Errors data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Id - Unique identifier of the migration process matching with the Reclamation data source l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error l Error - Error message string TSM Reclamation Jobs Returns all TSM reclamation jobs that have occurred in the last day in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Reclamation data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been reclaimed l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been reclaimed l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the reclamation process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data reclaimed (in MB) l Num Items - Number of items reclaimed l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) TSM Reclamation Summary Summary of all the TSM Reclamation jobs that have occurred on a server in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Num Reclamation Jobs By Storage Pool, TSM Total 310 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Items Reclaimed By Storage Pool, TSM Total Size Reclaimed By Storage Pool data sources. l Completed - Number of reclamation jobs that have completed l Succeeded - Number of reclamation jobs that have succeeded l Failed - Number of reclamation jobs that have failed l Size - Total amount of data reclaimed from the storage pool (in MB) l Items - Total number of items reclaimed TSM Storage Pool Copies Returns TSM storage pool copy details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Storage Pool Copy data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which the storage pool has been copied l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which the storage pool has been copied l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been copied l Copy Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool to which data has been copied l Status - Completion status of the storage pool copy process: Success, Failed l Unreadable Bytes - Bytes that were not copied because they cannot be read l Unreadable Files - Files that were not copied because they cannot be read l Num Items - Number of items reclaimed from the storage pool l Size - Amount of data reclaimed (in MB) l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) TSM Storage Pool Copy Errors Returns the errors associated with specific storage pool copy jobs in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Storage Pool Copy Errors data source. l Id - Unique identifier of the storage pool copy process matching with the TSM Storage Pool Copy data source l Message ID - Message ID string corresponding to the error l Error - Error message string TSM Storage Pool Copies 311 Reports by System Template TSM Successful Migration Jobs Returns details of all successful TSM migration jobs in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Migration data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been migrated l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been migrated l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the migration process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data migrated (in MB) l Num Items - Total number of items migrated from the storage pool l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) TSM Successful Reclamation Jobs Returns details on successful TSM reclamation jobs that have occurred in the last day in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Reclamation data source. 312 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process Id - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been reclaimed l Input Volume - Name of the volume from which data has been reclaimed l Output Volume - Name of the volume to which data has been transferred l Status - Completion status of the reclamation process: Success, Failed l Size - Amount of data reclaimed (in MB) l Num Items - Number of items reclaimed l Error Flag - Indicates if the process returned any errors. Even if the process was successful, it could have errors associated with it l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Idle Wait Times Returns TSM top ten backups with worst idle wait times in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and TSM Reclamation data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Queue Start - Time the process started queuing l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Media Wait Times Returns TSM top ten backups with worst media wait times in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and TSM Reclamation data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Queue Start - Time the process started queuing l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media TSM Top 10 Backups with Worst Idle Wait Times 313 Reports by System Template TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Idle Wait Times Returns TSM top ten clients with worst idle wait times in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and TSM Reclamation data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client backed up l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client TSM Top 10 Clients with Worst Media Wait Times Returns TSM top ten clients with worst media wait times in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and TSM Reclamation data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client backed up l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media Uncloned Backups Returns details on backup jobs that have not been cloned in a table report. Uses data from the Uncloned Backup Jobs data source. 314 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Storage Unit - Storage unit the policy is configured to use l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Transferred field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Archive Flag - Flag indicating whether Job was an archive or a backup l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies Uncloned Backups 315 Reports by System Template l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Vault Job Media Details Returns a list of volumes that a vault job was written to in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Vault Job Media data source. l Volume Id - Unique identifier of the volume l State - State of the media l Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Online - Indicates if the media is online or not l Jukebox - Jukebox in which the volume resides l Slot - Jukebox slot occupied by the volume l Expiry Date - Date of expiry of the volume Database system templates DPA gathers configuration and status information from a number of different database components, including the database server, databases, schemas, tables, indexes, and datafiles. A wide range of reports provide visibility into the configuration and status of the database and configuration changes that have occurred over time. DPA provides reports that allow you to: l Monitor the overall storage utilization of the database. l Identify the largest tables and indexes within the database. The DPA database can be monitored without any additional licensing required. The architecture of database products and the terminology used by different database vendors is not consistent. To provide a consistent reporting interface for a variety of database products, DPA uses standardized terminology to describe the database elements that are monitored. To view reports for backup databases, right-click the database or database group objects in the configuration tree. All Database Changes Returns details about all changes made to the selected database objects in a table report. Uses data from the Database Config, Database Params, Database Server 316 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Config, Database Server Params, Database Server Status, Database Status, Datafile Config, Datafile Status, Index Config, Log File Configuration, Log File Status, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Tablespace Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Type - Type of database component that was changed. For example, server, or tablespace l Object - Name of the database object that was changed l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Connection Status Returns connection status details in a table report. Uses data from the Connection Status data source. l Server - Name of the server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Connection ID - Connection database identifier l Database Name - Name of the database l Connect Time - Time connection was established l Status - Status of the connection: Active, Inactive, Killed l Command - Current or most recent command processed by the connection l Client Host - Originating host name for the connection l Client User - Originating user name (operating system login name) for the connection l Client PID - Originating client process ID (operating system process ID) for the connection l Client Application - Originating application for the connection l Used CPU - Total used CPU runtime for this connection (in seconds) l Used Memory - Total used memory for this connection (in MB) l Number Logical Reads - Number of logical reads by this connection l Number Reads - Number of physical reads made by this connection Control File Details Returns control file details in a table report. Uses data from the Control File Configuration data source. l Server - Server identifier, usually of the type hostname-port l Sub Name - Name of the Oracle instance l Database Name - Name of the database l Control File Name - Control file physical pathname l Max Size - Maximum size of control file (in MB) Connection Status 317 Reports by System Template Database Change Summary Summary of all changes made to the selected database objects in a column chart. Uses data from the Database Config, Database Params, Database Server Config, Database Server Params, Database Server Status, Datafile Config, Datafile Status, Index Config, Log File Configuration, Log File Status, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Tablespace Status data sources. l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Changes Count - Amount of changes made l Type - Type of database component that was changed. For example, server or tablespace Database Config Changes for ruleset Returns the database configuration changes in a table report. Report for Database configuration changed rule. Uses data from the Database Server Status, Table Config, Database Params, Datafile Config, Index Config, Tablespace Status, Datafile Status, Database Server Params, Database Status, Database Server Config, Tablespace Config, Log File Status, Database Config, Log File Configuration data sources. l Server - Name of the server l Sub Name - Name of the Oracle instance l Alert - Identifier of the alert Database Details Returns database details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Config, Database Status, Datafile Config, Index Config, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Partition Config data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Creation Date - Database creation date timestamp l Status - Status of the database: Offline, Online, Restoring, Recovering, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Emergency l Table Count - Total number of tables in the database l Index Count - Total number of index tables in the database l Tablespace Count - Total number of tablespaces in the database l Datafile Count - Total number of datafiles in the database l Num Partitions - Total number of partitions in the database Database Details For Server Returns database details for server in a table report. Uses data from the Database Config, Database Status, Datafile Config, Index Config, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Partition Config data sources. l 318 Server - Name of the server that hosts the database EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Creation Date - Database creation date timestamp l Status - Status of the database: Offline, Online, Restoring, Recovering, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Emergency l Table Count - Total number of tables in the database l Index Count - Total number of index tables in the database l Tablespace Count - Total number of tablespaces in the database l Datafile Count - Total number of datafiles in the database l Num Partitions - Total number of partitions in the database Database Last 10 Changes Returns database last ten changes in a table report. Uses data from the Database Server Status, Table Config, Database Params, Datafile Config, Index Config, Tablespace Status, Datafile Status, Database Server Params, Database Status, Database Server Config, Tablespace Config, Log File Status, Database Config, Log File Configuration data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Type - Type of database component that was changed. For example, server or tablespace l Object - Name of the database object that was changed l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp of the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Database Parameter Change Details Returns database parameter change details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Params data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Value - Parameter value l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Database Parameters Returns database parameter details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Params data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name Database Last 10 Changes 319 Reports by System Template l Database Name - Name of the database l Parameter Name - Name of the parameter l Value - Parameter value Database Schema Details For Server Returns database schema details for server in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config, Schema Config, and Table Config data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Count - Total number of tables in the tablespace l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table Database Server Details Returns database server details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Config, Database Server Config, Database Server Status, and Schema Config data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Vendor - Name of the database vendor. For example, Oracle l Product - Name of the database product. For example, PostgreSQL l Version - Version of the database product l Max Connections - Maximum number of simultaneous connections allowed l Status - Status of the server: Started, Mounted, Open, Open Migrate l Status Time - Time of the last status change l Database Count - Total number of databases of that product and version l Schema Count - Total number of schemas belonging to database of that product and version Database Server Parameter Change Details Returns database server parameter change details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Server Params data source. 320 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Name - Name of the parameter l Value - Value of the parameter l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp of the change EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Database Server Parameters Returns database server parameters in a table report. Uses data from the Database Server Params data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Name - Name of the parameter l Value - Value of the parameter Datafile Configuration Change Details Returns datafile configuration change details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Physical Name - Physical location (file system path) of the datafile l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Size Increment - Size by which the data store will grow (in MB) l Percent Increment - Percentage by which the data store will grow l Increment Type - Indicates if the data store will grow by incremental size or percentage l Auto Increment - Indicates if the logfile is set to grow automatically l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp of the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Datafile Details Returns datafile details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Physical Name - Physical location (file system path) of the datafile l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Size Increment - Size by which the data store will grow (in MB) l Percent Increment - Percentage by which the data store will grow Database Server Parameters 321 Reports by System Template l Increment Type - Indicates if the data store will grow by incremental size or percentage l Auto Increment - Indicates if the logfile is set to grow automatically l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l State - Current state of datafile: Offline, Online, Recovery, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Defunct, System Datafile Details for Database Returns datafile details for database in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Physical Name - Physical location (file system path) of the datafile l Size Increment - Size by which the data store will grow (in MB) l Percent Increment - Percentage by which the data store will grow l Increment Type - Indicates if the data store will grow by incremental size or percentage l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Auto Increment - Indicates if the logfile is set to grow automatically l State - Current state of datafile: Offline, Online, Recovery, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Defunct, System Datafile Details for Tablespace Returns datafile details for tablespace in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. 322 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Physical Name - Physical location (file system path) of the datafile l Size Increment - Size by which the data store will grow (in MB) l Percent Increment - Percentage by which the data store will grow l Increment Type - Indicates if the data store will grow by incremental size or percentage EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Auto Increment - Indicates if the logfile is set to grow automatically l State - Current state of datafile: Offline, Online, Recovery, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Defunct, System Datafile Utilization Returns the logical and actual utilization of datafile storage space in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l Current Utilization - Current usage of the datafile (as a percentage) (SQL Server and Oracle only) l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Logical Utilization - Logical usage of the datafile as a percentage of the maximum permitted datafile size (Oracle only) Datafile Utilization Trend Chart Returns the logical and actual utilization trend of datafile storage space in a line chart. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Current Utilization - Current usage of the datafile (as a percentage) (SQL Server and Oracle only) l Logical Utilization - Logical usage of the datafile as a percentage of the maximum permitted datafile size (Oracle only) Datafile Utilization for Tablespace Returns the logical and actual utilization trend of datafile storage space in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database Datafile Utilization 323 Reports by System Template l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Datafile Name - Name of the datafile l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l Current Utilization - Current usage of the datafile (as a percentage) (SQL Server and Oracle only) l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Logical Utilization - Logical usage of the datafile as a percentage of the maximum permitted datafile size (Oracle only) Index Configuration Change Details Returns index configuration change details in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Noted - Timestamp of the change l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated Index Details For Database Returns index details for database in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config and Index Status data sources. 324 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Index Details For Schema Returns index details for schema in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config and Index Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) Index Details For Tablespace Returns index details for tablespace in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config and Index Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) Index Details for Table Returns index details for table in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config and Index Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Index Size - Total size of the table index l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace Index Details For Schema 325 Reports by System Template Logfile Configuration Change Details Returns logfile configuration change details in a table report. Uses data from the Log File Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Logfile Name - Name of the log file l Group Number - Group number associated with the log file (Oracle only) l Physical Name - Path and filename of the log file l Creation Time - Database creation time l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Logfile Details Returns log file details in a table report. Uses data from the Log File Configuration and Log File Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Logfile Name - Name of the log file l Group Number - Group number associated with the log file (Oracle only) l Physical Name - Path and filename of the log file l Creation Time - Database creation time l Size - Maximum size of log file (in MB) l Size Used - Amount of space used in the log file (in MB) l State - Status of the logfile: Offline, Online, Recovering, Recovery Pending, Suspect, Defunct, System, Active, Inactive, Unused, Current, Clearing, Clearing Current, Invalidated Partition Details for Database Returns partition details for database in a table report. Uses data from the Partition Config data source. 326 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Name - Name of the partition l Table Name - Name of the database table EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Index Name - Name of the table index l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace Partition Details for Index Returns partition details for index in a table report. Uses data from the Partition Config data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Name - Name of the partition l Table Name - Name of the database table l Index Name - Name of the table index l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace Partition Details for Table Returns partition details for table in a table report. Uses data from the Partition Config data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Name - Name of the partition l Table Name - Name of the database table l Index Name - Name of the table Index l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace Table Configuration Change Details Returns table configuration change details in a table report. Uses data from the Table Config data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Partition Details for Index 327 Reports by System Template Table Details for Database Returns table details for database in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config, Index Status, Table Config, and Table Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of database table l Table Size - Total size of data in the table (in MB) l Number Rows - Total rows in the table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Index Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table l Total Size - Total size of the table and index (in MB) Table Details for Schema Returns table details for schema in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config, Index Status, Table Config, and Table Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of the database table l Table Size - Total size of data in the table (in MB) l Number Rows - Total rows in the table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Index Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table l Total Size - Total size of the table and index (in MB) Table Details for Tablespace Returns table details for tablespace in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config, Index Status, Table Config, and Table Status data sources. 328 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Table Name - Name of the database table l Is Partitioned - Indicates if this table is partitioned l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Number Rows - Total rows in the table l Table Size - Total size of data in the table (in MB) l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table l Index Size - Total size of data held in index (in MB) l Total Size - Total size of the table and index (in MB) Tablespace Configuration Change Details Returns tablespace configuration change details in table report. Uses data from the Tablespace Config and Tablespace Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Type - Type of tablespace: Undo, Temporary, Permanent l State - Current state of the tablespace: Offline, Online, Read Only l Change - Type of change: Added, Deleted, Modified l Difference - Description of what changed if Modified was indicated l Noted - Timestamp of the change Tablespace Details Returns tablespace details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config, Datafile Status, Index Config, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Tablespace Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l TableSpace Name - Name of the tablespace l Type - Type of tablespace: Undo, Temporary, Permanent l State - Current state of the tablespace: Offline, Online, Read Only l Is Read Only - Indicates whether the tablespace is read only l Table Count - Total number of tables in the tablespace l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table l Datafile Count - Total number of datafiles in the tablespace l Datafile Size - Total size of datafiles in the tablespace (in MB) l Datafile Size Used - Total size used in datafiles in the tablespace (in MB) Tablespace Configuration Change Details 329 Reports by System Template Tablespace Details for Database Returns tablespace for database details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config, Datafile Status, Index Config, Table Config, Tablespace Config, and Tablespace Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Type - Type of tablespace: Undo, Temporary, Permanent l State - Current state of the tablespace: Offline, Online, Read Only l Is Read Only - Indicates whether the tablespace is read only l Table Count - Total number of tables in the tablespace l Index Count - Number of indexes for the table l Datafile Count - Total number of datafiles in the tablespace l Datafile Size - Total size of datafiles in the tablespace (in MB) l Datafile Size Used - Total size used in datafiles in the tablespace (in MB) Tablespace Utilization Returns tablespace utilization details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Config and Datafile Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Tablespace Name - Name of the tablespace l Size - Current size of the datafile (in MB) l Size Used - Amount of space used in the datafile (in MB) l Current Utilization - Current usage of the datafile (as a percentage) (SQL Server and Oracle only) l Max Size - Maximum size of data store (in MB) l Logical Utilization - Logical usage of the datafile as a percentage of the maximum permitted datafile size (Oracle only) Top 10 Growing Tables by Rows Returns the top ten growing tables by rows in a table report. Uses data from the Table Status data source. 330 l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of the database table EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Number Rows After - Number of rows in the table at the start of the time period l Number Rows Before - Number of rows in the table at the end of the time period l Num Rows Grown By - Percentage increase in number of rows Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Row Count Returns the top ten largest database tables by row count in a table report. Uses data from the Table Status data source. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of the database table l Number Rows - Total number of rows in table Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Size Returns the top ten database tables by size in a table report. Uses data from the Index Config, Index Status, Table Config, and Table Status data sources. l Server - Name of the server that hosts the database l Sub Name - Instance name l Database Name - Name of the database l Schema Name - Name of the schema l Table Name - Name of the database table l Number Rows - Total number of rows in table l Table Size - Total size of the table l Index Size - Total size of the table index (in MB) l Total Size - Total size of the table and index (in MB) DPA system templates The following are descriptions of system templates in DPA: Agent Errors Returns information about errors that have occurred on the agent in a table report. Uses data from the Request History data source. l Module - Name of the module that generated the error l Error Message - String describing the error l Agent - Hostname or IP Address of the DPA Data Collection Agent that is gathering the data l Function - Name of the function that generated the error l Target - Name of the target machine monitored l Count - Number of times the error occurred Top 10 Largest Database Tables By Row Count 331 Reports by System Template l First Occurrence - First time the error occurred l Last Occurrence - Last time the error occurred Analysis Engine History Returns details about any jobs run by the analysis engine in a table report. Uses data from the Analysis History data source. l Server - Server on which the analysis job ran l Analysis Name - Name of the analysis l Ruleset Name - Name of the rule used by the analysis l View - Group on which the analysis job ran l Object - Object against which the analysis job ran l Status - Indicates whether the analysis successfully ran or not l Total Time - Total time taken for the analysis job to run (in seconds) l Scheduled Time - Time the analysis job was scheduled to run Analysis Engine Performance Returns the status of the Analysis Engine over a time period in a column chart. Uses data from the Analysis Engine Status data source. l Server - Server on which the analysis jobs are running l Running - Number of analyses that are currently running l Waiting - Number of analyses that are queued to run l Assigned - Number of analyses that are assigned to run DPA Client License Details for ruleset Returns DPA client license details in a table report. Report for Running out of backup client licenses rule. Uses data from the DPA Enabler Activity, License Configuration, and User Input data sources. l Alert - Identifier of the alert DPA Collector Log Returns information about messages that have been logged by the collector process in a table report. Uses data from the Process Log data source. 332 l Server - Name of the server that is running the agent: DPA l Level - Severity of message: Fatal, Warn, Error, Info, Debug, Debug low, Trace l Host Name - Name of the host from which the message was generated l Process - Server process that generated the message: controller, reporter, listener, publisher, ae (analysis engine), webapp, agent, gui, tool, installer l Process Id - Identifier of the process that generated the message l Thread Id - Identifier of the thread from which the message generated l Context - Any additional information about the message source EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Location - Code location that was the source of the error message (for C this is the module name, for Java this is the class name) l Function - Function in the code that was the source of the error message (relative to the Location field) l Message - First 2000 characters of the message l Timestamp - Timestamp of the message DPA Listener Latency Returns listener performance information. Displays latency in milliseconds over time in a line chart. Uses data from the DPA Metrics data source. l Server - Name of the DPA server l Latency - The 99th percentile latency (in milliseconds) DPA Listener Request Rate Returns listener performance. Displays request rate (requests/second) over time in a line chart. Uses data from the DPA Metrics data source. l Server - Name of the DPA Server l Request Rate - Rate at which requests are processed (in requests/second) DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time Displays the median time taken to run a report over time in a line chart. Uses data from the DPA Metrics data source. l Server - Name of the DPA Server l Median - The median time taken to run a report DPA Server Logs Returns information about messages that have been logged by the DPA server process in a table report. Uses data from the Process Log data source. l Server - Name of the Server running the agent: DPA l Level - Severity of message: Fatal, Warn, Error, Info, Debug, Debug low, Trace l Host Name - Name of the host from which the message was generated l Process - Server process that generated the message: controller, reporter, listener, publisher, ae (analysis engine), webapp, agent, gui, tool, installer l Process Id - Identifier of the process that generated the message l Thread Id - Identifier of the thread from which the message generated l Context - Any additional information about the message source l Location - Code location that was the source of the error message (for C this is the module name, for Java this is the class name) l Function - Function in the code that was the source of the error message (relative to the Location field) DPA Listener Latency 333 Reports by System Template l Message - First 2000 characters of the message l Timestamp - Timestamp of the message HTTP Request Performance Statistics Returns HTTP request performance statistics in a table report. Uses data from the HTTP Request Performance Statistics data source. l Server - Name of the Server running the agent: DPA l Client Host - l Request Method - l Response Code - l Time Taken in Milliseconds - l URL - l Request ID - l Start Time - l End Time - Listener Performance Returns listener performance details in a table report. Uses data from the Listener Status data source. l Server - Name of the server on which the listener is installed l Queue Length - Length of the queue inside the Listener l Queries - Number of database queries performed (/second l Preprocessing Errors - Number of errors the listener encountered while parsing data received from Data Collection Agents l Processing Errors - Number of SQL errors the listener encountered while inserting data into the database l Listener Busy Errors - TNumber of times the listener has sent a busy message back to a Data Collection Agent to tell it that it has reached the Listener’s maximum queue size Node List Returns a list of objects in a table report. Uses data from the Node Details data source. l Node - Name of the object Node Topology Returns object topology details in a topology report. Uses data from the Node Topology Report datasource. 334 l Source - Source name l Name - l Parameters - Parameters names l Target - Target name EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Node - Node name l Type - Type of array l Label - Name of the field returned l ReportObject - l ToolTip - l Group - Name of the group Objects with Replication Exposures Returns objects with replication alerts in a table report. Uses data from the Objects with Replication Exposures data source. l Node Name - Name of the object l Number of replication alerts - Number of replication alerts Publisher Performance Returns details about the number of reports scheduled and running on the DPA server in a column chart. Uses data from the Publisher Status data source. l Server - Server on which the scheduled reports are running l Running - Number of scheduled reports that are currently running l Waiting - Number of scheduled reports that are queued to run l Assigned - Number of scheduled reports that are assigned to run Replication Alerts by Age by Group Returns alerts exposure by age by group in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Alerts by Group by Age data source. l Group Name - Name of the group l Over 3 Weeks - Alerts over three weeks old l 1-3 Weeks - Alerts one to three weeks old l 1-6 days - Alerts one to six days old Replication Alerts by Group Returns alerts by group in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Alerts by Group data source. l Group Name - Name of the group l Critical Alerts - List of critical alerts l Other Alerts - List non-critical alerts Report History Returns details about reports that have been run from the Analysis Engine and the Publisher in a table report. Uses data from the Report History data source. l Id - Unique identifier for the report l Server - Server on which the report was run Objects with Replication Exposures 335 Reports by System Template l Report - Name of the report or control panel l User - Name of the user that ran the report l Object - Name of the objects that the report was ran against l Status - Indicates whether the report was successful l Period - Duration of the time window selected for the report (in seconds) l Total Time - Total time that the report took to run l Datasource Time - Total time that was spent processing data sources (in seconds) l Num Datasource Values - Total number of rows and fields returned from all data sources) l Num Result Values - Total number of rows and fields returned from the report after processing by any operators l Start Time - Time the report started l End Time - Time the report finished l Run Origin - Identifies the origin Request History Returns details about requests that have run for an object in a table report. Uses data from the Request History data source. l Module - Name of the module that is performing the data collection. For example, EMC RecoverPoint l Error Message - Messages associated with request l Agent - Hostname or IP Address of the DPA Data Collection Agent that is gathering the data l End Time - Time the request completed l Start Time - Time the request started l Function - Name of the function that is performing the data collection l Target - Name of the target machine monitored l Status - Status of the last run of the request l Run ID - An internal field for replication analysis l Report Size - Size of the report returned Scheduled Report History Returns details of scheduled reports that have been run from the Publisher in a table report. Uses data from the Report History and Scheduled Report Forecast data sources. 336 l Server - Server on which the scheduled reports were run l Report Name - Name of the report or control panel used by the scheduled report l Scheduler Start Time - Time that the scheduled report is expected to run l Object - Name of the object that the report will be ran against l User - Name of the user that ran the report l Status - Indicates whether the report was successful EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total Time - Total time that the report took to run l Start Time - Time the report started l End Time - Time the report finished Unsupported Agents Returns information on unsupported DPA Data Collection Agents in a table. Uses data from the Agent Configuration data source. l Agent Name - Name of the DPA data collection agent l Version - Version of the agent Licensing system templates Licensing reports display information on the licenses configured on the backup servers. Expired Licenses for ruleset Returns expired license details in a table report. Report for Expired Licenses rule. Uses data from the License Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Alert - Identifier of the alert License Conformance Returns license conformance details in a table report. Uses data from the License Conformance data source. l Node - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l License Name - Name of the license l Num Licensed - Number of licenses bought l Num Used - Number of licenses used l Conformance - Conformance rating percentage l Notes - License notes License Details Returns the total and used number of DPA client and capacity type licenses in a table report. Uses data from the License Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Product - Product on which the license acts l Identifier - Text which identifies the license function l Code - Internal code which identifies the license function Unsupported Agents 337 Reports by System Template l Instance - Instance of this license on this object l Tier - Tier to which this license applies, if any l Platform - Platform to which this license is restricted, if any l Description - Informative description of the license function l Instances - How many instances of the function is provided by this license l Valid - Indicates if the license is currently valid l Expires - Indicates when this license expires, if ever License Details - Expired Returns the licenses that have expired details in a table report. Uses data from the License Configuration data source. l Node - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Product - Product on which the license acts l Identifier - Text which identifies the license function l Code - Internal code which identifies the license function l Instance - Instance of this license on this object l Tier - Tier to which this license applies, if any l Platform - Platform to which this license is restricted, if any l Description - Informative description of the license function l Instances - How many instances of the function is provided by this license l Valid - Indicates if the license is currently valid l Expires - Indicates when this license expires, if ever License Summary Summary of the licenses configured in a table report. Uses data from the License Configuration data source. l Identifier - Text which identifies the license function l Instances - How many instances of the function is provided by this license Nearly Expired Licenses for ruleset Returns nearly expired licenses in a table report. Report for Licenses Nearing Expiration rule. Uses data from the License Configuration, Report Times, and User Input data sources. l Node - Name of the object l Alert - Identifier of the alert Media management system templates Media Management reports display information on the media configured on the backup application. The two types of Media Management reports include: 338 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Overviews, which are high level reports that summarize media utilization. l Detailed Media reports, which are detailed reports about individual volumes. For more specific details on the various reports, select one of the reports described in the following sections. Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted By Device Returns the number of volumes mounted on each device in a column chart. Uses data from the Number of Volumes by Device data source. l Device Host - Host to which the backup device is assigned l Device Name - Name of the backup device l Number of Volumes - Number of volumes that have been mounted in the device over the specified period Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted By Node Returns the number of volumes mounted on each object in a column chart. Uses data from the Number of Volumes by Device data source. l Device Host - Host to which the backup device is assigned l Number of Volumes - Number of volumes that have been mounted in the device over the specified period Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted Daily By Device Returns the number of volumes mounted each day on each device in a column chart. Uses data from the Number of Volumes by Device data source. l Device Host - Host to which the backup device is assigned l Device Name - Name of the backup device l Number of Volumes - Number of volumes that have been mounted in the device over the specified period Backup Jukebox Number Of Volumes Mounted Daily Returns the number of volumes mounted each day on each jukebox in a column chart. Uses data from the Number of Volumes by Jukebox data source. l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox l Number of Volumes - Number of volumes that have been mounted in the jukebox over the specified period Empty Media By Jukebox Returns empty media by jukebox details in a table report. Uses data from the Media Count By Location data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Backup Device Number Of Volumes Mounted By Device 339 Reports by System Template Empty Media By Jukebox RAG Returns empty media by jukebox Red, Amber, Green (RAG) traffic-light style report in a health status chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Location data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Empty Media by Pool and Jukebox Returns empty media by pool and jukebox details in a table report. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and Location data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Pool - Pool to which the volume belongs l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Age Distribution Returns all the media configured on a backup server in a column chart. It identifies how old each tape is based on the last time to which the tape was written. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Range - l Items - Media Contents Returns the contents of jobs on a tape in a table report. Uses data from the Media Contents data source. 340 l Id - Unique identifier for a backup Job stored on the volume l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server to which the Job was backed up l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned. This value is not available from all backup applications l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire Media Count Returns the total number of volumes configured on each backup server in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count data source. l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count Available Volumes By Jukebox Returns media count available volumes by jukebox in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Location and Media Count By State and Location data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By Jukebox and State Returns media count by jukebox and state in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By State and Location data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By Pool Returns the number of volumes managed by the backup servers selected broken down by pool over time in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance Media Count 341 Reports by System Template l Pool - Name of the pool to which the volume belongs l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By Pool and State Returns the number of volumes in a specific state in each individual pool trended over time in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and State data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Name of the pool to which the volume belongs l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By Pool and State for ruleset Returns the media count by pool and state in a table report. Report for Empty tapes running low rule. Uses data from the Media Count By Pool and State and User Input data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Alert - Identifier of the alert Media Count By Server Returns the media count by server in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count By State Returns the number of volumes managed by the backup servers calculated by state over time in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By State data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count of Offline Expired Volumes Returns the total number of expired volumes that are offline in a column chart. This report enables bringing them back from offline for reuse. Uses data from the Media Count data source. 342 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count of Online/Offline Volumes Returns media count of online and offline volumes in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l State - State of the media: Empty, Partial, Full, Frozen, Suspended, Pending l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Count Volumes Used By Jukebox Returns the total number of volumes used in each jukebox over the reporting period to enable planning future tape usage based on historical usage in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Count By Location data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the media is located l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server Media Details Returns details of all voumes on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device Media Count of Online/Offline Volumes 343 Reports by System Template l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Cleaning Tapes Returns details of all cleaning tapes on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 344 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Empty Volumes Returns details of all empty volumes on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located Media Details For Empty Volumes 345 Reports by System Template l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Frozen Volumes Returns details of all frozen volumes on a server in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 346 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Full Volumes Returns details of all volumes that are full in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume Media Details For Full Volumes 347 Reports by System Template 348 l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Media Details For Offline Expired Volumes Returns details of all offline volumes that have expired in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID Media Details For Offline Expired Volumes 349 Reports by System Template l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details for Offline Volumes Returns details of all volumes that are not online in table reports. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 350 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Online Volumes Returns details of all volumes that are online in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned Media Details For Online Volumes 351 Reports by System Template l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Partial Volumes Returns details of all partially full volumes in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 352 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details For Used Volumes Returns information on all tapes that have been written to during the reporting period in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device Media Details For Used Volumes 353 Reports by System Template l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details of Available Volumes Returns information on all tapes that are either Empty or Partially Full or that have expired and are available for reuse in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 354 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details Top 10 Oldest Volumes Returns media details top ten oldest volumes in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online Media Details Top 10 Oldest Volumes 355 Reports by System Template l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Details With Retention Over 8 Years Returns media details with retention greater than or equal to eight years in a table report. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 356 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Volume Group - Group to which the volume belongs l State - State of the volume: Used, Full, Partial, Frozen l Pool - Pool the in which the volume is located EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) l Pct Reclaimable - Amount of data on the volume that is reclaimable (as a percentage) (TSM only) l Online - Indicates if the volume is online l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the volume is located l Slot - Slot in the jukebox in which the tape is located l Retention Period - Retention period of the volume (in seconds) l First Labelled - First time that a volume was labelled l First Written - Time at which the volume was first written l Last Written - Last time at which the volume was written l Expiry Flag - Indicates if the volume has expired l Expiry Date - Date the volume is due to expire l Num Mounts - Number of times the volume has been mounted in a device l Num Relabelled - Number of times the volume has been relabelled l Cleanings Left - For cleaning tapes, number of cleanings that are left l Barcode - Barcode of the volume l Cartridge Type - Type of cartridge tape l Capacity - Estimated capacity of the tape (in MB) l Owner - Server that owns the volume l Created - Date and time that the volume was created l Assigned - Date and time that the volume was assigned l First Mount - Time that the volume was first mounted l Last Mount - Time that the volume was last mounted l Status - Status of the volume l Vault Name - Name of the NetBackup vault the volume is in l Vault Sent Date - Date the volume was sent to the vault l Vault Return Date - Data the volume is to be returned from the vault l Vault Slot - Slot the volume occupies in the vault l Vault Session - Vault session ID l Number Write Errors - Number of write errors l Number Read Errors - Number of read errors l Access - Access mode for the volume: READWRITE, READONLY, UNAVAILABLE, OFFSITE, DESTROYED l Condition - Condition of the volume: good, fair, poor (HP Data Protector only) Media Retention Distribution Returns media retention distribution, when retention data is available, in a column chart, Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Range - l Items - Media Retention Distribution 357 Reports by System Template Media Size Distribution Returns distribution of how much media is stored on each tape in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Range Volumes - Media Summary Returns the number of volumes and usage broken by several statistics in a table report. Uses data from the Media Count and Media Usage data sources. l Media Count - Total number of volumes configured on each backup server l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored on all media (in MB) Media Usage Returns the amount of data that is stored on media in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Usage data source. l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored on all media (in MB) Media Usage By Pool Return the total amount of data stored on media calculated by pool in a line chart. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool - Pool in which the volume is located l Used - Amount of data that has been written to volume (in MB) Media Usage By Server Return the total amount of data stored on media calculated by server in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Usage data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Media Usage - Total amount of data stored on all media (in MB) Media Reclamation Distribution Returns media reclamation distribution details in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Details data source. 358 l Range - l Items - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template RPO Violation Details Returns RPO violation details in a table. Uses data from the RPO Violation Details data source. l Recover point name - l CG copy name - l Policy name - l Description - l Severity - l Category - Root Cause Returns root cause for protection processes errors in a table. Uses data from the Root Cause Report data source. l Root Cause - Name of the event that exists on the object in the data path. For example, Backup agent is down on backup client l Object (Type) - Name of the object where the event exists l #Affected Objects - Number of objects the event affected in the duration of the failed backup job l #Affected Alerts - Number of times the event occurred in the duration of the failed backup job l First Occurrence - First time the event occurred in the duration of the failed backup job l Last Occurrence - Last time the event occurred in the duration of the failed backup job Root Cause for CG Details Returns root cause consistency group error details in a table. Uses data from the Root Cause For CG Details data source. l Server - Name of the RecoverPoint management server l CG - Name of consistency group l Source Site - Name of the source site/cluster of the replication l Source CG Copy - Name of the source CG copy of the replication l Target Site - Name of the target site/cluster of the replication l Target CG Copy - Name of the target CG copy of the replication l Replication Type - Type of replication technology l Replication State - State of the replication l Peak Time Lag - Peak time lag in replication of the copy over the last polling period l Required RPO - RPO defined in the data protection policy for the protected object RPO Violation Details 359 Reports by System Template Root Cause for Job Details Returns root cause for job error details in a table. Uses data from the Root Cause For Job Details data source. l Job Name - Name of the job l Group - Name of the group in which the job occurred l Client - Name of the client on which the job took place l Status - Status of the job: Success, Failed l Started - Time the job started writing l Finished - Time the job completed l Error Code - Error code associated with the job TSM DR Media Returns TSM disaster recovery media details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Disaster Recovery Media data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Volume Id - Identifier for the volume l Location - Location of the host, if any l State - State of the media: MOUNTABLE, NOTMOUNTABLE, COURIER, VAULT, VAULTRETRIEVE, COURIERRETRIEVE, REMOTE l Pool - Pool in which the volume is located l Library Name - Name of the library in which the volume is located l Volume Type - Type of volume l Last Update - Date the volume was last updated Volume Expiration Report Returns a distribution report showing when media is expected to expire in a column chart. Uses data from the Media Details data source. l Count - Number of volumes due to expire l Operations system templates Backup Device Availability Returns backup device availability details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Status data source. 360 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Total - Amount of backup devices l Up - l Available - Backup devices that are available Backup Device Availability By Server Returns backup device availability by server in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service l Value - Backup Device Availability RAG Returns backup device availability Red, Amber, Green (RAG) traffic-light style report in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Available - Backup devices that are available Backup Mount Requests Returns any mounts for which a device is waiting in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pending Mounts data source. l Server - Name of the backup server for the outstanding request l Type - Indicates if the tape is required for backup or restore l Volume - Volume label of the tape required, if known l Pool - Pool of the volume that is required l Number Outstanding - Number of tapes that are being waited on l Since - Amount of time that the server has been waiting for the tapes l Severity - Severity of the failure Empty Media plus Device Availability Returns empty media plus device availability in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Status and Media Count By Location data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Available - Available devices l Empty Media - Empty media Performance system templates Performance reports provide you with information to analyze the performance of backup clients and devices. There are two types of performance reports: l Backup Client Performance l Device Performance Backup Device Availability By Server 361 Reports by System Template Rather than just success or failure, the DPA user now has the time to look for largest clients, slowest clients, most unreliable clients and make efforts to identify and address any issues. A list of the slowest clients within a backup environment is key to improving the overall efficiency of the backup system. By focusing on the slowest backup clients in a large backup environment the overall throughput of the system can be raised significantly, often with no extra purchases beyond some minor infrastructure upgrades. It can act as a targeted work list for a backup system administrator to fix problems and suggest upgrades; improving the backup system in the most cost effective manner. Aggregate Disk Activity Returns information on disk drive activity in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Activity data source. l Busy - Average activity level for the disks (as a percentage) Aggregate Disk Operations Returns information on aggregate disk operations in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance data source. l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) l Sectors Read - Number of sectors read l Sectors Written - Number of sectors written to Aggregate Disk Performance Returns information on disk drive performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance data source. l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Bytes Transferred - Number of kilobytes transferred from disk Aggregate Fibre Channel Device Performance Returns information on Fibre Channel device performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Device Performance From Switch data source. l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Performance Returns information on Fibre Channel performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance data source. 362 l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) l Frame In - Number of frames received (1000s/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Frames Out - Number of frames sent (1000s/second) Aggregate LUN Performance Returns performance information for all LUNs in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance data source. l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) Aggregate Processor Utilization Returns information on the average CPU utilization for a group of hosts in a line chart. Uses data from the Processor Utilization data source. l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) Aggregate Tape Drive Performance Returns information on tape drive performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance data source. l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Total Throughput - Data throughput for reads and writes (KB/second) Aggregate Tape Library Drive Performance Returns information on tape drive performance broken down by switch in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Switch data source. l Data Out - Data out of the switch (KB/second) Aggregate Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance Returns the virtual Fibre Channel port performance in line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance data source. l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) l Frame In - Number of frames received (1000s/second) l Frames Out - Number of frames sent (1000s/second) Backup Client Performance Distribution Returns the average spread of client performance across all clients in a column chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Range - l Items - Aggregate LUN Performance 363 Reports by System Template Backup Client Slowest/Fastest Jobs for Client Returns the slowest and fastest clients based on the throughput of backup jobs that have run on the clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. In order to calculate the throughput of a client, only full backups that are more than 1 GB in size are considered. Incremental backups can spend a long time scanning a file system before sending data which can lead to an incorrect calculation of the overall throughput. Backups of less than 1 GB usually complete so quickly that the throughput calculated may not be accurate. If required, either of these parameters can be modified in the Report Editor. 364 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Workflow Job Id - Job Id associated with the workflow l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l App Type - Name of the TDP that was used to perform the backup l Size Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size field to return the Job size (in bytes) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Size Transferred Offset - Number of bytes that should be added or subtracted from the Size Scanned field to return the Save Set size in bytes l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Duration - Duration of a Job l Retention - Retention days l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Files Scanned - Number of files scanned l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type Backup Client Slowest/Fastest Jobs for Client 365 Reports by System Template l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Device Avg/Max Throughput by Device Returns backup device average and maximum throughput by device in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device l Average Throughput - Average of the write and read throughput (KB/second) l Maximum Throughput - Maximum of the write and read throughput (KB/second) Backup Device Performance Summary Summary of backup device performance in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Read Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing read operations (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing write operations (KB/second) l Write Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing write operations (as a percentage) l Read Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing read operations (as a percentage) l Total Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing read and write operations (as a percentage) Backup Device Performance Summary By Device Summary of backup device performance by device in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. 366 l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device l Average Read Throughput - Average throughput of the drive during the reporting window, when performing read operations (KB/second) l Average Write Throughput - Average throughput of the drive during the reporting window, when performing write operations (KB/second) l Write Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing write operations (as a percentage) l Read Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing read operations (as a percentage) l Max Read Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing read operations (KB/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Max Write Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing write operations (KB/second) l Total Activity - Time that the drive has spent performing read and write operations (as a percentage) Backup Device Throughput Aggregate Returns backup device throughput aggregate details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Throughput - Average of the write and read throughput (KB/second) Backup Device Throughput by Device Returns backup device throughput by device details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device l Throughput - Average of the write and read throughput (KB/second) Backup Device Throughput for Device Returns backup device throughput for device details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device l Read Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing read operations (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing write operations (KB/second) Backup Top 10 Fastest Clients Returns the top ten fastest clients based on the throughput of backup jobs that have run on the clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. In order to calculate the throughput of a client, only full backups that are more than 1 GB in size are considered. Incremental backups can spend a long time scanning a file system before sending data which can lead to an incorrect calculation of the overall throughput. Backups of less than 1 GB usually complete so quickly that the throughput calculated may not be accurate. If required, either of these parameters can be modified in the Report Editor. The Backup Top 10 Fastest Clients report can be used to identify the Fastest machines in the environment to benchmark how fast backups are running. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup Backup Device Throughput Aggregate 367 Reports by System Template l Cumulative Time Active - l Throughput - Average of the write and read throughput (MB/second) l Scanned Throughput - Scanned throughput (MB/second) l Jobs - l Act Thruput - (MB/second) Backup Top 10 Slowest Clients Returns the top ten slowest clients based on the throughput of backup jobs that have run on the clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details data source. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Cumulative Time Active - l Throughput - Average of the write and read throughput (MB/second) l Scanned Throughput - Scanned throughput (MB/second) l Jobs - l Act Thruput - (MB/second) Celerra Replication Performance Returns Celerra replication performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Celerra Replication Performance data source. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the EMC Celerra being monitored l Name - Name of the replication set l Current Transfer Rate - Total amount of data being read and written to the replication link (KB/second) l Current Read Rate - Amount of data being read from the replication link (KB/ second) l Current Write Rate - Amount of data being written to the replication link (KB/ second) Celerra Replication Performance Summary Summary for Celerra replication performance details in table report. Uses data from the Celerra Replication Performance data source. 368 l Server - Hostname or IP address of the EMC Celerra being monitored l Name - Name of the replication set l Average Transfer Rate - Average amount of data being read and written to the replication link (KB/second) l Average Read Rate - Average amount of data that has been read from the replication link (KB/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Average Write Rate - Average amount of data that has been written to the replication link (KB/second) Data Domain Average Replicated Capacity Returns Data Domain average replicated capacity details in a line chart. Uses data from the Average Replicated Capacity data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Destination Host - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Average Capacity - Average replicated capacity (in MB) Data Domain Data Transfer Rate Returns Data Domain data transfer rate in a line chart. Uses data from the Replication Data Transfer Statistics data source. l Hostname - Hostname of replicating server l Source - Identifier for replication source l Destination - Identifier for replication destination l Destination Host - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Transfer Rate - Transfer Difference divided by Time Difference, where: n Transfer Difference is the difference in value of the field f_sentcompressed between two consecutive rows n Time Difference is the difference in value of field f_endtime values between two consecutive rows, where: – f_sent_compressed and f_endtime are fields taken from the table repl_perf Data Domain Replication Time Lag Returns the replication time lag value over time as a graph. Uses data from the Replication Performance data source. l Hostname - Hostname of replicating server l Source - Identifier for replication source l Destination - Identifier for replication destination l Time Lag - Calculated as the difference between the Date Gathered and Synchronized Disk Activity By Disk Returns disk activity by disk in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Activity By Device data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Device - Name of the disk l Busy - Activity level for the disk (as a percentage) Data Domain Average Replicated Capacity 369 Reports by System Template Disk Activity By Host Returns disk activity by host in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Activity By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object to which the disks are attached l Busy - Average activity level for the object's disks (as a percentage) Disk Operations by Disk Returns disk operations by disk in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance By Device data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Device - Name of the disk l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) l Sectors Read - Number of sectors read l Sectors Written - Number of sectors written to Disk Operations by Host Returns disk operations by host in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) l Sectors Read - Number of sectors read l Sectors Written - Number of sectors written to Disk Performance By Disk Returns disk performance by disk in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance By Device data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Device - Name of the disk l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Bytes Transferred - Number of kilobytes transferred from disk Disk Performance By Host Returns disk performance by disk in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk Performance By Node data source. 370 l Hostname - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Bytes Transferred - Number of kilobytes transferred from disk DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time Displays the median time taken to run a report over time in a line chart. Uses data from the DPA Metrics data source. l Server - Name of the DPA Server l Median - The median time taken to run a report Fibre Channel Device Performance Returns Fibre Channel device performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Device Performance From Switch data source. l Hostname - Name of the host in which the HBAs are installed l Device - Name of the device on the host. For example, /dev/rmt/1n l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) Fibre Channel Device Performance By Node Returns Fibre Channel device performance by object details in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Device Performance From Switch data source. l Hostname - Name of the host in which the HBAs are installed l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) Fibre Channel Device Performance Summary Summary of the Fibre Channel device performance in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Device Performance From Switch data source. l Hostname - Name of the host in which the HBAs are installed l Device - Name of the device on the host. For example, /dev/rmt/1n l Avg Write - Amount of data sent l Max Write - Max data sent l Write Activity - Average write activity (as a percentage) l Avg Read - Amount of data received l Max Read - Max data received l Read Activity - Average read activity (as a percentage) Fibre Channel Port Performance Returns Fibre Channel port performance information in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Data - The sum of the Data In and Data Out displayed by the object(KB/second) DPA Reporter Median Report Run Time 371 Reports by System Template l Frames - The sum of Frames In and Frames Outdisplayed by the object (1000s/ second) Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node Returns Fibre Channel port performance by object details in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Data In - Amount of data received by the object (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent from the object (KB/second) l Frames In - Number of frames received by the object (1000s/second) l Frames Out - Number of frames sent from the object (1000s/second) Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port Returns Fibre Channel port performance by port details in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Port - Name of the port l Data In - Amount of data received by the port (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent from the port (KB/second) l Frames In - Number of frames received by the port (1000s/second) l Frames Out - Number of frames sent from the port (1000s/second) Fileserver Average Response Times Returns the average read and write response times over time for NFS and CIFS operations in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l CIFS Average Read Operation Duration - Average duration of CIFS reads (microsecond/call) l CIFS Average Write Operation Duration - Average duration of CIFS writes (microsecond/call) l NFS Average Read Operation Duration - Average duration of NFS reads (microsecond/call) l NFS Average Write Operation Duration - Average duration of NFS writes (microsecond/call) Fileserver Cache Hit Rates Returns file server cache hit rate details in a line chart. Uses data from the Inode Cache Hit Rate and Name Cache Hit Rate data sources. l 372 Node - Name of the object EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Inode Cache Hit Rate - Percentage of successful cache lookups when attempting to map an inode to a block on a file system l Name Cache Hit Rate - Percentage of successful cache lookups when attempting to map a filename to an inode on a file system Fileserver Cache Hit Rates By Node Returns file server cache hit rate by object details in a line chart. Uses data from the Inode Cache Hit Rate and Name Cache Hit Rate data sources. l Node - Name of the object l Inode Cache Hit Rate - Percentage of successful cache lookups when attempting to map an inode to a block on a file system l Name Cache Hit Rate - Percentage of successful cache lookups when attempting to map a filename to an inode on a file system Fileserver Client Performance Returns file server client performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the File server client performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Client - Name of the file server client l Total Operations - Total number of client operations (/second) Fileserver Data Throughput Returns file server data throughput in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Total Throughput - Total throughput of CIFS and NFS data (KB/second) Fileserver Data Throughput By Protocol Returns file server data throughput by protocol in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Total CIFS - Total of CIFS data in and data out (KB/second) l Total NFS - Total of NFS data in and data out (KB/second) Fileserver Filesystem Performance Returns file server file system performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the File Server Filesystem Performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Mountpoint - Name of the file server file system l Protocol - Name of the file server protocol: CIFS, NFS Fileserver Cache Hit Rates By Node 373 Reports by System Template l Total Operations - Total number of file system operations (/second) l Read Operations - Number of file system read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of file system write operations (/second) l Other Operations - Number of file system lookup, locking and similar operations (/ second) Fileserver Operations Returns file server operations in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Operations - Total of operations (/second) Fileserver Operations By Protocol Returns file server operations by protocol in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l NFS operations - Number of NFS operations per second (/second) l CIFS operations - Number of CIFS operations per second (/second) l DAFS operations - Number of DAFS operations per second (/second) l HTTP operations - Number of HTTP operations per second (/second) l iSCSI operations - Number of iSCSI operations per second (/second) l FCP operations - Number of FCP operations per second (/second) l Idle - Percentage of time NFS was idle l Preoccupied - Percentage of time NFS was processing l Send - Percentage of time NFS was sending data l Receive - Percentage of time NFS was receiving data Fileserver Operations with Direction Returns file server operations with direction in a line chart. Uses data from the File server performance data source. 374 l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l CIFS Read operations - Number of CIFS read operations (/second) l CIFS Write operations - Number of CIFS write operations (/second) l NFS Read operations - Number of NFS read operations (/second) l NFS Write operations - Number of NFS write operations (/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Fileserver Performance Summary Summary of file server performance details in a table report. Uses data from the File server performance data source. l Node - Name of the file server l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Read Operations - Number of CIFS and NFS read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of CIFS and NFS write operations (/second) l Data In - Amount of CIFS and NFS data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of CIFS and NFS data sent (KB/second) l Average Read Size - Average size of CIFS and NFS data read (in KB) l Average Write Size - Average size of CIFS and NFS data written (in KB) l Protocol - Type of protocol: CIFS, NFS Filesystem Disk Performance Returns file system disk performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Disk Performance data source. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array on which the file system resides l Disk node - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Disk - Name of the disk l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) Filesystem Operations By Partition Returns file system operations by partition in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Performance By Filesystem data source. l Hostname - Name of the object on which the file systems reside l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Ops - Total of the Read and Write operations (/second) Filesystem Operations by Direction Returns file system operations by direction in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Performance By Filesystem data source. This report shows the type of operations that occur on each file system over time. l Hostname - Name of the object on which the file systems reside Fileserver Performance Summary 375 Reports by System Template l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) Filesystem Performance Summary Summary of the file system performance in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Performance By Filesystem data source. l Hostname - Name of the object on which the file systems reside l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) l Average Read Size - Average size of read operations to the disk (in bytes) l Average Write Size - Average size of write operations to the disk (in bytes) Filesystem Throughput by Partition Returns file system throughput by partition in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Performance By Filesystem data source. l Hostname - Name of the object on which the file systems reside l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Throughput - Total of throughput of read and write (KB/second) Filesystem Throughput with Direction Returns file system throughput with direction in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Performance By Filesystem data source. l Hostname - Name of the object on which the file systems reside l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) Host Performance Returns host performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization, Memory Configuration, Memory Status, Network Interface Performance By Interface, and Processor Utilization data sources. 376 l Memory Utilization - Average memory utilization of Used and Total memory l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Filesystem Utilization - Average file system utilization for all hosts (as a percentage) l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) Host Performance During Backup Returns host performance during backup in a line chart. Uses data from the Disk performance By Device, Memory Configuration, Memory Status, Network Interface Performance By Interface, and Processor Utilization data sources. l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) l Utilization - Utilization of Used and Total memory l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Interface - Interface name l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) l Device - Name of the disk l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) Host Performance For Client Returns host performance for client in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization, Memory Configuration, Memory Status, Network Interface Performance By Interface, and Processor Utilization data sources. l Utilization - Utilization of Used and Total memory l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) l Filesystem Utilization - Average file system utilization for all hosts (as a percentage) l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) LUN Operations Returns LUN operation details in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By LUN data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN is configured l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Name - Name of the LUN l Ops - Total of the Read and Write operations (/second) Host Performance During Backup 377 Reports by System Template LUN Operations By LUN Returns LUN operation by LUN details in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By LUN data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN is configured l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Name - Name of the LUN l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) LUN Performance Returns LUN performance in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By LUN data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN is configured l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Name - Name of the LUN l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) LUN Performance By Node Returns LUN performance by object in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By Node data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUNs are configured l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) LUN Throughput Returns LUN throughput in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By LUN data source. 378 l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN is configured l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Name - Name of the LUN l Throughput - Total of throughput of read and write (KB/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template LUN Throughput By LUN Returns LUN throughput by LUN in a line chart. Uses data from the LUN Performance By LUN data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN is configured l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Name - Name of the LUN l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) Mirror Performance Returns mirror performance in a line chart. Uses data from the Mirror Performance data source. l Node - Name of the object on which the mirror resides l Path - Path to the mirror l Update Speed - Speed at which the mirror is updating (KB/second) Process Memory Usage For Specific Process Returns the CPU utilization and memory usage of processes that run on a host in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Status data source. Use this report to identify processes that are consuming too much memory and CPU on a machine. l Hostname - Name on which the process is running l PID - Identifier of the process l Process Name - Name of the process l Memory - Amount of memory used by the process (in MB) Processor Utilization By CPU Returns the utilization of each individual CPU on a host or group of hosts over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Processor Utilization By CPU data source. l Hostname - Hostname in which the processors are running l Sub Name - Name of site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Sub Name 2 - Name of RecoverPoint Appliance l Num - Processor number l CPU Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) Processor Utilization By Node Returns the average CPU utilization on a host over time by averaging the utilization across all processors on that host in a line chart. Uses data from the Processor Utilization By Client data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) LUN Throughput By LUN 379 Reports by System Template RecoverPoint Consistency Group Data Lag Returns RecoverPoint consistency group data lag details in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Peak Data Lag - Peak data amount of data that was queued for replication over the polling period (in MB) RecoverPoint Consistency Group High Load Ratio Returns RecoverPoint consistency group high load ration in a line chart. Uses data from Report Times and the Consistency Group Copy CS Performance data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l High Load Time - Percentage time of High load RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates Returns RecoverPoint consistency group incoming write rate in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. 380 l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Average Peak Incoming Writes - Average peak amount of data that changed per second over the polling period (MB/second) l Average Peak Total Output Rate - Average peak amount of data transferred on the link to the target per second (MB/second). This value includes the amount of data transferred during both initialization and replication phases. It does not include any time in which the link was halted l Maximum Peak Incoming Writes - Maximum peak amount of data that changed per second over the polling period (MB/second) l Maximum Peak Total Output Rate - Maximum peak amount of data transferred on the link to the target per second (MB/second). This value includes the amount of data transferred during both initialization and replication phases. It does not include any time in which the link was halted EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates for Last Day Returns RecoverPoint consistency group incoming write rate for last day in a table. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Average Peak Incoming Writes - Average amount of data changed per second over the polling period (MB/second) l Average Peak Total Output Rate - Average peak amount of data transferred on the link to the target per second (MB/second) l Maximum Peak Incoming Writes - Maximum amount of data changed per second over the polling period (MB/second) l Maximum Peak Total Output Rate- Maximum peak amount of data transferred on the link to the target per second (MB/second) l Start time-Start time for the period over which performance statistics are gathered l End time- End time for the period over which performance statistics are gathered RecoverPoint Consistency Group Journal Lag Returns RecoverPoint consistency group journal lag details in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Status data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the Copy l Journal Lag - Size of the journal lag (in MB) RecoverPoint Consistency Group Throughput Returns RecoverPoint consistency group throughput details in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Peak Total Output Rate - Peak amount of data transferred on the link to the target per second (MB/second). This value includes the amount of data transferred during both initialization and replication phases. It does not include any time in which the link was halted RecoverPoint Consistency Group Incoming Write Rates for Last Day 381 Reports by System Template RecoverPoint Consistency Group Time Lag Returns RecoverPoint consistency group time lag details in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Average Time Lag - Average time lag in replication of the copy over the last polling period (in seconds) l Peak Time Lag - Peak time lag in replication of the copy over the last polling period (in seconds) RecoverPoint Consistency Group Transaction Lag Returns RecoverPoint consistency group transaction lag details in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Peak Writes Lag - Peak number of IO transactions that were queued for replication over the polling period RecoverPoint RPA Compression Shows two different graphs over time, and they are superimposed on top of each other in the display to be able to see the correlation between the two: l Compression Data over Time — This is the ratio of the total size of the data on storage and the amount of data that was transferred across the network. l CPU Utilization Data over Time —This is the average CPU utilization over time. Uses data from the RPA Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Compression - Level of compression achieved (as a percentage) l CPU Utilization - Utilization of the CPU due to compression. This field is populated only if compression is enabled RecoverPoint RPA Latency Returns RecoverPoint RPA latency details in a line chart. Uses data from the RPA Performance data source. l 382 Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Latency - Latency of network writes (in milliseconds) RecoverPoint RPA Throughput Returns RecoverPoint RPA throughput details in a line chart. Uses data from the RPA Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Latency - Latency of network writes (in milliseconds) RecoverPoint RPA Writes Returns RecoverPoint RPA Write details in a line chart. Uses data from the RPA Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Writes - Total number of writes performed by the application RecoverPoint RPA Site Compression Returns RecoverPoint RPA site compression details in a line chart report. Uses data from the RPA Site Performance datasource. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l To Site - Name of the remote site l Compression - Level of compression achieved (as a percentage) RecoverPoint RPA Site Latency Returns RecoverPoint RPA site latency details in a line chart report. Uses data from the RPA Site Performance datasource. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l To Site - Name of the remote site l Latency - Latency of network writes from Site to To Site (in milliseconds) RecoverPoint RPA Throughput 383 Reports by System Template RecoverPoint RPA Site Packet Loss Returns RecoverPoint RPA site packet loss details in a line chart report. Uses data from the RPA Site Performance datasource. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l To Site - Name of the remote site l Packet Loss - Packet loss on the network (as a percentage) RecoverPoint RPA Site Throughput Returns RecoverPoint RPA site throughput details in a line chart report. Uses data from the RPA Site Performance datasource. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l To Site - Name of the remote site l WAN Throughput - Total throughput of WAN traffic from Site to To Site (KB/ second) l WAN Initial Throughput - Throughput of WAN initialization traffic from site to site (KB/second) RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput Returns RecoverPoint RPA site throughput details in a line chart report. Uses data from the Report Times and RPA CS Performance datasources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Average WAN Throughput - Average WAN throughput (bytes/second) l Maximum WAN Throughput - Maximum of WAN initialization traffic (bytes/ second) l Result Duration - RecoverPoint RPA WAN Throughput for Last Day Returns RecoverPoint RPA site throughput for last day details in a table report. Uses data from the RPA Throughput Statistics datasource. 384 l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Production site EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Average WAN Throughput - Average throughput of WAN traffic (KB/second) l Maximum WAN Throughput - Maximum of WAN initialization traffic (KB/second) l Start Time- Start time for the period over which performance statistics are gathered l End Time- End time for the period over which performance statistics are gathered Remote Mirror Performance Returns remote mirror performance details in a line chart. Uses data from Remote Mirror Performance data source. l Source node - Name of the object on which the source mirror resides l Source path - Path to the mirror source l Mirror node - Name of the object on which the remote mirror resides l Mirror path - Path to the remote mirror l Update speed - Speed at which the remote mirror is updating (KB/second) Server Performance During Backup Returns server performance during backup details in a line chart. Uses data from the Memory Configuration, Memory Status, Network Interface Performance By Interface, and Processor Utilization data sources. l Processor Utilization - Utilization on the processor (as a percentage) l Utilization - Average memory utilization of Used and Total memory l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) l Errors In - Number of errors coming in to the interface (/second) l Errors Out - Number of errors leaving the interface (/second) l Packets In - Number of packets coming in to the interface (1000s/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets leaving the interface (1000s/second) Solid State Storage Performance Returns solid state storage performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Solid State Storage Performance data source. l Hostname - Name of machine hosting solid state storage device l Read Throughput - Amount of data moved into NVRAM (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Amount of data moved out of NVRAM (KB/second) Tape Drive Performance By Drive Returns tape drive performance by drive details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance By Device data source. l Hostname - Object to which the drive is attached l Device Name - Name of the device Remote Mirror Performance 385 Reports by System Template l Port - Port used to access the device l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Total Throughput - Total of Read and Write throughput (KB/second) Tape Drive Performance By Node Returns tape drive performance by object details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Object to which the drives are attached l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Total Throughput - Total of Read and Write throughput (KB/second) Tape Drive Performance Summary Summary of the tape drive performance in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance By Device data source. l Hostname - Node to which the drive is attached l Device Name - Name of the device l Port - Port used to access the device l Avg. Write Throughput - Average data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Max Write Throughput - Maximum data throughput for writes (KB/second) l Write Activity - Data throughput for writes (as a percentage) l Avg. Read Throughput - Average data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Max Read Throughput - Maximum data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Read Activity - Data throughput for reads (as a percentage) Tape Drive Throughput on Server During Backup Returns tape drive throughput on server during backup in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance By Device data source. l Hostname - Node to which the drive is attached l Library Name - Name of the tape library to which the drive belongs. Physical tape drives do not return information on the tape library in which they are a member l Device Name - Name of the device l Port - Port used to access the device l Read Throughput - Data throughput for reads (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data throughput for writes (KB/second) Tape Library Drive Performance Returns tape library drive performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Switch data source. l 386 Library - Library on which the tape drive is located EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Drive - Name of the tape drive l Data Out - Data out of the switch (KB/second) Tape Library Drive Performance By Node Returns tape library drive performance by object in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Switch data source. l Library - Library on which the tape drive is located l Data Out - Data out of the switch (KB/second) Tape Library Drive Performance Summary Summary of tape library drive performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Switch data source. l Library - Library on which the tape drive is located l Drive - Name of the tape drive l Avg Write - Average data out of the switch (KB/second) l Max Write - Maximum data out of the switch (KB/second) l Write Activity - Data out of the switch (as a percentage) l Avg Read - Average data into the switch (KB/second) l Max Read - Maximum data into the switch (KB/second) l Read Activity - Data into the switch (as a percentage) Total Throughput Returns total throughput for the host in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance by Node and Fibre Channel Performance by Node data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Total Throughput - Sum of the Data In and Data Out fields for Network Interface and Fibre Channel Port Performance Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Node Returns virtual fibre channel port performance by object in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Data In - Amount of data received by the object (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent from the object (KB/second) l Frames In - Number of frames received by the object (1000s/second) l Frames Out - Number of frames sent from the object (1000s/second) Tape Library Drive Performance By Node 387 Reports by System Template Virtual Fibre Channel Port Performance By Port Returns virtual fibre channel port performance by port in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of server instance, if applicable l Port - Name of the port l Data In - Amount of data received by the port (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent from the port (KB/second) l Frames In - Number of frames received by the port (1000s/second) l Frames Out - Number of frames sent from the port (1000s/second) Virtual Host Disk Performance Returns virtual host disk performance details in a line chart. Uses data from the Virtual Host Disk Performance data source. l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Virtualization Server - Hostname of a Virtualization Server managed by Virtual Centre l Device - Identifier for the disk l Read Throughput - Data read throughput (KB/second) l Write Throughput - Data write throughput (KB/second) l Read Operations - Number of read operations (/second) l Write Operations - Number of write operations (/second) Virtual Host Network Interface Performance Returns the network interface performance of virtual machines in a line chart. Uses data from the Virtual Host Network Interface Performance data source. l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Virtualization Server - Name of the virtual machine l Interface - Identifier for the network interface l Data In - Data incoming (KB/second) l Data Out - Data outgoing (KB/second) l Packets In - Number of packets incoming (thousands/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets outgoing (thousands/second) Virtual Host Processor Utilization Returns the processor percentage utilization of virtual machines in a line chart. Uses data from the Virtual Host Configuration and Virtual Host Status data sources. 388 l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Utilization - CPU utilization of the virtual machine (in MHz) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Webserver Response Time Returns information on the response of a test on a web page in a line chart. Uses data from the Webserver Response data source. l Hostname - Name of the web server l Page Requested - Page being requested l Response Time - Response time (in seconds) l Valid Response - Indicates if the response from the web server was valid Xsigo Aggregate Infiniband Port Performance Returns the percentage utilization of the Infiniband port, aggregated over the selected objects in a line chart. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Performance data source. l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) l Packets In - Number of packets received (/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets sent (/second) Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Node Returns the percentage utilization of the Infiniband port, displayed by object, in a line chart. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Performance data source. l Hostname - Name of the Xsigo Director object l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) l Packets In - Number of packets received (/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets sent (/second) Xsigo Infiniband Port Performance by Port Returns performance information on the InfiniBand ports on Xsigo switches in a line chart. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Performance data source. l Hostname - Name of the Xsigo Director object l Sub Name - Identifier for the switch l Name - Identifier for the InfiniBand port l Data In - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data sent (KB/second) l Packets In - Number of packets received (/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets sent (/second) Webserver Response Time 389 Reports by System Template Xsigo Virtual Port Queue Depth Summary Summary of the queue activity for virtual ports on a Xsigo appliance in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port and Network Interface Performance By Interface data sources. l Hostname - Name of the object l Port - Name of the port l Port Type - Type of port l Average Queue Depth - Average length of the I/O queue l Maximum Queue Depth - Maximum length of the I/O queue l Minimum Queue Depth - Minimum length of the I/O queue Provisioning system templates The following section describes provisioning system templates. Fileserver Top 10 Most Available Aggregates Returns fileserver top ten most available aggregate details in a table report. Uses data from the Aggregate Configuration, Aggregate Status, Disk Configuration, and Disk Status data sources. l Node - Name of the filer on which this aggregate exists l Name - Name of the aggregate l Aggregate Capacity - (in MB) l Used Space - Space on the aggregate used for volumes (in MB) l Available Space - (in MB) l Available FS Capacity - (in MB) l Unallocated Space - (in MB) l Potential Available FS Capacity - (in MB) Recoverability system templates Recoverability analysis is available in two forms: l DPA reports available from the reporting area. l The Replication Analysis section, which in the DPA web console shows a graphical representation of recovery points and gaps in the data protection environment. They summarize the exposures, exclusions, unprotected objects and obsolete recovery points. Replication Analysis is used to drill down and view the status of replication operations and the storage mapping for objects and individual arrays, file systems, and applications. 390 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template All Nodes Of Type Symmatrix CG Returns all objects of type Symmetrix consistency group details in a Table report. Uses data from the All Nodes Of Type data source. l Node Name - Name of the object l Host Name - Name of the host l Type - Type of object Masking Configuration for Storage Array Returns information for masking, masking views and storage groups for Symmetrix and CLARiiON in a table report. Uses data from the Masking Configuration data source. l Module - Name of the module executed l Data Source - Name of the data source executed l Sub - Name of storage array l Name - Name of the storage array where the object is located l Initiator - Initiator of the session l Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the object l Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the object is located l Director - Identifier for the Symmetrix Director l Port - Port identifier l Lun - Logical unit number (LUN) through which the disk can be accessed by the source l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before Masking Configuration for Initiator Returns masking configuration for initiator details in a table report. Uses data from the Masking Configuration data source. l Module - Name of the module executed l Data Source - Name of the data source executed l Sub - Name of storage array l Name - Name of the storage array where the object is located l Initiator - Initiator of the session l Storage Array- Name of the storage array for the object l Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the object is located l Director - Identifier for the Symmetrix Director l Port - Port identifier All Nodes Of Type Symmatrix CG 391 Reports by System Template l Lun - Logical unit number (LUN) through which the disk can be accessed by the source l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before MirrorView Configuration Returns MirrorView/A configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Mirrorview Configuration data source. l Data Source - Name of the data source executed l Name - Name of the file system or application being replicated l Source Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the source object l Source Storage Array UID - Unique identifier of the storage array for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the source object is located l Target Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Storage Array UID - Unique identifier of the storage array for the target object l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Mirrorview Type - Type of MirrorView l Mirrorview UID - Identifier for MirrorView l Update Type - Type of update l Update Interval - Update interval l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before l MV Group Name - MirrorView group name MirrorView/A Performance Returns performance data for MirrorView/A sessions in a table report. Uses data from the Mirrorview Performance and System Variable data sources. 392 l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Module - Name of the module executed l Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the object l Name - Name of the file system or application being replicated l Mirrorview UID - Unique identifier for MirrorView l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Started - Identifies when the job started l Completed - Identifies when the job completed EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Duration - Total duration of all jobs (in seconds) l Defined RPO - As specified in the Protection Policy (in seconds) l MB Transferred - Amount of MB transferred l Peer Storage Array - the Remote Storage Array. It can be the source or the target, depending on whether the MirrorView on the selected array is the source or the target. l Peer Mirrorview Name - Target MirrorView session l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before l RPO Time - Time of the RPO MirrorView/A Performance for CG Returns performance data for MirrorView/A sessions for consistency groups in a table report. Uses data from the Mirrorview CG Performance and System Variable data sources. l Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the object l CG - Name of the consistency group l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Started - Identifies when the job started l Completed - Identifies when the job completed l Duration - Total duration of all jobs (in seconds) l Defined RPO - As specified in the Protection Policy (in seconds) l MB Transferred - Amount of MB transferred l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before l RPO Time - Time of the RPO RDF Configuration Returns RDF configuration for storage array in a table report. Uses data from the RDF Configuration by Destination, RDF Configuration by Source, and RDFG Configuration over time data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Data Source - Name of the data source executed l Source Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the source object is located l Source RDFG Number - Number of the source RDFG l Target Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated MirrorView/A Performance for CG 393 Reports by System Template l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l RDFG Name - Name of the RDFG l Target RDFG Number - Number of the target RDFG l Mode - l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Cycle Time - Cycle time (in seconds) RDF Configuration for CG Returns RDF configuration for consistenct group details in a table report. Uses data from the CG Configuration, RDF Configuration by Source, and RDFG Configuration over time data sources. l Agent Name - Name of the agent l Solutions Enabler Host - Name of the Solutions Enabler Host l CG Name - Name of the consistency group l Source Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the source object is located l Target Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run before l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Data Source - Name of the data source executed l Source RDFG Number - Number of the source RDFG l RDFG Name - Name of the RDFG l Target RDFG Number - Number of the target RDFG l Mode - l Cycle Time - Cycle time (in seconds) RDF Configuration for DG Returns RDF configuration for DG details in a table report. Uses data from the DG Configuration, RDF Configuration by Destination, RDF Configuration by Source, and RDFG Configuration over time data sources. 394 l Source Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the source object is located EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Source RDFG Number - Number of the source RDFG l Target Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l RDFG Name - Name of the RDFG l Target RDFG Number - Number of the target RDFG l Mode - l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l DG Name - Name of DG l Cycle Time - Cycle time (in seconds) RDFG Configuration Returns RDFG configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the RDFG Configuration over time data source. l Storage Array - Name of the storage array where the object is located l RDFG - Name of the RDFG l Cycle Time - Cycle time (in seconds) l RDFG Type - Type of the RDFG l Remote Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated l Remote RDFG - Name of the remote RDFG RDFG Performance Returns performance data for RDF/A groups in a table report. Uses data from the RDFA Performance data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l Module - Name of the module executed l Target Storage Array - Target storage array of the RDF group l Target RDFG Number - Number of the target RDFG l RDFG Name - Name of the RDFG l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Duration - Total duration of all jobs to complete (in seconds) l RPO Time - Time of the RPO l MB Transferred - Amount of MB transferred l Cycle Time - Cycle time (in seconds) l Source Storage Array - Source storage array of the RDF group l Source RDFG Number - Number of the source RDFG l Start Time - Last start time of the group. This value is not set if the group has not run l End Time - Last end time of the group. This value is not set if the group is running or has never run RDFG Configuration 395 Reports by System Template Recoverability Detailed Exposures Returns details recoverability exposures in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Gaps data source. Run this report against a backup host, and not against the backup server itself. Run the report against a group of host file systems or databases to calculate an exposure for an application, business unit, office, or other group of objects. l Category - Category of exposure l Gap - Reason why the gap was triggered l Group - DPA group, if applicable l Host - Host for the replicated object l Path - Path to the replicated object. The path will depend on the replicated object type (for example, a directory path for a file system, or an application storage object) l Protected Object - Name of the protected object l Issued - Indicates when the gap was issued l Storage Array - Source storage array for the replicated object l Replication Method - Method by which the object is replicated l Severity - Severity of the exposure l Gap Details - Additional details on the gap l Replication Time - Time the gap was triggered l GAP_REPORT_RP_ID l GAP_REPORT_Storage Array_ID l GAP_REPORT_GAP_ID l GAP_REPORT_Replication Method_ID l GAP_REASON_ID l GAP_REPORT_NODE_ID l GAP_REPORT_ACTUAL_PATH Recoverability Detailed Exposures for ruleset Returns details for recoverability detailed exposures in a table report. Report for Recoverability Exposure rule. Uses data from the Recoverability Gaps data source. l Host - Host for the replicated object l Alert - Identifier of the alert Recoverability Replicated Object Process View Returns a visualization of the recoverability of one or more backup objects in a topology report. Uses data from the Recoverability Replicated Object Process View data source. 396 l Type - Type of backup object. For example, filesystem, database, application l ToolTip - l Parameters - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Node - Name of the object l ReportObject - l Source - Source of the view l Label - Name of the field returned l Name - Name of the object l Target - Name of the target l Group - Name of the backup group Recoverability Replicated Object Storage Mapping Returns recoverability replicated object storage mapping details in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Replicated Object Storage Mapping data source. l Node Initiator - Node initiator l Primary Storage Array - Name of the primary storage array l Primary Device ID - Identifier of the device in storage array l Primary Device Name - Name of the device in storage array l Source RDF Group - Source RDF Group name l Source MV Session - Source MV session identifier l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Target Storage Array - Name of the storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Device ID - Identifier of the storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Device Name - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Target RDF Group - Target RDF Group name l Target MV Session - Target MV session identifier l Storage Group - Name of storage group l Vendor Status - Status as retrieved from the storage array l Execution Time - Time that replication was executed l Last Recovery Time - Last recovery time l Relevant - Indicates whether relevant l Alert - Recoverability alert Recoverability Excludes Returns the gaps that have been excluded from recoverability reporting by client in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Excludes data source. l Client - Client for the managed object l Path - Path to the managed object l Storage Array - Name of the storage array where the object is located l Replication Method - Method by which the object is replicated l Gap - Type of gap excluded Recoverability Replicated Object Storage Mapping 397 Reports by System Template l exclude id - Exclude identifier l Replication Method Ed - Replication method identifier l reason id - Reason identifier l User - User who created the exclusion l Date - Date of exclusion l Approver - DPA user who approved the exclusion l Expiration - Timestamp on which the exclusion expires l Comments - User comments Recoverability Exposures Summary Summary of recoverability exposures in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Gaps data source. l Category - Category of exposure l Gap - Reason why the gap was triggered l Group - DPA group, if applicable l Host - Host for the replicated object l Path - Path to the replicated object. The path will depend on the replicated object type (for example, a directory path for a file system, or an application storage object) l Replicated Object - Identifier for the replicated object l Replication Method - Method by which the object is replicated l Issued - Indicates when the gap was issued l RP Time - Time the gap was triggered l Storage Array - Source storage array for the replicated object l Severity - Severity of the exposure l Gap Details - Additional details on the gap l GAP_REPORT_RP_ID - l GAP_REPORT_storage array_ID - l GAP_REPORT_GAP_ID - l GAP_REPORT_replication method_ID - l GAP_REASON_ID - l GAP_REPORT_ACTUAL_PATH - l GAP_REPORT_NODE_ID - Recoverability Gaps Returns recoverability gap details in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Gaps data source. 398 l Category - Category of exposure l Gap - Reason why the gap was triggered l Group - DPA group, if applicable EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Host - Host for the replicated object l Path - Path to the replicated object. The path will depend on the replicated object type (for example, a directory path for a file system, or an application storage object) l Replicated Object - Identifier for the replicated object l Replication Method - Method by which the object is replicated l Issued - Indicates when the gap was issued l Replication Time - Time the gap was triggered l Storage Array - Source storage array for the replicated object l Severity - Severity of the exposure l Gap Details - Additional details on the gap l GAP_REPORT_RP_ID - l GAP_REPORT_storage array_ID - l GAP_REPORT_GAP_ID - l GAP_REPORT_Replication Method_ID - l GAP_REASON_ID - l GAP_REPORT_ACTUAL_PATH - l GAP_REPORT_NODE_ID - Recoverability Host Analysis Status Returns recoverability host analysis status details in a table report. Uses data form the Recoverability Host Analysis Tasks data source. l task id - Identifier for the task l Node - DPA object on which the task is run l Task Name - Name for the task l Start Date - Date task began l End Date - Date task completed l Status - Completion status of the task l Run Id - Run identifier l Ret Code - Return code Recoverability Obsolete Recovery Points Returns the recovery points that have been rendered out of date by changes in the source in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Obsolete Recovery Points data source. l Service - DPA group in the view l Client - Client for the managed object l Replicated Object - Identifier for the object being replicated l Storage Array - Identifier for the engine source of the object l Storage Array Type - Type of engine. For example, Symmetrix l Replication Method - Method by which object was replicated Recoverability Host Analysis Status 399 Reports by System Template l Status - Status of the recovery point. For example, valid, invalid l Time - Timestamp of the recovery point l RP_ID - Recovery point identifier Recoverability Replication Configuration Returns recoverability replication configuration details in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Replication Configuration data source. l Server - Name of the server on which the managed object is located l Protected Object - Name of the file system or application being replicated l Type - Type of backup object. For example, file system, database, application l Source Storage Array - Name of the engine for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the engine where the source object is located l Replication Method - Method by which object is replicated l Target Storage Array- Name of engine where the source is being replicated l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Hop - Number for the hop associated with the replication Server to Storage Configuration Returns recoverability server to storage mappings details in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Server To Storage Mappings Tabular data source. l Server - Name of the server containing the backup object l Type - Type of backup object. For example, file system, database, application l Protected Location - Name of the object l Disk - Physical name of the device on the server containing the object l VG - Name of the Volume Group on the host associated with the object l LV - Name of the Logical Volume associated with the object l Storage Array - Name of the storage array containing the physical device. For example, a storage array l Storage Array Device - Name of the device on the storage array used by the object Recoverability Server To Storage Mappings Topology Returns recoverability server to storage mappings details in a topology report. Uses data from the Recoverability Server To Storage Mappings Topology data source. 400 l Type - l ToolTip - l Node - Name of the object l Source - Source of the view l Label - Name of the field returned l Name - Name of the object EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Target - Name of the target l Group - Name of the backup group Recoverability Status Returns recoverability status details in a health status report. Uses data from the Recoverability Recovery Points data source. l Host - Server on which the replicated object is located l Status - Status of the recovery point: valid, invalid Recoverability Status By Object Returns recoverability status by object, which is the scope selected, in a health status report. Uses data from the Recoverability Recovery Points data source. l Status - Status of the scope selected. Taken from the worst status of the Recovery Point that is part of the scope's decedents. The status can be valid, invalid l Object - Name of the Scope Recoverability Status Monitor By Client Returns recoverability status monitor by client in a health status report. Uses data from the Node Details and Recoverability Gaps data sources. l Client - Host for the replicated object l Num Gaps - Number of gaps Recoverability Storage To Server Mappings Topology Returns recoverability storage to server mappings in a topology report. Uses data from the Recoverability Storage To Server Mappings Topology data source. l Type - l ToolTip - l Node - Name of the object l Source - Source of the view l Label - Name of the field returned l Name - Name of the object l Target - Name of the target l Group - Name of the backup group Recoverability Tasks Returns recoverability task request information in DPA. Uses data from the Recoverability Tasks data source. l Node - The node the task runs on l Task Name - The task name l Start Date - Start of task Recoverability Status 401 Reports by System Template l Status - status of task Recoverability Unprotected Nodes Returns all of the objects that are not fully recoverable in a table report. Uses data from the Recoverability Unprotected File Systems data source. l Service - DPA group in the view l Host - Name of the server that the object is on l Replicated Object - Name of the object without a recovery point Recoverability Visualization Returns recoverability visualization in a topology chart. Uses data from the Recoverability Visualization data source. l Protected Object Name - Name of the protected object l Content -An xml representing the topology that is rendered to the UI l Managed Object Type -Type of the replicated object l Protected_Object_Parent_Name - hidden by default l Protected Object Inspected Object Id - hidden by default Recoverability Visualization Details Returns an overview for each Recovery Point in the system in a table chart. Uses data from the Recoverability Visualization Details data source. l Replication Status - In_Progress, Valid, SLA, Invalid, Deleted, Missing, Unknown l Status - Icon for the status of the Recovery Point (red, yellow, green) l Replicated Object - Name of the replicated object l Type - Type of the replicated object l Hop - Number for the hop associated with the replication l Storage Array - Storage array that contains this Recovery Point l Replication Method - Method of replication used l Recoverability Type - The type of the Recovery Point. Could be Crash Consistent or Recoverable. Applicable only to valid application based Recovery Points l Base Time - Time this Recovery Point can roll back to in respect to the protected object l Recovery-Point Name - name of the Recovery Point image (if exists) l RP-ID - (Hidden field) Remote Replication RPO for MV/A Returns remote replication RPO for MirrorView in a line chart. Uses data from the Conditional Report, Mirrorview Replication Lag, and System Variable data sources. 402 l Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the object l Name - Name of the file system or application being replicated l Duration - Total duration of the replication (in seconds) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l RPO - Recovery point objective (in seconds) l User-defined max RPO - l RPO Heuristic Threshold - Remote Replication RPO for SRDF/A Returns remote replication RPO for SRDF/A in a line chart. Uses data from the Conditional Report, SRDF/A Replication Lag, and System Variable data sources. l Storage Array - Name of the storage array where the object is located l RDFG Number - Number of the RDFG l Duration - Total duration of the replication (in seconds) l R2_behind_R1 - Replication lag (in seconds) l Default max RPO - l user-defined max RPO - Remote Replication RPO forecast for MV/A Returns trended forecast for remote replication for MirrorView objects in a line chart. Uses data from the Conditional Report, Mirrorview Replication Lag, and System Variable data sources. l Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the object l Name - Name of the file system or application being replicated l Duration - Total duration of the replication (in seconds) l RPO - Recovery point objective (in seconds) l User-defined max RPO - As specified in the Protection Policy l RPO Heuristic Threshold - Remote Replication RPO forecast for SRDF/A Returns trended forecast for remote replication for SRDF/A objects in a line chart. Uses data from the Conditional Report, SRDF/A Replication Lag, and System Variable data sources. l Storage Array - Name of the storage array where the object is located l RDFG Number - Number of the RDFG l Duration - Total duration of the replication (in seconds) l R2_behind_R1 - Replication lag (in seconds) l Default max RPO - l user-defined max RPO - As specified in the Protection Policy Replication RPO Compliance Returns an overview for compliance status for each Recovery Point in the system in a table. Uses data from the Replication RPO Compliance data source. l Compliance Status - Status of the compliance of the Recovery Point; for example, valid, invalid, N/A Remote Replication RPO for SRDF/A 403 Reports by System Template l Host - Host the Recovery Point resides on l Protected Object - Name of the protected object l Copy Type - Type of the replication method l Type - Type of the protected object; for example, file system, application l Target Copy - l Replication Method - l Replication Alerts - Number of alerts that are are associated to the Recovery Point l Compliance - (as a percentage) - Calculated by the formula: ((Current time minus the Time of the Recovery Point) divided by (RPO defined in the protection policy)) multiplied by 100 l Actual RPO - Calculated by the formula: Current time minus the Time of the Recovery Point l Required RPO - RPO defined in the protection policy l Target Copy Node ID - hidden by default l Target Copy Node Type - hidden by default Storage Replication Status Returns all storage replication and their status in a table. Uses data from the Storage Replication Status data source. l Source Storage Array - Name of the storage array for the source object l Source Device - Name of the device on the storage array where the source object islocated l Replication Method - Method by which the object has been replicated l Target Storage Array - Name of storage array where the source is being replicated l Target Device - Name of the device where the source is being replicated l Creation Time - Database creation time l Deletion Time - Time that the replication was overridden l Status - Replication status Resource Utilization system templates Resource Utilization reports display information on the utilization of devices managed by the backup server. DPA provides two methods of measuring utilization: 404 l Current utilization is a measure of the percentage of the existing data file that is occupied. l Logical utilization is a measure of the percentage that the existing contents of the maximum size to which the datafile can grow. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Aggregate Network Interface Performance Returns information on the performance of a network in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance data source. l Packets - Number of packets leaving the interface (thousands/second) Aggregate Virtual Network Interface Performance Returns information on the performance of a virtual network interface in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance data source. l Packets - Number of packets leaving the interface (thousands/second) BTD Storage Utilization By Node Returns information on storage utilization by object in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Configuration and VTL Status data sources. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Utilization - Amount of disk capacity used by the VTL (in GB) Backup Client Occupancy Returns backup client occupancy in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Logical and Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Physical data sources. l Client - Name of the backup client l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data Backup Client Occupancy by Pool Returns the amount of physical and logical storage used over a period of time for each client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy data source. l Pool - Storage pool which contains the client filespace l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data Backup Device Utilization by Device Returns the percentage of time that a tape drive is in used over time in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source data source. l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device Aggregate Network Interface Performance 405 Reports by System Template l Active - Throughput of the device when performing write operations (as a percentage) Backup Server Utilization Returns the percentage utilization of a backup server in a line chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Utilization data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Utilization - Percentage that the server is being utilized CG Utilization Returns information on Consistency Group utilization in a line chart. Uses data from Consistency Group Copy Performance. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the Consistency Group l Name - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Transfer Time - Percentage of time that the link was up l Initialization Time - Percentage of time that the link was initializing l High Load Time - Percentage time of High load Client Occupancy Summary Summary of the client occupancy details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Logical and Backup Client Occupancy By Client Physical data sources. l Client - Name of the backup client l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data Client Occupancy Trend Returns the client occupancy trend in a line chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Logical and Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Physical data sources. 406 l Client - Name of the backup client l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Current Memory Usage By Node Returns current memory usage by object in a column chart. Uses data from the Memory Configuration and Memory Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Total Memory - Total of the physical and virtual memory (in MB) l Used - Amount of memory in use on the machine (in MB) Data Domain Average Hourly Data Ingested Returns Data Domain average hourly data ingested in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance Write Throughput (MB) data source. l Hostname - Name of the client l Library Name - Name of the tape library to which the drive belongs l Avg. Data Ingested - Amount Count and Write Throughput (MB/second) Data Domain Boost Statistics Returns current data domain boost information in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Boost Statistics data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Pre Compression Received - Number of pre-compression KB/second received l Post Compression Received - Number of local compression KB/second received l Num Bytes Received - Number of physical network bytes/second received l Num Bytes Read - Number of bytes/second read Data Domain Boost Storage Unit Statistics Returns information on Data Domain Boost Storage Unit statistics in a table. Uses data from the Data Domain Boost Storage Unit Statistics. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Name - Storage unit name l Original Size - Storage unit original size (in MB) l Post Global Dedupe Size - Size after global deduplication (in MB) l Post Local Compression Size - Size after deduplication + local compression (in MB) l Metadata Size - Size of metadata (in MB) Data Domain Client Deduplication Ratio Returns information on Data Domain cilent deduplication ratios in a table. Uses data from the Deduplication Status data source. Note that the dedup ratio field in this report are based on metrics at the time that the data was ingested on the Data Domain. It is not possible to report on the physical size of files being stored on the Data Domain. This is a current limitation within Data Domain. Current Memory Usage By Node 407 Reports by System Template The deduplication value is multiplier of how many times smaller the post-dedup size is and calculates as pre-dedup divided by post-dedup. Note that in many cases exact numbers may not match between calculations and reports in a table because the size columns are auto-scaled and rounded to 3 decimal places. l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain l Client - Name of the client l Dedup Ratio - The percentage of data that has been de-duped; Deduplication ratio for client calculated as (Pre Deduplication/Post

Deduplication)-1/(Pre Deduplication/Post Deduplication l Post-Deduplication - Size after compression and deduplication l Pre-Deduplication- Size before compression and deduplication l Backup Application - the backup application associated with the backups Data Domain Compression Factor Returns the ratio for the size of data compressed against the original data size over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Access Group Configuration and VTL Status data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Compression Factor - Ratio of compressed data size to data backed up Data Domain Compression Ratio Count Returns a count per Compression Ratio threshold in a column chart report. Thresholds are Compression Ratio of below 5; between 5 and 10; and greater than 10. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l <5x - Count of occurrences of Compression Ratio value below 5. l 5x–10x - Count of occurrences of Compression Ratio value between 5 and 10. l >10x - Count of occurrences of Compression Ratio value above 10. Data Domain Daily Compression Statistics Returns Data Domain daily compression statistics in a line chart. Uses data from the Daily Compression Statistics data source. 408 l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Total Compression Factor - Difference between the Pre Compression Size and the Post Local Compression Size (in MB) l Dedupe Ratio - Difference between the Deduplication Ratio and the Total Compression Factor (as a percentage) l Global Compression Factor - Size after deduplication (in MB) l Local Compression Factor - Size after deduplication + local compression (in MB) l Reduction - (as a percentage) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Data Domain Data Ingested Returns information on Data Domain data ingested in a line chart over time. Uses data from the Data Ingested Usage data source. l Hostname - Name of the Data Domain l Pre Compression - Uncompressed data backed up by the system l Post Compression - Used space of file system "data" Data Domain Data Written To Returns data on the statistics of Data Domain daily compression in a table. Uses data from the Daily Compression Statistics data source. l Pre Compression Size - Size before compression (in MB) l Post Global Compression Size - Size after deduplication (in MB) l Post Local Compression Size - Size after deduplication + local compression (in MB) Data Domain DeDuplication Ratio Returns the ratio for the size of data deduplicated against the original data size over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Access Group Configuration and VTL Status data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Dedupe Ratio - Difference between the Deduplication Ratio and the Total Compression Factor (as a percentage) Data Domain File Distribution By Count Returns Data Domain file distribution by count. l DataDomain name - Data Domain host l Less than day - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of less than a day l 1 day-1week - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a day but less than a week l 1-2 weeks - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a week but less than 2 weeks l 2 weeks-1 month - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 2 weeks but less than a month l 1-2 months - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a month but less than 2 months l 2-3 months - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 2 months but less than 3 months l 3-6 months - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 3 months but less than 6 months l 6 months-1 year - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 6 months but less than a year Data Domain Data Ingested 409 Reports by System Template l Greater than year - Number of files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a year Data Domain File Distribution By Size Returns Data Domain file distribution by size. l DataDomain name - Data Domain host l Less than day - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of less than a day l 1 day-1 week - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a day but less than a week l 1-2 weeks - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a week but less than 2 weeks l 2 weeks-1 month - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 2 weeks but less than a month l 1-2 months - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than a month but less than 2 months l 2-3 months - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 2 months but less than 3 months l 3-6 months - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 3 months but less than 6 months l 6 months-1 year - Total size files on the Data Domain with an age of more than 6 months but less than a year l Greater than year - Total size files on the DataDomain with an age of more than a year Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Returns Data Domain utilization trend values over time in a line chart report. Uses data from the Filesystem Capacity by Client and Filesystem Status data sources. l Utilization- Data Domain filesystem utilization value (as a percentage) Data Domain Filesystem Utilization for Warning/Critical Systems Returns utilization values over time for Data Domains with high utilization in a trend report. A utilization value over 80% is considered as high. Uses data from the Filesystem Capacity by Client and Filesystem Status data sources. l Utilization - Utilization trend value for Data Domain over time. Data Domain Filesystem Utilization Status Count Returns an overall count for utilization status of Normal, Warning, or Critical in a column chart report. Uses data from the Filesystem Capacity by Client and Filesystem Status data sources. 410 l Normal - Count of occurrences of normal utilization values. A normal utilization value is considered as anything below 80%. l Warning - Count of occurrences of warning utilization values. Warning utilization value is considered as anything between 80%–90%. EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Critical - Count of occurrences of critical utilization values. Critical utilization value is considered as anything over 90%. Data Domain Low System Compression Ratio Trend Returns compression ratio values over time for Data Domains with low compression ratio in a trend report. A low Compression ratio is considered anything below 5. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Compression Ratio - Compression Ratio trend value for Data Domain over time. Data Domain Reduction Ratios Returns information on Data Domain reduction ratios in a line chart over time. Uses data from the VTL Status and Daily Compression Statistics data sources. l Hostname - Name of the Data Domain l Daily Backup Volume - Daily size before compression (in MB) l Daily Reduction - he daily reduction ratio achieved l Total Reduction - The total reduction ratio achieved Data Domain System Utilization Returns information on Data Domain system utilization in a line chart. Uses data from the Data Ingested Usage and Filesystem Capacity by Client data sources. l Hostname - Name of the Data Domain l Capacity - Total capacity of the file system "data" (in MB) l Pre Compression - Uncompressed data backed up by the system l Post Compression - Used space of file system "data" Data Domain Utilization Returns information on Data Domain utilization in a table. Uses data from Data Domain Modes, Filesystem Status, Filesystem Utilization by Client, and Filestystem Capacity by Client. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Capacity - Total capacity on the host (in MB) l Sub name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Used Capacity - Amount of space used on the file system (in MB) l Utilization - Average utilization for all hosts (as a percentage) l Free Capacity - Amount of free space on the file system (in MB) l Dedup Ratio - The dedup ratio that Data Domain is achieving l Last Days Change (GB)- The amount of space used per Data Domain in the 24 hours l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Data Domain Low System Compression Ratio Trend 411 Reports by System Template DataProtector Database Usage Returns Data Protector database usage in a line chart. Uses data from the Database Usage data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector Server l Database Name - Name of the internal database l Table Name - Name of the database table l Size - Size of the table (in MB) l Used Records - Number of records used in the table l Total Records - Number of total records allocated in the table DataProtector System Dynamics Returns Data Protector system dynamic details in a table report. Uses data from the System Dynamics data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector server l Client - Name of the Data Protector client l Num Filenames - Total number of filenames in the internal database l Num Active Filenames - Number of active filenames in the internal database l Num Created Per Day - Average number of files created per day (as a percentage) l Num Deleted Per Day - Average number of files deleted per day (as a percentage) l Active Growth Per Year - Growth in active filenames over the year (as a percentage) l Total Growth Per Year - Total growth in files over the year (as a percentage) l Dynamics - One of: Low, Medium, High, Critical EDL 3D Compression Ratio Returns the ratio for the size of data compressed against the original data size over time in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Data Compression Ratio - Ratio of compressed data size to data backed up EDL 3D DeDupe Queue Returns the EDL 3D deduplication queue in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. 412 l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Waiting for Dedup - VTL is waiting for deduplication to begin (in MB) l Wont be Deduped - VTL will not be deduplicated (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template EDL 3D Total Reduction Ratio Returns EDL 3D total reduction ratio in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Total Reduction Ratio - Ratio of data protected to data backed up Fabric Utilization Returns fabric utilization in a pie chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Status data source. l Count - Port count Fibre Channel Port Utilization Returns the utilization of Fibre Channel ports in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port and Fibre Channel Port Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of server instance, if applicable l Port - Port identifier. For example, Port 1 l Data Out Utilization - Amount of data sent from the port (as a percentage) l Data In Utilization - Amount of data received by the port (as a percentage) Filesystem Aggregate Utilization Returns file system aggregate utilization details in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization data source. l Filesystem Utilization - Average file system utilization for all hosts (as a percentage) Filesystem Average Disk Activity Returns the average percentage of time that the disks are busy across all file servers from which the report has been run in a line chart. Uses data form the Filesystem Disk Activity and Filesystem Disk Status data sources. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Data Disks - l Data busy - (as a percentage) l Parity Disks - l Parity Busy - (as a percentage) EDL 3D Total Reduction Ratio 413 Reports by System Template Filesystem Average Disk Activity for ruleset Returns details filesystem average disk activity in a table report. Report for NetApp volume would benefit from more disks rule. Uses data from the Filesystem Disk Activity, Filesystem Disk Status, and User Input data sources. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Alert - Identifier of the alert Filesystem Disk Activity Returns the file system disk activity in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Disk Activity data source. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Sub Name - Name of the storage array on which the file system resides l Disk node - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Disk - Name of the disk l Busy - Average activity level for the disks (as a percentage) Filesystem Peak Snapshot Utilization Returns file system peak snapshot utilization in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Peak Snapshot Utilization - (as a percentage) l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Filesystem Snapshot Utilization Returns file system snapshot utilization in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Snapshot Utilization - (as a percentage) l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Filesystem Utilization Returns the utilization of all file systems on a host or group of hosts over time in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. l 414 Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Space Usage - Amount of space used on the file system (in MB) l Inode Usage - (1000) l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Files - Maximum number of files on the file system (1000) l Space Utilization - (as a percentage) l Inode Utilization - (as a percentage) l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Filesystem Utilization By Node Returns the average file system utilization on a host over time by averaging the utilization across all file systems on that host in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization By Client data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Utilization - Average file system utilization for each host (as a percentage) Filesystem Utilization By Partition Returns file system utilization by partition in a line chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization By Partition data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Utilization - Average file system utilization for the file system (as a percentage) Filesystem Utilization Current Returns the percentage of the existing data file that is occupied in a column chart. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization By Partition data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Utilization - Average file system utilization for the file system (as a percentage) Filesystem Utilization for ruleset Returns details on the filesystem utilization in a table report. Report for Filesystem utilization high and increasing rule. Uses data from the Filesystem Utilization By Partition and User Input data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Filesystem - Name of the file system Filesystem Utilization By Node 415 Reports by System Template l Alert - Identifier of the alert HP VLS Capacity Utilization Trend Returns HP Virtual Library System capacity utilization trend in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Physical Capacity Utilization - Percentage usage of physical capacity l Logical Capacity Utilization - Percentage usage of logical capacity HP VLS Throughput Returns Virtual Library System throughput in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Throughput - Device throughput (MB/second) l Replication Throughput In - Inbound replication throughput (MB/second) l Replication Throughput Out - Outbound replication throughput (MB/second) MTree Daily Compression Statistics Returns MTree daily compression statistics in a table report. Uses data from the MTree Daily Compression Statistics data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Name - MTree name l Pre Compression Size - Size before compression (in MB) l Post Global Compression Size - Size after deduplication (in MB) l Post Local Compression Size - Size after deduplication + local compression (in MB) MTree Quota Utilization 'Returns the MTree quota utilization details per MTree in a line graph over time. Uses data from the Quota Configuration data source. l Pre Compression Soft Limit Utilization - The Pre Compression Size divided by the Soft Limit value, then this value is multiplied by 100 l Pre Compression Hard Limit Utilization - The Pre Compression Size divided by the Hard Limit value, then this value is multiplied by 100 MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Returns current statistics on Data Domain physical capacity. Uses data from the MTree Physical Capacity Statistics data source. Drilling down on the report returns statistics per MTree. 416 l Hostname - Name of the backup server l Name - Name of the MTree l Pre Compression Size - Size before compression EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Post Global Compression Size - Size after de-dupe l Post Local Compression Size - Size after compression l Measurement Time - Time at which the above statistics were taken from the MTree snapshot MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Trend Returns trend information on Data Domain physical capacity over time. Uses data from the MTree Physical Capacity Statistics data source. l Hostname - Name of the backup server l Name - Name of the MTree l Pre Compression Size - Size before compression l Post Global Compression Size - Size after de-dupe l Post Local Compression Size - Size after compression Memory Utilization Returns the aggregate memory utilization over time of memory on all hosts selected in the report in a line chart. Uses data from the Memory Configuration and Memory Status data sources. l Utilization - (as a percentage) Memory Utilization By Node Returns the utilization over time of memory on a per host basis in a line chart. Uses data from the Memory Configuration and Memory Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Used - Amount of memory in use on the machine (in MB) l Utilization - (as a percentage) Memory Utilization Current Returns the percentage of the existing data file that is occupied in a column chart. Uses data from the Memory Configuration and Memory Status data sources. l Utilization - (as a percentage) Network Interface Performance By Interface Returns network interface performance by interface in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) MTree Physical Capacity Statistics Trend 417 Reports by System Template l Packets In - Number of packets coming in to the interface (1000s/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets leaving the interface (1000s/second) l Data - (KB/second) l Packets - (1000s/second) Network Interface Performance By Node Returns network interface performance by object in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Data - (KB/second) l Packets - (1000s/second) Network Interface Performance Summary This report shows the maximum and average throughput by network interface, and performance in kilobytes per second by interface. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Max Throughput - (KB/second) l Average Throughput - (KB/second) Network Interface Utilization By Interface and Direction Returns network interface utilization by interface and direction in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface and Network Interface Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Data In Utilization - Amount of data coming into the interface (as a percentage) l Data Out Utilization - Amount of data leaving the interface (as a percentage) NetWorker VBA Utilization Returns information on NetWorker Virtual Basic Appliance (VBA) utilization in a table. Uses data from the VBA Configuration and VBA Status data sources. 418 l Server - Name of the Networker server l Name - Name of the VBA l Total Capacity - Total capacity (MB) l Used Capacity - Used capacity of the VBA (MB) l Capacity Utilization - Percentage usage of total capacity EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Process CPU Utilization Returns the CPU utilization of all processes running on a machine over the report’s time period in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Status data source. l Hostname - Name on which the process is running l PID - Identifier of the process l Process Name - Name of the process l CPU - Amount of CPU used by the process (as a percentage) Process CPU Utilization For Specific Process Returns the utilization of CPUs for specific processes over a period of time in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Status data source. l Hostname - Name on which the process is running l PID - Identifier of the process l Process Name - Name of the process l CPU - Amount of CPU used by the process (as a percentage) Process Memory Usage Returns the memory usage of processes running on a machine in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Status data source. l Hostname - Name on which the process is running l PID - Identifier of the process l Process Name - Name of the process l Memory - Amount of memory used by the process (in MB) RecoverPoint Journal Utilization Returns the percentage journal utilization (journal usage of total journal capacity) over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Status data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the Copy l Journal Utilization - Current utilization of the journal (as a percentage) System Statistics RAG Returns system statistics Red, Amber, Green (RAG) traffic-light style report details in a health status report. Uses data from the Disk Activity By Device, Network Interface Status, Network Interface Performance By Interface, Memory Status, Filesystem Utilization By Partition, Processor Utilization By Client, and Memory Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host l CPU - Utilization on the CPU (as a percentage) Process CPU Utilization 419 Reports by System Template l Memory - Utilization on the memory (as a percentage) l Node - Name of the object l Disk - Utilization on the disk (as a percentage) l Filesystem - Utilization on the file system (as a percentage) l Net In - Net utilized in (as a percentage) l Net Out - Net utilized out (as a percentage) TSM Client Occupancy Summary Summary of TSM client occupancy details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Logical, Backup Client Occupancy By Client Physical, and TSM Total Logical Occupancy data sources. l Client - Name of the backup client l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data TSM Database Utilization Returns the utilization of the TSM database and recovery log over time in a line chart. Uses data from the TSM Database Utilization data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Object - One of: Database, Recovery Log l Utilization - Utilization of the assigned capacity (as a percentage) TSM Storage Pool Utilization Returns the utilization of storage pools over time against the high migration point and low migration point values. Uses data from the Backup Pool Configuration and Backup Pool Status data sources. This report allows users to see how close pool utilization is to the migration thresholds. 420 l Server - Hostname of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Utilization - Percentage of storage pool utilized l High Mig. Pct - Value at which the TSM server automatically starts migration for this storage pool. This value is determined when the number of volumes containing data reaches this percentage of the total number of volumes in the storage pool. The total number of volumes includes the maximum number of scratch volumes l Low Mig. Pct - Value at which the TSM server stops migration for this storage pool. This value is determined when the number of volumes containing data reaches this percentage of the total number of volumes in the storage pool EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Returns the total utilization across all tape libraries in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration and Tape Library Status data sources. l Utilization - Number of slots that are occupied with tapes (as a percentage). This value is the combined utilization for all tape libraries managed by the ACSLS server Tape Library Aggregate Utilization Trend Returns the aggregate utilization across all tape libraries over a given time period in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration and Tape Library Status data sources. l Utilization - Number of slots that are occupied with tapes (as a percentage). This value is the combined utilization for all tape libraries managed by the ACSLS server Tape Library Capacity Utilization Returns tape library capacity utilization in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Physical Capacity Utilization - Percentage usage of physical capacity l Logical Capacity Utilization - Percentage usage of logical capacity Tape Library Compression Ratio Returns the size of data compressed against the original data size over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Data Compression Ratio - Ratio of compressed data size to data backed up Tape Library Deduplication Ratio Returns the size of data deduplicated against the original data size over time in a line chart. Uses data form the Tape Library Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Dedupe Ratio - Difference between the Deduplication Ratio and the Total Compression Factor (as a percentage) Tape Library Aggregate Utilization 421 Reports by System Template Tape Library Slot Utilization Trend Returns the utilization of each tape library at a point in time and trended over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Num Volumes and Tape Library Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Slot Utilization - Tape Library Throughput Returns tape library throughput details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Replication Throughput In - Inbound replication throughput (MB/second) l Replication Throughput Out - Outbound replication throughput (MB/second) Tape Library Usage By Library Returns tape library usage by library details in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration and Tape Library Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Num Volumes - Number of volumes in the library l Num Empty Slots - Number of empty slots Tape Library Utilization Returns the utilization of each individual tape library at a point in time in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration and Tape Library Status data sources. 422 l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Utilization - (as a percentage) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Tape Library Utilization Trend Returns the utilization trend of each individual tape library at a point in time in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Configuration and Tape Library Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Utilization - (as a percentage) Tape Library Volume Utilization Trend Returns the utilization of each tape library volume over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Volume Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Utilization - (as a percentage) Top 10 Offending Clients Returns the top ten offending clients in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Device Status, Backup Job Details, Backup Job Media, and Pools On Data Domain data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client - Name of the client backed up l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain l De-Dupe Ratio - (as a percentage) Top 10 Offending Jobs Returns the top ten offending jobs in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Device Status, Backup Job Details, Backup Job Media, and Pools On Data Domain data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Level - Level of the backup. This is hardcoded to full l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Data Domain Name - Name of the Data Domain Tape Library Utilization Trend 423 Reports by System Template l De-Dupe Ratio - (as a percentage) Top 5 Busiest Servers Returns the top five busiest servers in a table report. Uses data from the Processor Utilization By Client data source. l Node - Name of the host l CPU Utilization - Utilization on the CPU (as a percentage) VTL Aggregate Storage Utilization Returns VTL aggregate storage utilization details in a line chart. Uses data from the VTL Configuration and VTL Status data sources. l Utilization - (as a percentage) Virtual Fibre Channel Port Utilization Returns the utilization of virtual Fibre Channel ports in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port and Fibre Channel Port Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of server instance, if applicable l Port - Port identifier. For example, Port 1 l Data Out Utilization - Amount of data sent from the port (as a percentage) l Data In Utilization - Amount of data received by the port (as a percentage) Virtual Host Memory Utilization Returns virtual host memory utilization details in a line chart. Uses data from the Virtual Host Configuration and Virtual Host Status data sources. l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Memory Used - Amount of memory used by the virtual machine (in MB) l Utilization - Amount of memory utilization (as a percentage) Virtual Network Interface Performance By Interface Returns the virtual network interface performance by interface in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface data source. 424 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Data In - Amount of data coming into the interface (KB/second) l Data Out - Amount of data leaving the interface (KB/second) l Packets In - Number of packets coming in to the interface (1000s/second) l Packets Out - Number of packets leaving the interface (1000s/second) l Data - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Packets - Virtual Network Interface Performance By Node Returns the virtual network interface performance by object in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Data - Amount of data leaving the object (KB/second) l Packets - Number of packets leaving the object (1000s/second) Virtual Network Interface Performance Summary Summary of the virtual network interface performance in a column chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Max Throughput - (KB/second) l Average Throughput - (KB/second) Xsigo Infiniband Port Utilization Returns the percentage utilization of the Infiniband port or ports in a line chart. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Status and Infiniband Port Performance data sources. l Hostname - Name of the Xsigo Director object l Sub Name - Identifier for the switch l Name - Identifier for the InfiniBand port l Data In Utilization - Amount of data received (KB/second) l Data Out Utilization - Amount of data sent (KB/second) ROI system templates The return on investment (ROI) reports compare the costs of backing up an environment by traditional backup application compared to Avamar deduplication. Deduplication Cost Savings Returns the cost savings of an Avamar installation for each machine being backed up in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Status, Total Size, Total Size Scanned, and User Input data sources. The cost savings are calculated by looking at how much it would cost to fully protect each client using a traditional backup application compared to the cost to fully protect each client using Avamar. l Server - Hostname of the backup server l Client - l Data Backed Up - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Data Protected - (in GB) Virtual Network Interface Performance By Node 425 Reports by System Template l Cost/GB for backups - Current cost to back up a single gigabyte of data in the environment l Cost of Deduplicated Backups - l Cost of Traditional Backups - l Cost Saving Due to Deduplication - Deduplication ROI Trend Returns the ROI (return on investment) for an Avamar installation over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Backup Server Status, Total Size, Total Size Scanned, and User Input data sources. The return on investment is calculated by looking at how much it would cost to fully protect the environment using a traditional backup application compared to the cost to fully protect the environment using Avamar. l Purchase cost - Total cost of the Avamar installation. This is the cost against which the savings are balanced to show overall ROI. l Cost of Deduplicated Backups - l Cost of Traditional Backups - l Cost Saving Due to Avamar - l Return on Investment - The values are in units of currency. For example, if the cost of the Avamar installation is $10,000 and the cost of carrying out backups is 1 cent per gigabyte, enter 10,000 for Purchase cost and 0.01 for Cost/GB for backups. To obtain the best ROI information, run the report with a start time of when Avamar was first monitored and an end time of the current time. Scheduling system templates Scheduling reports display information on when backup Jobs were run and which devices were in use. The Scheduling reports are broken down into reports about the scheduling of backups and the scheduling of devices. Active Clone Job Distribution Returns the number of active (running) Jobs over time. Uses data from the Active Jobs data source. l Active Clones - Number of Jobs that are active Backup Active Job Distribution Returns information on the distribution of active backups in a column chart. Uses data from the Active Jobs data source. l Active Jobs - Number of active clone jobs Backup Client Schedule Returns backup client schedule in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and SLA Schedule Details data sources. This report is similar to the Job 426 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Schedule report. The difference is that information on jobs is rolled up on a per-client basis so that a row is displayed for each client. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Num Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Expiry Date - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job Backup Client Schedule 427 Reports by System Template l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num. Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num. Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy Schedule - Name of the schedule l Start Time - Start times for each schedule component l End Time - End times for each schedule component l Duration - Durations of each schedule component l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Device Scheduling Returns when devices are in use by analyzing performance information from the drives in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Performance From Best Source 428 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template data source. This report does not return data for backup applications that do not provide device performance information such as Symantec NetBackup. l Device Host - Name of the host that the device is connected to l Device Name - Name of the device l Write Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing write operations (KB/second) l Read Throughput - Throughput of the device when performing read operations (KB/second) Backup Device Shared Usage Returns backup device usage for shared devices in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Config and Backup Device Status data sources. This report can be used in shared storage environments to show the utilization of the underlying physical tape drive instead of looking at things from a host-centric view. This report will return no data in a non-shared environment. l Hardware Id - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service Backup Device Usage Returns details on the backup device usage in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Device Status data source. l Hardware ID - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service Backup Group Forecast Returns when groups are scheduled to run in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Avamar Group Forecast and NetBackup Group Forecast data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Group - Name of group associated with schedule l Schedule - Name of the schedule on the backup server l Start Time - Date and time a schedule run starts l End Time - Date and time a schedule run ends l Duration - Total duration of a run Backup Job Distribution Returns the total number of jobs completed over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. This report appears when jobs are completed on a backup server or on a set of clients. This report allows users to identify the busiest times during the backup window so that users can schedule backups at other times or plan outages. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed Backup Device Shared Usage 429 Reports by System Template Backup Job Distribution By Media Server Returns the total number of jobs by the media server for which the backup was performed completed over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Num Jobs - Number of jobs that have completed l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred Backup Job Forecast Returns the jobs that are expected to run between two times in a table reports. Uses data from the Avamar Job Forecast and NetBackup Job Forecast data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the backup Job will run l Group - Name of the backup group in which the Job is scheduled to run l Client - Name of the backup client on which the Job will run l Job - Name of the backup Job l Schedule - Name of the schedule associated with the forecasted Job l Scheduled Start - Time the Job is scheduled to start l Scheduled End- Time the Job is scheduled to end Backup Job Forecast versus Actual Returns the difference between the forecasted Jobs and the jobs that actually were run in a table report. Uses data form the Avamar Job Forecast, Backup Job Details, Backup Job Status, and NetBackup Job Forecast data sources. 430 l Server - Name of the backup server l Group - Name of the group or policy under which the Job is running l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job is running l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Attempts - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Scheduled Start - Start time of schedule l Scheduled End - End time of schedule EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Job Forecast versus Actual Summary Returns the difference between the forecasted Jobs and the jobs that actually were run in a table report. Uses data form the Avamar Job Forecast, Backup Job Details, Backup Job Status, and NetBackup Job Forecast data sources. l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Running - l [null]-N - l [others]-N - l [null]-A - l [others]-A - l Success - l Failed - l Completed - l Expected - l Missing - Backup Job Schedule Returns when individual Jobs on a client or backup server were run in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and SLA Schedule Details data sources. The Job Schedule report appears when backups of individual jobs are starting and completing. To display additional information on each job, move the cursor over a specific candle in the chart. To display whether a job was completed within a backup window in the job schedule report, enable service level reporting. Service level reporting is a system-wide attribute and must be enabled by an administrator. The EMC Data Protection Advisor Installation and Administration Guide provides more information. If the Job Schedule report runs after SLA Reporting is enabled, the following occurs: Jobs that completed within the backup window are marked in green, Jobs that completed out of the window are marked in red. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host Backup Job Forecast versus Actual Summary 431 Reports by System Template 432 l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Number of seconds waiting for the backup media l Total Reduction Ratio -The ratio for the size of data compressed and deduplicated against the original data size over time. l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Summary of the error codes associated with the backup l Status Code Summary - Status summary code of the backup job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Schedule - Name of the schedule l Start Time - Start times for each schedule component l End Time - End times for each schedule component l Duration - Durations of each schedule component l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Job Schedule For Specific Client Returns when clients are actively performing backups in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and SLA Schedule Details data sources. This report is similar to the Backup Job Schedule template. The difference is that information on jobs is rolled up on a per-client basis so that a row is displayed for each client. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of TSM Server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Client - Name of the client backed up l Job - Name of the Job backed up Backup Job Schedule For Specific Client 433 Reports by System Template 434 l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Err Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up l Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Archive Flag - Indicates whether Job was an archive or a backup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Total number of inline copies taken, if any l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Number of seconds waiting for the backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies l Total Size of Copies - Total size of copies (in MB) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Schedule - Name of the schedule l Start Time - Start times for each schedule component l End Time - End times for each schedule component l Duration - Durations of each schedule component l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - NetBackup job ID of the parent job l Is Snap - If job is a snapshot backup l Snap Target - Snap target/replication target l Snap Target Platform - Snap target platform type l Snap Policy - Snap replication policy name l Snap Creation Type - Snap creation type, either Managed or Discovered l Storage Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) Backup Size Distribution Returns the total amount of data completed over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. The Backup Size Distribution template is similar to the Job Distribution template but displays the amount of data that has been backed up over time on the graph. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) Backup Size Distribution By Media Server Returns the total amount of data being backed up, broken down by Media Server over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Total Size data source. The Backup Size Distribution by Media Server template is similar to the Backup Size Distribution template except that it displays information on when data was backed up. Backup Size Distribution 435 Reports by System Template This information is calculated by media server. This report is not available in NetWorker environments because it is not possible to determine to which media server a job was written after a backup completes. l Total Size - Total amount of data backed up (in GB) l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred Maintenance Job Schedule Returns maintenance job schedule details in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details, Clone Operations, and Maintenance Job Details data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Status - Status of the maintenance job: Success, Failed l Start Time - Time the job started l End Time - Time the job completed l Operation - l Job Type - Category of maintenance jobs under which this job is grouped TSM Server Side Process Scheduling Returns TSM server side process scheduling details in a timeline chart. Uses data from the Backup Job Details, TSM Migration, TSM Reclamation, TSM Database Backup, TSM Delete Volume, TSM Expiration, TSM Move, and TSM Storage Pool Copy data sources. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Status - Completion status of the migration process: Success, Failed l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed l Operation - TSM Storage Pool Migration Schedule Returns all of the migration jobs that have occurred grouped by storage pool in a timeline chart. Uses data from the TSM Backup and TSM Migration data sources. 436 l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been migrated l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template TSM Storage Pool Reclamation Schedule Returns all of the reclamation jobs that have occurred grouped by storage pool in a timeline chart. Uses data from the TSM Reclamation data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Storage Pool - Name of the storage pool from which data has been reclaimed l Start Time - Time the process started l End Time - Time the process completed Service Level Management system templates In a backup environment, they provide reports on the backup environment performance against a Service Level Agreement (SLA). Backup Daily Success Rate Returns the success rate of jobs that completed on the backup servers or clients in a column chart. Uses data from the Num Jobs data source. l Success Rate - Success rate of backups over the reporting period (as a percentage) Backup Jobs with Last Resolution Returns a list of all jobs on a backup server with resolution information in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job with Last Resolution and Backup Job Details data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of backup server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the backup or archive occurred l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the Job ran l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Client - Name of the client backed up l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Action - Name of the action l Job - Name of the Job backed up l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job TSM Storage Pool Reclamation Schedule 437 Reports by System Template 438 l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Orig Status - Original status of the backup job l Error Code - Error code from the backup application, if available l Status Code - Status code of the job from the backup application l Level - Level of the Job backed up: Full, Incr, User, Manual, Cumulative Incr, Differential Incr, 1-9 l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Storage Unit - Name of the Storage Unit to which a Job was backed up (Symantec NetBackup only) l Files - Number of files backed up l Num Files Not Backed Up - Number of files not backed up. This value is not available from all backup applications l Queued - Time the Job started queuing l Started - Time the Job started writing l Finished - Time the Job completed l Expires - Date that a Job will expire l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Transferred - Size transferred to server (in MB) l Backup Application - Name of the backup application that backed up the Job. For example, NetWorker, NetBackup l Pool - Backup pool in which the backup Job belongs l Tries - Number of attempts that took place before the Job completed l Number of Copies - Number of inline copies, if any l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Job ID 2 - NetBackup Job ID in the activity log l Owner - Owner of the backup job l Idle Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup client l Media Wait Time - Time Server spent waiting for backup media l Total Reduction Ratio - Total percentage of data compressed and deduplicated l Deduplication Reduction - Total percentage of data deduplicated l Restarted Job - Indicates if the job is a restarted job l Num Objects Deduplicated - Number of backup objects deduplicated l Effective Path - Effective path of the Backup l Error Code Summary - Error code summary associated with the error message l Status Code Summary - Status code summary from the job l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Num Successful Copies - Number of successful copies (including primary copy) l Num Failed Copies - Number of failed copies (including primary copy) l Total Size of Copies - Total size of all copies combines (including primary copy) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Bytes Modified Not Sent - (in bytes) l Bytes Modified Sent - (in bytes) l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - backup job ID of the parent job l Storage Job Id - Holds the job ID used for storage device identification (hidden field) l Duration - Duration that data should be backed up l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the backup window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the backup window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the backup window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the backup window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the backup window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its backup window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its backup window l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the backup window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the backup window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of backup is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the backup job is compliant with the data protection policy l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this backup job l Customer Contact - Name of the customer related to this remediation l Management Contact - Name of the manager related to this remediation l Current Status - Resolution status of the remediated backup l Reason - Reason specified in auto reconciliation resolution l Details - Additional details entered by the user when resolving the job l User - Name of the user who entered the resolution l Include in Any Calculations - If this backup is to be included in any calculations l Include in SLA Calculations - If this backup is to be included in SLA calculations l Entered - Date and time at which the resolution was added to a backup job l Custom1 - User-customizable field l Custom2 - User-customizable field l Custom3 - User-customizable field Backup Jobs with Last Resolution 439 Reports by System Template l Custom4 - User-customizable field l Custom5 - User-customizable field Clone SLA Status Returns details of backup jobs that have run within or outside permitted SLAs, and if a backup job was cloned within 24 hours of the backup job ending in a table. Uses data from the Clone Job Details, Backup Job Details, and Report Times data sources. 440 l Job Id - Identifier for the clone job l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies the cloned Job on the backup server on which the Job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the clone took place l Sub Name - Name of backup server instance l Group - Name of the group or policy in which the cloned Job took place l Schedule - Name of the schedule under which the clone ran l Client - Name of the client on which the Jobs were cloned l Action - Name of the action l Workflow - Name of the workflow l Workflow Job Id - Job ID associated with the workflow l Policy - Name of the protection policy l Job - Name of the cloned Job l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Backup Set - Name of the backup set associated with the job l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host l Backup Status - Status of the Job backed up: Success, Failed, Missed l Size - Size of the job (in MB) l Queue Start - Time the Job started queuing l Start Time - Time the Job started writing l End Time - Time the Job completed l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Clone Job - Name of the cloned Job l Clone Size - Size of the backup job associated with the clone job (in MB) l Clone Size Scanned - The size of the backup job associated with the clone job l Clone Start Time - Time that the clone operation started l Clone End Time - Time that the clone operation ended l Clone Id - Identifier for the cloned backup Job l Duration - Time the backup application took to complete the job l Success Flag - Internal field used to determine report row colours EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup SLA Summary Returns the success rate of jobs that completed on the backup servers or clients selected in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Backup Job Resolution data sources. l Jobs - Number of jobs that were completed l Successful - Number of jobs that were successful l Within SLA - Number of jobs that completed successfully within their backup window l % Successful - Percentage of jobs that were successful l % Within SLA - Percentage of jobs that were successful within their backup window Backup SLA Summary By Client This report is similar to the SLA Summary report, except that it returns a breakdown of the success rate on a per-client basis in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job Details and Backup Job Resolution data sources. l Client - Name of the client backed up l Jobs - Number of jobs that were completed l Successful - Number of jobs that were successful l Within SLA - Number of jobs that completed successfully within their backup window l % Successful - Percentage of jobs that were successful l % Within SLA - Percentage of jobs that were successful within their backup window Restore Jobs with Last Resolution Returns a list of all jobs on a backup server with resolution information in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Job with Last Resolution and Backup Job Details data sources. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this restore l App Job Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this restore job on the backup server on which the restore job ran l Server - Name of the backup server on which the restore took place l Sub Name - Name of backup server instance l Media Server - Name of the Media Server on which the Job was backed up l Backup Time - Time at which the data being restored was originally restored l Domain Name - Name of the domain associated with the group l Client - Name of the client being restored l Job - Name of the Job being restored l Session - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Proxy - Proxy backup host Backup SLA Summary 441 Reports by System Template 442 l Orig Status - Original status of the restore job l Err Code - Error code associated with the restore l Size - Amount of data backed up (in MB) l Size Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been restored l Size Scanned - Total size of the data scanned before deduplication (in MB) l Size Scanned Offset - Number of bytes that must be added to the Size Scanned field to be able to view the total number of bytes that have been scanned l Backup Application - Name of the backup application on which the restore occurred l Owner - Owner of the restore job l Num Files - Number of files restored l Retrieve Flag - If set, the retrieve flag indicates that this operation was a retrieve operation and not a restore operation (TSM only) l Backup Number - Number of the backup that is being restored l Number of Files - Number of files restored l Scanned - Size of the scanned and compressed file (in MB) l Plugin Name - Plug-in name l Group Job ID - ID of the group job instance l Parent Job ID - restore job ID of the parent job l Duration - Duration that data should be restored l Throughput - Throughput of size to duration (MB/sec) l Average File Size - Average size of each file l Retention - Retention days l Ran In Window - Indicates if the entire backup was in the restore window l Started In Window - Indicates if the backup started in the restore window l Finished In Window - Indicates if the backup finished in the restore window l Time In Window - Amount of time that the backup spent in the restore window (in seconds) l Time Out Of Window - Amount of time that the backup spent out of the restore window (in seconds) l Out Of Window Reason - Text string explaining why the restore Job was out of window. Only valid when the Ran In Window is FALSE. Can be one of: n Job started out of window - Job started outside of its restore window n Job finished out of window - Job finished outside of its restore window l Trailing Space In Window - Amount of time before the end of the restore window the Job finished (in seconds). Only valid when Started In Window is TRUE l Leading Space In Window - Amount of time after the start of the restore window the Job started (in seconds). Only valid when Finished In Window is TRUE l Valid Level - Indicates if the level of restore is valid l Valid Retention - Indicates if the Retention Period is valid l Compliant - Indicates if the restore job is compliant with the data protection policy EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Policy Used - Indicates if a data protection policy applies to this restore job l Group - Name of the group or policy under which the Job is running l Customer Contact - Name of the customer related to this remediation l Management Contact - Name of the manager related to this remediation l Current Status - Resolution status of the remediated restore l Reason - Reason specified in auto reconciliation resolution l Details - Additional details entered by the user when resolving the job l User - Name of the user who entered the resolution l Include in Any Calculations - If this restore is to be included in any calculations l Include in SLA Calculations - If this restore is to be included in SLA calculations l Entered - Date and time at which the resolution was added to a restore job l Custom1 - User-customizable field l Custom2 - User-customizable field l Custom3 - User-customizable field l Custom4 - User-customizable field l Custom5 - User-customizable field Status system templates Status reports allow users to query the current status of devices managed by the backup server and any pending mount requests that the devices have outstanding. ACSLS ACS Status Returns the status of ACS on an ACSLS Server in a table report. Uses data from the ACSLS ACS Status data source. l Server - Name of the host on which ACSLS is running l Name - Name of the ACS l State - Current state of the ACSLS Software: Diagnostic, Offline, Offline Pending, Online, Recovery l Current Audit Requests - Number of audit requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Audit Requests - Number of audit requests that are pending on the server l Current Mount Requests - Number of mount requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Mount Requests - Number of mount requests that are pending on the server l Current Dismount Requests - Number of dismount requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Dismount Requests - Number of dismount requests are pending on the server l Current Eject Requests - Number of eject requests that are in progress on the server Status system templates 443 Reports by System Template l Pending Eject Requests - Number of eject requests are pending on the server ACSLS Lock Status Returns information on locks for ACSLS drives and volumes in a table report. Uses data from the ACSLS Lock Status data source. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the ACSLS server l Lock ID - Identifier for the lock l Type - Lock target type: Drive, Volume l Identifier - Identifier for the locked target l Duration - Duration of the lock (in seconds) l Pending - Number of locks pending on the target l Status - Current status of the target. For example, in use l User ID - Identifier for the lock owner ACSLS Port Status Returns information on the current status of ACSLS Ports in a table report. Uses data from the ACSLS Port Status data source. l Server - Name of host on which ACSLS is running l Port - Address of the ACSLS Port, which is a combination of the ACS and Port fields. For example, 0,0 l Name - Name of the ACSLS port. For example, /dev/mchanger1 l State - State of the port: Online, Offline ACSLS Server Status Returns the current status of an ACSLS Server in a table report. Uses data from the ACSLS Server Status data source. 444 l Server - Name of the host on which the ACSLS is running l State - Current state of the ACSLS Software: Idle, Idle pending, Recovery, Run l Current Audit Request - Number of audit requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Audit Requests - Number of audit requests that are pending on the server l Current Mount Requests - Number of mount requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Mount Requests - Number of mount requests that are pending on the server l Current Dismount Requests - Number of dismount requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Dismount Requests - Number of dismount requests are pending on the server l Current Eject Requests - Number of eject requests that are in progress on the server l Pending Eject Requests - Number of eject requests are pending on the server EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Backup Client Physical Occupancy Returns backup client physical occupancy details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy By Client - Physical data source. l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active Backup Client Status Returns the backup client status details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Status data source. l Server - Server on which the backup client resides l Client - Name of the client backed up l Responding - If selected, indicates that the backup client is responding l Daemon Running - If selected, indicates that a daemon is running on the backup client l No IP Address - Indicates if the IP address of a client can be resolved or not Backup Device Downed Devices Returns details of downed backup devices in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Control - Robot/Drive control information l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service l Errors - Error count on the device as reported by the backup software l Volume Id - Label of any volume loaded in the drive l Activity - Activity, if any, which the device is undertaking: Read, Write, Mount, Dismount, Label, Idle l Session - Number of sessions simultaneously accessing the device l Throughput - Device throughput (KB/second) Backup Device Errors Returns backup device error details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Errors data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Storage Node l Device Host - Name of the NetBackup Storage Node l Device Name - Name of the device l Error Type - Type of error that has occurred. For example, TAPE_ALERT, WRITE_ERROR Backup Client Physical Occupancy 445 Reports by System Template l Volume - Volume that was loaded in the drive at the time the error occurred l Data - Additional information associated with the error l Timestamp - Time that the error occurred Backup Device Status Returns details of all backup devices in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Device Config and Backup Device Status data sources. 446 l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Host - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the device in the backup software l Device Path - Operating system path to the device l Device Class - Class of device: Disk, Tape l Jukebox - Name of the jukebox in which the device is located l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Read Only - Indicates if the drive is configured as read-only: Yes, No l Hardware Id - Identifier such as the device serial number that uniquely maps it to a physical device l Firmware - Firmware version of the device l Media Manager Path - Operating system path to the media manager l Num Target Sessions - Number of target sessions l Send/Receive Timeout - Send and receive timeout l Num Retries - Number of retries l Network Retry Interval - Network failure retry interval (in seconds) l Compression - Indicates if compression is enabled l Encryption - Indicates if encryption is enabled l Max Errors - Maximum number of errors l Device Access - Device access information l Control - Robot/Drive control information l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service l Errors - Error count on the device as reported by the backup software l Volume Id - Label of any volume loaded in the drive l Sessions - Number of sessions when a volume is present and mounted in the device l Throughput - Device throughput (KB/second) l Firmware - Firmware version of the device l Soft Read Errors - l Hard Read Errors - l Hard Write Errors - l Status - Status of the drive: Up, Down, Service EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Volume - Label of any volume loaded in the drive l Speed - l State - l Loop Id - l Num Loads - l Cleaning Required - Backup Pool Status Returns the backup pool status details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Pool Status data source. l Server - Name of backup server on which the pool is located l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Pool Name - Name of the storage pool l Pool Type - Type of storage pool: Primary, Copy, Active Data l Pct Migration - Percentage of data in storage pool that can be migrated l Migration running - Indicates if at least one migration process is active for the storage pool l Amount Migrated - Amount of data currently migrated from the storage pool (in MB) l Elapsed Migration Time - Depending on migration activity, indicates the following (in seconds): n If migration is active, this indicates the amount of time elapsed since migration began. n If migration is not active, this indicates the amount of time required to complete the last migration. n If multiple parallel migration processes are used for the storage pool, this indicates the total time from the beginning of the first process until the completion of the last process. l Reclamation Running - Indicates if a reclamation process is active for the storage pool l Num Scratch Volumes Used - Number of scratch volumes used in the storage pool l Space Trigger Utilization - Utilization of the storage pool, as calculated by the storage pool space trigger, if any, for this storage pool (as a percentage) l Duplicate Data - Amount of data that was removed from the storage pool by the reclamation process. This field also represents the amount of storage space that was saved in the storage pool as a result of server-side data deduplication. l Percentage Duplicate Data - (as a percentage) Backup Server Error Summary Summary count of the most common errors a backup server has encountered in a column chart. It also provides details on errors and warnings that have occurred on a backup server. Uses data from the Application Errors data source. l Error - Error code of the message: message prefix, message number, message type Backup Pool Status 447 Reports by System Template l Count - Number of errors Backup Server Status Returns backup server status details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Server Status data source. l Server - Name or IP Address of the backup server l Utilization - Percentage that the server is being utilized l Used Raw - Identifies how much of the raw capacity is used (in MB) l Used Capacity - Identifies how much of the capacity is used (in TB) Backup Unavailable Device Count for ruleset Returns details about unavailability of backup devices in a table report. Report for Many backup devices unavailable rule. Uses data from the Backup Device Status and User Input data source. l Unavailable Count - l Maximum Number of Downed Devices - l Alert - Identifier of the alert Battery Status Returns battery status details in a table report. Uses data from the Battery Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Identifier for the battery l Status - Current status of the battery l Charge - Charge remaining on the battery Battery Summary Summary of the battery details in a column chart. Uses data from the Battery Status data source. l Count - Number of batteries BTD Capacity Returns information on BTD capacity in a column chart. Uses data from the VTL Status and VTL Configuration data sources. 448 l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Capacity - Disk capacity of the VTL (in MB) l Used - Amount of disk capacity used by the VTL (in GB) l Space Eligible for Trunc - Amount of data eligible for truncation (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template BTD Health Status Returns the health status in a column chart. Uses data from the Fan Status, Network Interface Status, Tape Library Status, Tape Drive Status, Disk Status, Thermometer Status, and PSU Status data sources. l Status - Current status of a drive l Count - Number of devices l Type - Type of device BTD Usage Returns information on the Backup To Disk (BTD) usage in a column chart. Uses data from the VTL Status data source. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Dedup Reduced - Size of data backed up after deduplication (in MB) l Waiting for Dedup - VTL is waiting for deduplication to begin (in MB) l Wont be Deduped - VTL will not be deduplicated (in MB) l System Metadata - Amount of disk space used by the system (in MB) l Space Eligible for Trunc - Amount of data eligible for truncation (in MB) Card Status Returns card status details in a table report. Uses data from the Card Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Adaptor - Identifier for the adaptor l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l State - State of the storage processor l Used Memory Size - Size of the memory being used (in MB) l Read Cache State - Status of the read cache l Write Cache State - Status of the write cache Celerra Replication Status Returns Celerra replication status details in a table report. Uses data from the Celerra Replication Performance and Celerra Replication Status data sources. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the EMC Celerra being monitored l Name - Name of the replication set l Network Status - Status of the network link being used by the replication set l Source Status - Status of the source of the replication set l Destination Status - Status of the target of the replication set l Last Synch Time - Date and time that the data on either side of the replication link was last synchronized BTD Health Status 449 Reports by System Template Client Occupancy Returns client occupancy details in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy data source. l Server - Name of the server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client l Type - Type of data stored: Backup, Archive, HSM l Filespace - Name of client filespace l Pool - Storage pool which contains the client filespace l Filespace ID - ID of the client filespace l Files - Number of active files l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace. Physical space includes space that is no longer active itself, but is included in a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is space used by active data Client Occupancy by Server Trend Returns information on client occupancy value grouped by server over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy by Server data source. This report returns data for CommVault Simpana, TSM, NetBackup, NetWorker, PureDisk, and Data Protector. l Server- Name of the Backup Server l Occupancy (MB) - Amount of storage used Cluster Resource Status Returns cluster resource status details in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Status data source. 450 l Id - Identifier for the cluster resource l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the disk array l Cluster Name - Name of the cluster l Name - Name of the cluster l Group - Name of the group l Type - Type of cluster: Host, IP, Filesystem, Application, Net l Provider - Resource host l State - State of the cluster: OK, Warning, Failed, Offline, Unknown l Version - Version of the software l Verbose State - EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Cluster Status for Cluster Returns cluster status for cluster details in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Status data source. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the disk array l Name - Name of cluster l Active Host - Name of the active host l State - State of the cluster: OK, Warning, Failed, Offline, Unknown l Log Size - Size of log (in bytes) l Verbose State - Collector Status for ruleset Returns details of the alerts for collector errors, log messages, and collectors that have failed in a table report. Uses data from the DPA Status, Process Log, Registered Collectors, and Request History data sources. l Alert - Identifier of the alert l Server - Name of the Server running the agent: DPA l Hostname - Name of the host on which the DPA Data Collection Agent is installed Data Domain Active Streams Returns the Data Domain active streams in a line chart. Uses data from the Data Domain Active Streams data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Active Read Streams - Number of active read file streams l Active Write Streams - Number of active write file streams l Re Opened Read Streams - Re-opened read file streams in the past 30 seconds l Re Opened Write Streams - Re-opened write file streams in the past 30 seconds Data Domain Boost Option Status Returns the Data Domain boost option status in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Boost Option Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Name - Option name. For example, distributed-segment-processing, virtualsynthetics l Status - Option value. For example, enabled Data Domain Filesystem Archive Unit Status Returns status information on the Data Domain filesystem archive unit in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Filesystem Archive Unit Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host Cluster Status for Cluster 451 Reports by System Template l Name - File system archive unit name l State - State of the archive unit: New, Target, Sealed l Status - Status of the archive unit: Ready, Disabled l Unit Size - Size of the archive unit (in MB) l Disk Group - Disk groups l Start Time - Archive unit start time l End Time - Archive unit end time Data Domain Filesystem Cleaning Status Returns information on the status of Data Domain filesystem cleaning in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Filesystem Cleaning Status data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of Data Domain l Status- Data Domain Filesystem clean status l Schedule- Data Domain Filesystem clean schedule l Throttle- Data Domain Filesystem clean throttle Data Domain Filesystem Options Returns information on the Data Domain filesystem options in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Filesystem Options data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Name - File system option name. For example, Local compression type, App optimized compression, Current global compression type l Value - Option value. For example: lz, none, 9 Data Domain Modes Returns current Data Domain mode information in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain Modes data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Backup Mode - Indicates if backup mode is enabled or disabled l Extended Retention Mode - Indicates if archive mode is enabled or disabled l VTL Mode - Indicates if VTL mode is enabled or disabled Data Domain System Capacity Licenses Returns information on Data Domain system capacity licenses in a table report. Uses data from the Data Domain System Capacity Licenses data source. 452 l Hostname - Name of the host l Key - Key name l Feature - Feature for the license. For example, DDBOOST, REPLICATION, VTL l Model - Model for the feature of the license l Capacity - Capacity of the model EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Data Domain System Licenses Returns Data Domain system license details in a table. Uses data from the Data Domain System Licenses data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Key - Key name l Feature - Feature for the license. For example, DDBOOST, REPLICATION, VTL Data Domain System User Status Returns the Data Domain system user status details in a table. Uses data from the Data Domain System User Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l User - User name l UID - User identifier l Role - User role l Status - User status DataProtector Database Status Returns Data Protector database status details in a table report. Uses data from the Database Usage data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector Server l Database Name - Name of the internal database l Table Name - Name of the database table l Size - Size of the table (in MB) l Used Records - Number of records used in the table l Total Records - Number of total records allocated in the table l Utilization - Percentage of total records used DataProtector Datafile Usage Returns Data Protector datafile usage details in a table report. Uses data from the Datafile Usage data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector Server l Type - Type of data contained in the datafile l Directory - Location in file system of the datafile l Size - Size of the datafile (in MB) l Files - Number of files DataProtector Purge Preview Returns Data Protector purge preview details in a table report. Uses data from the Purge Status data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector Server Data Domain System Licenses 453 Reports by System Template l Client - Name of the Data Protector client l Num Filenames - Total number of filenames in the internal database l Num Estimated Obsolete - Estimated number of obsolete filenames in the internal database l Estimated Duration - Estimated duration of a database purge (in seconds) DataProtector Record File Usage Returns Data Protector record file usage details in a table report. Uses data from the Record File Usage data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector server l Type - Type of records the file contains l Directory - Location of the record file in the file system l Size - Used size of the record file (in MB) l Max Size - Maximum allocated size of the record file (in MB) l Utilization - Percentage used of the allocated size DataProtector Service Status Returns Data Protector service status details in a table report. Uses data from the Service Status data source. l Server - Name of the Data Protector server l Service Name - Name of the service l Status - Status of the service l Process ID - Process identifier Device Availability for ruleset Returns details of device availability in a table report. Report for Less than x% backup devices available rule. Uses data from the Backup Device Config, Backup Device Status, and User Input data sources. l Server - Name of the backup server l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Device Availability - Availability of the device l Alert - Identifier of the alert l Max Availability - Disk Array Status Returns disk array status details in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Array Status data source. 454 l Hostname - Hostname or IP address of the array l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Disk Array Name - Name of the disk array l Status - Current status of disk array EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l State - Indicates whether the disk array is enabled or not l Used - Indicates whether the disk array is in use (in GB) Disk Failed for ruleset Returns details on disk failures in a table report. Report for Disk failed for a number of hours rule. Uses data from the Disk Status data source. l Node - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Alert - Identifier of the alert Disk Status Returns disk status details in a table report. Uses data from the Disk Configuration and Disk Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the disk is attached l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Device - Name of the disk l Size - Size of the disk (in GB) l State - Current operational state of the disk: Online, Offline, Failed l Use - Use of the disk, if any: Data, Parity, Spare. Only valid if State is Online l Errors - Error count for disk l Allocated - Space allocated on disk for use (in GB) l Name - Identifier for the disk l Temperature - Current disk temperature (in Celsius) l Group Name - RAID group of disk l Status - Status of disk: Okay, Reconstruct, Resync, Unknown l Recon Percentage - Percentage of the disk reconstructed l Resynch Percentage - Percentage of the disk resynched l Remapped Blocks - Number of blocks remapped EDL Failover Status Returns EMC Disk Library failover status details in a table report. Uses data from the EDL Failover Status data source. l Hostname - Name or address of the EMC Disk Library host l Secondary - Name or address of the failover partner l Type - Failover configuration type l Self Check Interval - Interval between primary DL checks for software or hardware failure on itself (in seconds) l Heartbeat Interval - Interval between primary DL checks for software or hardware failure on itself (in seconds) l Recovery Setting - Time until automatic recovery attempted l State - Current failover state of the EMC Disk Library Disk Failed for ruleset 455 Reports by System Template Fan Status Returns fan status details in a table report. Uses data from the Fan Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the fan l Active - Indicates if the fan is currently active l Speed - Speed that the fan is rotating (revolutions/minute) l Normal Speed - Expected fan speed (revolutions/minute) l Level - Current activity level of the fan l Status - Status of the fan Fan Summary Summary of fan details in a column chart. Uses data from the Fan Status data source. l Count - Number of fans Fibre Channel Port Status Returns the Fibre Channel port status details in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Config and Fibre Channel Port Status data sources. 456 l Hostname - Name of the switch l Port - Name of the Fibre Channel port l Sub Name - If returning data for RecoverPoint, the name of site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located. Otherwise, the identifier for the Celerra Data Mover l Sub Name 2 - Name of RecoverPoint Appliance l Controller - Number of the controller l WWPN - World Wide Port Name for the Fibre Channel interface l Mode - Indicates if the port is a Target or Initiator l OS Device - Device name from which Fibre Channel port is visible on the operating system l Internal - Indicates if the Fibre Channel port is internal, that is, if the port is connected to internal hardware, and not a SAN l Type - Type of Fibre Channel port on the switch or HBA l Virtual - Indicates if the Fibre Channel port is virtual or physical l WWNN - World Wide Node Name of the Fibre Channel port l Auto Neg - Indicates if autonegotiation is enabled on this interface l Link Active - Indicates if the switch is connected to anything l Speed - Speed of the port (Mb/second) l Minimum Bandwidth - Minimum bandwidth of the interface (MB/second) l Administrative Link Up - Indicates if the port has been disabled by an administrator EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Fibre Channel Port Summary By Node Returns Fibre Channel port summary by object details in a table report. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Port Count By Node and Fibre Channel Port Status data sources. l Switch Name - Name of the switch l Total - l Used - l Free - l Utilization - (as a percentage) Fileserver Status Returns file server status details in a health status report. Uses data from the File server Status data source. l Node - Name of the file server l CIFS Status - Status of CIFS server l NFS Status - Status of NFS server Filesystem Disk Status Returns the file system disk status in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Disk Status data source. l Filesystem node - Name of the object to which the file system is attached l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Filesystem Sub Name - Name of the storage array on which the file system resides l Disk node - Name of the object to which the disk is attached l Disk - Name of the disk l Disk Sub Name - Name of the storage array on which the disk resides l State - Current operational state of the disk: Online, Offline, Failed l Use - Use of the disk, if any: Data, Parity, Spare. Only valid is State is Online. l Errors - Number of read and write errors on the disk Filesystem Quota Status Returns file system quota status details in a table report. Uses data from the Quota Configuration and Quota Status data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the EMC File Storage (Celerra) server l Filesystem - Description of the file system l Tree ID - Identifier for the tree l Path - Path of the tree l Type - One of: Tree, User, Group l Comment - User comments for the quota l User ID - Identifier for the user Fibre Channel Port Summary By Node 457 Reports by System Template l Windows Sids - Windows Security Identifier l Files Soft Limit - Soft file usage quota for the file system. If exceeded, a warning is sent to Windows clients l Files Hard Limit - Hard file usage quota for the file system. If exceeded, user requests for additional files (for example, creating a new file) are denied l Space Soft Limit - Soft space usage quota for the file system. If exceeded, a warning is sent to Windows clients (in MB) l Space Hard Limit - Hard space usage quota for the file system. If exceeded, user requests for additional space (for example, saving a file) are denied (in MB) l Files Used - Number of files used on the tree l Space Used - Amount of space used on the tree (in MB) l Files Time Left - Amount of grace period remaining after a File Softlimit breach before the File Hardlimit condition is triggered (in seconds) l Space Time Left - Amount of grace period remaining after a Space Softlimit breach before the Space Hardlimit condition is triggered (in seconds) l File Utilization - (as a percentage) l Space Utilization - (as a percentage) Filesystem Snapshot Status Returns file system snapshot status details in a table report. Uses data from the Checkpoint Status data source. l Server - Hostname or IP address of the server containing the file system l Checkpoint ID - Unique identifier for the checkpoint l Checkpoint Name - Name of the checkpoint l Checkpoint Time - Time at which the checkpoint was taken l State - State of the checkpoint: active, inactive, pending, restoring, other l Filesystem - Source file system for the checkpoint l Filesystem Size - Size of file system at the time checkpoint was taken (in MB) Filesystem Status Returns file system status details in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. 458 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Filesystem - Name of the file system l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Snapshot Capacity - Amount of space reserved for the use of snapshots (in MB). If the total amount of data stored for snapshots is higher than the amount of space reserved for snapshots, additional space is claimed from the volume itself l Used Space - Amount of space used on the file system (in MB) l Used Snapshot Space - Amount of space used for snapshots on the file system (in MB) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Utilization - (as a percentage) l Snapshot Utilization - (as a percentage) l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Filesystem Status Summary Summary of the file system status in a table report. Uses data from the Filesystem Configuration and Filesystem Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the file system is mounted l Capacity - Total space on the file system available for standard usage (in MB) l Snapshot Capacity - Amount of space reserved for the use of snapshots (in MB). If the total amount of data stored for snapshots is higher than the amount of space reserved for snapshots, additional space is claimed from the volume itself l Used Space - Amount of space used on the file system (in MB) l Used Snapshot Space - Amount of space used for snapshots on the file system (in MB) l Utilization - (as a percentage) l Snapshot Utilization - (as a percentage) l Cleanable Space - Amount of space that can be cleaned (in MB) Host Status Returns host status details in a table report. Uses data from the Host Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array l Startup Time - Time the host last rebooted l CPU Used - Amount of CPU used (as a percentage) l Memory Used - Amount of memory used (in MB) l Status - Status of the EMC File Storage (Celerra) device IP Duplex Mismatch for ruleset Returns details when IP duplex mismatch in a table report. Report for IP duplex mismatch rule. Uses data from the Network Link Pair Duplex data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Alert - Identifier of the alert iSCSI Status Returns information on a the status of iSCSI adapters on a object in a table report. Uses data from the iSCSI Status data source. An Error field appears if the iSCSI adapter is not online. l Node - Name of the object on which the iSCSI adapter exists l Name - Name of the iSCSI adapter l Online - Indicates if the iSCSI adapter is online Filesystem Status Summary 459 Reports by System Template l Error - iSCSI adapter errors LUN Status Returns LUN status details in a table report. Uses data from the LUN Status data source. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array on which the LUN resides l Name - Name of the LUN l Online - Indicates if this LUN is online l Mapped - Indicates if this LUN is mapped to any endpoints l Used Capacity - Space used on the LUN (in GB) l Allocated Capacity - Space allocated on the LUN (in GB) l Is Thin - Indicates whether the LUN is thin l Num Copies - Number of copies existing of the LUN l State - LUN online status l Access - Indicates whether the LUN is read/write or read only l No Single Point of Failure - Indicates if there is no single point of failure for the LUN l Auto Assignment - Indicates auto assignment is enabled l Auto Trespass - Indicates whether auto trespass is enabled l Private - Indicates whether the LUN is private l Read Cache - Indicates whether a read cache on the LUN is enabled l Variable Length Prefetch - Indicates whether variable length prefetch is enabled l Write Cache - Indicates whether a write cache on the LUN is enabled MTree Retention Lock Status Returns MTree retention lock status details in a table report. Uses data from the MTree Retention Lock Status data source. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Data Domain server l Name - Mtree name l Minimum Period - Minimum retention period l Maximum Period - Maximum retention period l Status - Mtree retention lock status Mirror Status Returns mirror status details in a table report. Uses data from the Mirror Status data source. l Node - Name of the object on which the mirror resides l Path - Path to the mirror l Mirror Status - Status of the mirror: n 460 Active - the mirror is synchronized with its source EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template n Updating - the mirror is currently updating from its source n Quiesced - the mirror is temporarily not updating from its source n Broken - the mirror is able to be used, and as such is not updating from its source n Unsynchronized - the mirror is not synchronized with its source l Last Update - Last time this mirror was set to update from the source l Update Size - Total size of the last update of this mirror (in KB) l Exposure - Current data exposure (in seconds) NetBackup Device Cleaning Status Returns NetBackup device cleaning status details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Device Cleaning data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup master server l Device Host - Name of the NetBackup Media Server to which the device is attached l Device Name - Name of the NetBackup device l Device Type - Type of device. For example, DLT, Ultrium-2 l Mount Time - Duration that the device has had volumes mounted in it (in seconds) l Frequency - Cleaning frequency of the drive in seconds; that is, how often it should be cleaned l Last Cleaned - Date and time that the device was last cleaned l Comment - Any comments associated with this device l Cleaning Required - Indicates if cleaning is required on this device NetBackup Disk Pool Status Returns NetBackup disk pool status details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Disk Pool Status data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Pool - Name of the disk pool l Status - Status of the disk pool l Administrative State - Administrative State: Up, Down l Internal State - Internal pool state: Up, Down NetBackup Disk Volume Status Returns NetBackup disk volume status details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Disk Volume Status data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Volume ID - Identifier for the volume l Used Space - Space used in the volume (in GB) NetBackup Device Cleaning Status 461 Reports by System Template l Num Read Mounts - Number of read mounts configured on the volume l Num Write Mounts - Number of write mounts configured on the volume l Read Streams - Number of read streams configured on the volume l Write Streams - Number of writer streams configured on the volume l Status - Active status of the volume l Administrative State - Administrative state of the volume l Internal State - Internal state of the volume: up, down NetBackup Storage Server Status Returns NetBackup storage server status details in a table report. Uses data from the NetBackup Storage Server Status data source. l Server - Name of the NetBackup Storage Server l Sub Name - Not applicable l Name - Name of the storage unit l Type - Type of storage server: master, client l Status - Status of the storage server l Administrative State - Administrative status: Up, Down l Internal State - Internal storage server status: Up, Down Network Interface Link Pair Returns information about connectivity between the interface on a switch and the host to which it is connected in a table report. Uses data from the Network Link Pair Duplex data source. For each interface on the switch, the report displays the host to which it is connected. For this report to perform correctly, data must be gathered from the host and from the switch. l Host name - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Host port - Name of the port l Host duplex - Duplex setting of the host l Switch name - Name of the switch l Switch port - Name of the switch port l Switch duplex - Duplex setting of the switch Network Interface Link Pair Autonegotiation Status Returns information about the autonegotiation status for both the switch and the network interface on the host machine to which it is connected in a table report. Uses data from the Network Link Pair Autonegotiation data source. This report allows users to identify when clients may be configured with different settings to the switch that can result in performance problems. 462 l Local Node - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Local Port - Name of the port l Local Autonegotiation - If selected, indicates that the interface on the host is configured to autonegotiate speed and duplex settings with the switch EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Remote Node - Name of the switch to which the host network interface is connected l Remote Port - Name of the interface on the switch to which the host is connected l Remote Autonegotiation - If selected, indicates that the interface on the switch is configured to autonegotiate speed and duplex settings with the host Network Interface Link Pair Duplex Status Returns information about the duplex settings for both interfaces on a switch and the network interface on the host machine to which it is connected in a table report. Uses data from the Network Link Pair Duplex data source. This report allows users to identify when clients may be configured with different settings to the switch that can result in performance problems. l Host name - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Host port - Name of the port l Host duplex - Duplex setting of the host l Switch name - Name of the switch l Switch port - Name of the switch port l Switch duplex - Duplex setting of the switch Network Interface Status Returns network interface status details in a table report. Uses data from the Network Interface Config and Network Interface Status data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Identifier for the Storage Array l Interface - Name of the interface l Description - Optional description for the interface l MAC Address - MAC address of the interface l Auto Neg - Indicates if the interface is set to auto negotiate l MTU - Maximum Unit of Transmission for the interface (largest packet size) (in bytes) l Failover - Standby interface if the primary interface goes down l Multicast - If enabled, the interface can send data to more than one address at the same time l Promiscuous - If enabled, all traffic is passed to the interface rather than just packets addressed to it l Simplex - If enabled, the interface messages are filtered and not displayed l Receive Buffer - Amount of data that can be received before sending a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used l Send Buffer - Amount of data that can be sent before receiving a reply (in bytes). If size is not specified on the interface, then the system-wide settings are used l Virtual - Indicates if the network interface is virtual or physical l Link Up - Indicate if the interface has a link with the switch Network Interface Link Pair Duplex Status 463 Reports by System Template l Speed - Speed at which the interface is running (Mb/second) l Full Duplex - Indicates if the interface is running at full duplex l Administrative Link Up - Indicates if the port has been disabled by an administrator l Jumbo Packets Enabled - Indicates that Jumbo Packets are enabled by default. Network IP Configuration Returns the configuration of the interfaces on a network in a table report. Uses data from the Network Interface IP Config data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Interface - Interface name. For HP-UX, the interface name consists of the PPA path, module name plus instance number, and driver name in brackets l Sub Name - If returning data for RecoverPoint Appliance, the name of the site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located. If returning data for EMC File Storage (Celerra), the name of the Data Mover l Sub Name 2 - Name of RecoverPoint Appliance l IP Address - IP address of the interface. There may be multiple IP addresses for each interface l Netmask - Network mask of the interface l Gateway - Gateway used by the interface l Broadcast - If selected, indicates that messages can be sent with no address and is sent to everyone listening l Boot Protocol - Boot protocol of the interface. For example, static, DHCP Network IP Configuration for IP Returns the configuration of the interfaces for IP on a network in a table report. Uses data from the Cluster Resource Mapping and Network Interface IP Config data sources. 464 l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Interface - Interface name. For HP-UX, the interface name consists of the PPA path, module name plus instance number, and driver name in brackets l IP Address - IP address of the interface. There may be multiple IP addresses for each interface l Sub Name - If returning data for RecoverPoint Appliance, the name of the site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located. If returning data for EMC File Storage (Celerra), the name of the Data Mover l Sub Name 2 - Name of RecoverPoint Appliance l IP Address - IP address of the interface. There may be multiple IP addresses for each interface l Netmask - Network mask of the interface l Gateway - Gateway used by the interface l Broadcast - If selected, indicates that messages can be sent with no address and is sent to everyone listening l Boot Protocol - Boot protocol of the interface. For example, static, DHCP EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Orphaned LUNs Returns orphaned LUNs in a table report. Uses data from the LUN Configuration and LUN Mapping data sources. l Node - Name of the array on which the LUN exists l Sub Name - Identifier for the storage array on which the LUN resides l Name - Name of the LUN Process Count Returns process count details in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Count data source. l Processes - Number of processes running on the host l Hostname - Name of the host on which the process is running l PID - Process identifier l Process Name - Name of the process l Process cmd - Full command line of the process l CPU - Percentage CPU that is being used by the process l Memory - Amount of memory that is being used by the process (in MB) Process Count By Host Returns process count by host details in a line chart. Uses data from the Process Count By Host data source. l Processes - Number of processes running on the host l Hostname - Name of the host on which the process is running l PID - Process identifier l Process Name - Name of the process l Process cmd - Full command line of the process l CPU - Percentage CPU that is being used by the process l Memory - Amount of memory that is being used by the process (in MB) Process Count Current Returns current process count details in a column chart. Uses data from the Process Count data source. l Process Count - Number of processes running on the host Process Status Returns the process status details in a table report. Uses data from the Process Status data source. When running the Process Status report from an object in the configuration tree, the report displays the status of any DPA processes that run on the selected objects. The report does not show the status of any agents that may be monitoring those objects remotely. Run the Process Status report from the DPA Server objects to view the Orphaned LUNs 465 Reports by System Template status of all DPA processes across all machines. This allows you to identify any processes that are not running. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the process is running l PID - Process identifier l Process Name - Name of the process l Process Command - Full command line of the process l CPU - Percentage CPU that is being used by the process l Memory - Amount of memory that is being used by the process (in MB) Processor Status Returns processor status in a column chart. Uses data from the Processor Status data source. l Count - Processor count Processor Status Details Returns processor status details in a table report. Uses data from the Processor Status data source. l Node - Object in which the processors are situated l ID - Processor number of the object l Sub Name - If returning data for RecoverPoint Appliance, the name of the site in which RecoverPoint Appliance is located. If returning data for EMC File Storage (Celerra), the name of the Data Mover l Sub Name 2 - Name of RecoverPoint Appliance l Online - Indicates if the processor is currently online PSU Status Returns power supply unit (PSU) status in a table report. Uses data from the PSU Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the PSU l Active - Indicates if the PSU is currently active l Status - Status of the PSU PSU Summary Summary of power supply unit (PSU) details in a column chart. Uses data from the PSU Status data source. l 466 Count - PSU count EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status Returns RecoverPoint consistency group copy status in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Status data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the consistency group l Enabled - Indicates if the consistency group is active l Active RPA - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance that is currently active for this Copy l Data Transfer - Status of Data Transfer for this Copy. For example, ACTIVE l Journal State - Current state of journal. For example, DISTRIBUTING IMAGES TO STORAGE l Storage Access - Current status of access to the storage for this copy. For example, DIRECT ACCESS, NO ACCESS l Current Protection Window - Time duration of the current protection window l Current Protection Window Status - Status of the current protection window l Predicted Protection Window - Predicted protection window value l Predicted Protection Window Status - Predicted protection window status l Average Compression - Average compression achieved l Link Mode - Link mode for CDP and CRR operations. For example, CONTINUOUS, CONTINUOUS ASYNC l Journal Mode - Journal Mode. For example, NORMAL l Journal Usage - Current usage of the journal (in MB) l Journal Capacity - (in MB) l Latest Journal Image - Timestamp of the most recent image l Journal Lag - Size of the journal lag (in MB) RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status for Active RPAs Returns RecoverPoint consistency group copy status for active RPAs in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Status data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the consistency group l Enabled - Indicates if the consistency group is active l Active RPA - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance that is currently active for this Copy l Data Transfer - Status of Data Transfer for this Copy. For example, ACTIVE l Journal State - Current state of journal. For example, DISTRIBUTING IMAGES TO STORAGE RecoverPoint Consistency Group Copy Status 467 Reports by System Template l Storage Access - Current status of access to the storage for this copy. For example, DIRECT ACCESS, NO ACCESS l Current Protection Window - Time duration of the current protection window l Current Protection Window Status - Status of the current protection window l Predicted Protection Window - Predicted protection window value l Predicted Protection Window Status - Predicted protection window status l Average Compression - Average compression achieved l Link Mode - Link mode for CDP and CRR operations. For example, CONTINUOUS, CONTINUOUS ASYNC l Journal Mode - Journal Mode. For example, NORMAL l Journal Usage - Current usage of the journal (in MB) l Journal Capacity - Capacity of the journal (in MB) l Latest Journal Image - Timestamp of the most recent image l Journal Lag - Size of the journal lag (in MB) RecoverPoint Event Details Returns RecoverPoint event details in a table report. Uses data from the RecoverPoint Events data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Time - Time the event occurred l Site - Site at which event occurred l RPA - Hostname or IP address of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Topic - One of: Management, Site, RPA, Group, Splitter l Scope - One of: Normal, Detailed, Advanced l Level - One of: Info, Warning, Error l ID - Identifier for the event l User - One of: Admin, Root, Webdownload l Groups - Names of the consistency groups l Summary - Summary of the log l Details - Log details RecoverPoint Event Summary Summary of RecoverPoint events in a column chart. Uses data from the RecoverPoint Events data source. 468 l Level - One of: Info, Warning, Error l Level Count - Count of level events l Type - Type of event EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template RecoverPoint Last 10 Event Details Returns the ten most recent events in the RPA environment in a table report. Uses data form the RecoverPoint Events data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Time - Time the event occurred l Site - Site at which event occurred l RPA - Hostname or IP address of the RecoverPoint Appliance l Topic - One of: Management, Site, RPA, Group, Splitter l Scope - One of: Normal, Detailed, Advanced l Level - One of: Info, Warning, Error l ID - Identifier for the event l User - One of: Admin, Root, Webdownload l Groups - Names of the consistency groups l Summary - Summary of the log l Details - Log details RecoverPoint RPA Active Consistency Groups Returns the consistency groups that are currently active for each RPA in a table report. Uses data from the Consistency Group Copy Status data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Active RPA - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance that is currently active for this Copy l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Name - Name of the Copy RecoverPoint Volumes Returns RecoverPoint volume details in a table report. Uses data from the RecoverPoint Volumes data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the management interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Name - Name of the volume l ID - Identifier for the volume l Vendor - Name of the vendor l Product - Name of the product l Model - Model of the volume l Size - Size of the volume (in MB) l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Copy - Name of the copy within the consistency group RecoverPoint Last 10 Event Details 469 Reports by System Template l Replication Set - Name of the replication set. If the volume is a Journal, this value will be NULL l Volume Type - Type of volume: Replication Set, Journal, Repository RecoverPoint Volumes for Replication Sets Returns RecoverPoint volume for replication set details in a table report. Uses data from the RecoverPoint Volumes data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the management interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Name - Name of the volume l ID - Identifier for the volume l Vendor - Name of the vendor l Product - Name of the product l Model - Model of the volume l Size - Size of the volume (in MB) l Consistency Group - Name of the consistency group l Copy - Name of the copy within the consistency group l Replication Set - Name of the replication set. If the volume is a Journal, this value will be NULL l Volume Type - Type of volume: Replication Set, Journal, RepositoryReplication Set Remote Mirror Status Returns remote mirror status details in a table report. Uses data from the Remote Mirror Status data source. l Source node - Name of the object on which the source mirror resides l Source path - Path to the mirror source l Mirror node - Name of the object on which the remote mirror resides l Mirror path - Path to the remote mirror l Mirror status - Current status of the remote mirror: Unsynchronized, Active, Broken, Quiesced, Updating l Last update - Last time this remote mirror was set to update from the source l Update size - Total size of the last update of this remote mirror (in KB l Exposure - (in seconds) Replication Status Returns Data Domain replication status details in a table report. Uses data from the Replication Performance and Replication Status data sources. 470 l Hostname - Hostname of replicating server l Source - Identifier for replication source l Destination - Identifier for replication destination l State - State of replication set EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Status - Status of replication set l Connection Time - Time connection was established l Throttle - Amount of data transfer to which replication is throttled l Destination Host - Unique identifier for the destination of replication l Synchronized - Indicates whether data is synchronized Tape Drive Cleaning Summary Summary that displays how many tape drives require cleaning in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l Count - Number of tape drives that require cleaning Tape Drive Count By State Returns the tape drive count by state in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l State - State of a drive l Count - Number of tape drives in the state Tape Drive Count By Status Returns tape drive count by status in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l State - State of a drive l Count - Number of tape drives in the state Tape Drive Status Returns tape drive status in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. For virtual tape drives, this report displays its tape library. However, the tape library of which a physical tape drive is a member is not displayed. For all drives, the Status field shows the health of the drive. For physical tape drives, the State field also indicates whether the tape drive is loaded with a volume or not. This information is not available for virtual tape drives. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the drive is attached l Library Name - If monitoring a device that manages multiple tape libraries such as an EDL Unit, this field contains the name of the library that in which the drive is located. In other situations, this field is not populated l Device name - Name of device l Soft Read Errors - Number of corrected read errors l Hard Read Errors - Number of uncorrected read errors l Soft Write Errors - Number of corrected write errors l Hard Write Errors - Number of uncorrected write errors l Status - Current status of a drive l Volume - Name of the volume currently loaded in the drive l Speed - Speed the interface is running at if Fibre attached (Mb/second) Tape Drive Cleaning Summary 471 Reports by System Template l State - State of a drive l Loop Id - Loop id of a drive if fibre attached l Num Loads - Number of times a tape has been mounted on that drive l Cleaning Required - Indicates if the tape drive currently requires cleaning l Virtual - Indicates if the tape drive is virtual Tape Library CAP Status Returns the status of any cartridge access ports in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Cap Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Address - Unique identifier of the CAP in the tape library l Status - Status of the CAP l Unlocked - Indicates if the CAP is unlocked l Open - Indicates if the CAP is open or closed Tape Library CAP Status Summary Summary of any cartridge access ports status in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Cap Status data source. l Status - Status of the CAP l Count - Number in the state Tape Library Empty Volume Count Returns tape library empty volume count details in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Volume Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device that is being monitored. Typically this field contains the name of the tape library, but it can contain the name of the device managing multiple libraries such as an EDL l Library Name - Name of the library. This field is only populated when the device being monitored supports multiple tape libraries, such as EDL l Count - Number of empty volumes Tape Library Slot Status Returns the volumes that are loaded into slots in each library on the virtual tape library in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Slot Status data source. For physical tape libraries, this report also contains information on the type of media. 472 l Hostname - Name of the device that is being monitored. Typically this field contains the name of the tape library, but this value can be the name of the device managing multiple libraries such as an EDL l Library Name - Name of the library. This field is only populated when the device being monitored supports multiple tape libraries, such as EDL l Address - Unique address of the element inside the tape library l Status - Indicates if the slot is loaded l Volume - Barcode of the volume in that slot EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Type - Type of virtual tape library l Virtual - Indicates if the tape library is a virtual tape library Tape Library Status Details Returns the status of individual tape libraries in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Status data source. For each library on the system, the report displays the hostname, the number of volumes in the library, and the status of the library. l Hostname - Name of the device being monitored. If monitoring a tape library directly, this field contains the library name. If monitoring a device such as an EDL that supports multiple libraries, this field contains the name of the EDL l Library Name - Name of the tape library. This field is not populated if monitoring a device directly. Instead its name is populated in the Hostname field. This field is populated if monitoring a device that manages multiple libraries such as an EDL l Status - Status of the library l Num Volumes - Number of volumes in the library l Virtual - Indicates if the library is virtual l State - Current active state of the tape library Tape Library Status Summary Summary of the tape library status in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Library Status data source. l Count - Number of tape library in status Tape Library Volume Status Returns tape library volume status details in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Volume Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the device that is being monitored. Typically this field contains the name of the tape library, but it can contain the name of the device managing multiple libraries such as an EDL l Library Name - Name of the library. This field is only populated when the device being monitored supports multiple tape libraries, such as EDL l Volume - Identifier for the volume l Size - Amount of data on the volume (in MB) l Virtual - Indicates if the volume is virtual or physical l Location - Location of the volume in the library l Location Type - Type of location in which the volume is located. For example, slot, drive l Pool - Pool that this tape is in l Type - Type of media l Data Type - Type of tape: data, clean, scratch l Entry Date - Date that the volume was entered into the library l Access Date - Last time the volume was accessed l Access Count - Number of times the volume has been accessed Tape Library Status Details 473 Reports by System Template l Max Use - Maximum number of times a volume can be used l Status - Status of the volume l Reorg - Reorganization status of the volume: Queued, Restoring, Save l Stale - Indicates if volume is stale: RESTORING, NULL l Migrated - Indicates the volume is no longer in cache and must be read in from the tape before next access: 0, 1, NULL l Dirty - Indicates the volume is in cache but has not been saved since the last change: 0, 1, NULL l Read Only Mount - Indicates if the last mount was read-only: 0, 1, NULL l Scratch Mount - Indicates if the last mount was a scratch mount: 0, 1, NULL l Scratch - Indicates if the volume is a scratch volume l Drive - Name of the drive, if volume is in use in a drive or was requested l Device - Device name of the logical drive, if volume is in use in a drive or was requested l Next Block - First block after last used block on a volume l Number Logical Volumes - Number of logical volumes stored on a physical volume l Number Valid Logical Volumes - Number of valid logical volumes stored on the physical volume l Valid Size - Amount of valid data on volume (in MB) l Valid Portion - Portion of data valid on volume l Tape Filesystem - Identifier for the tape file system l Library Device Name - Device name of the logical drive in library notation, if volume is in use in a drive or was requested l Capacity - Capacity of volume (in MB) l Compression Ratio - Ratio of data compressed to original size during backup Thermometer Status Returns thermometer status details in a table report. Uses data from the Thermometer Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the thermometer l Active - Indicates if the thermometer is active: 1 (active) l Temperature - Temperature currently registered by the thermometer (in Celsius) l Overheating - Indicates if the temperature is above an internal threshold Thermometer Summary Summary of information on any temperature sensors that are overheating in a column chart. Uses data from the Thermometer Status data source. l 474 Count - Number of thermometer sensors that are overheating EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Thermometer Trend Returns the changes in temperature over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Thermometer Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the thermometer l Temperature - Temperature currently registered by the thermometer (in Celsius) Thermometer Trend for Specific Thermometer Returns the changes in temperature over time for a specific thermometer in a line chart. Uses data from the Thermometer Status data source. l Node - Name of the object l Name - Name of the thermometer l Temperature - Temperature currently registered by the thermometer (in Celsius) TSM Client Filespaces Returns TSM client filespace details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Client Filespaces data source. l Server - Name of the TSM server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the backup client l Filespace Name - Name of the filespace l Filespace ID - Identifier for the filespace l Filespace Type - Type of filespace l Capacity - Size of the filespace (in MB) l Percentage Utilization - Percent of space used in the filespace l Backup Start - Time the last incremental backup of the filespace started l Backup End - Time the last incremental backup of the filespace ended l Delete Time - Time the filespace was last deleted TSM Client Occupancy Returns occupancy details broken down by TSM client in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy, TSM Audit Occupancy, and TSM Backup Set data sources. This report shows the total logical occupancy by client for backup sets, along with other client occupancy data. l Server - Name of the TSM server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client object l Type - Type of data stored: Backup, Archive, HSM l Filespace -Name of client filespace l Filespace ID- ID of the client filespace Thermometer Trend 475 Reports by System Template l Pool - Storage pool which contains the client filespace l Files - Number of active files l Physical - Amount of physical storage used (in MB). Physical space is the total space taken up by data for the filespace including space that is no longer active in itself but part of a set of data that is still active l Logical - Amount of logical storage used (in MB). Logical space is purely the space taken up by active data l Backup - Total backup storage use for the object (in MB) l Backup Copy - Total backup copy storage use for the object (in MB) l Archive - Total archive storage use for the object (in MB) l Archive Copy - Total archive copy storage use for the object (in MB) l Total - Total storage use for the object (in MB) TSM Database Status Returns TSM database status details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Database Utilization data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Buffer Pool Hit Ratio - Percentage ratio of buffer pool hits l Package Cache Hit Ratio - Percentage ratio of package cache hits l Buffer Requests - Number of buffer requests l Num Sort Overflows - Number of sorts that ran out of heap memory l Num Lock Escalations - Number of times row locks were escalated to table locks l Last Reorg Time - Time of the last database reorganization l Num Incremental Database Backups - Number of incremental database backups that have occurred since the last full database backup l Last Full Database Backup Time - Last time the database was fully backed up TSM Database Usage Returns TSM database usage details in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Database Utilization data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Object - One of: Database, Recovery Log l Usage - Amount of used space in the TSM database (in MB) TSM Database Volume Status Returns TSM database volume status details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Database Volumes data source. 476 l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Object - One of: Database, Recovery Log l Copy 1 Name - Name of the first copy l Copy 1 Status - Status of the first copy l Copy 2 Name - Name of the second copy l Copy 2 Status - Status of the second copy l Copy 3 Name - Name of the third copy l Copy 3 Status - Status of the third copy l Available Space - Amount of available space (in MB) l Allocated Space - Amount of allocated space (in MB) l Free Space - Amount of free space (in MB) TSM Defined Server Status Returns the TSM defined server status in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Defined Server Status data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Defined Server - Name of the defined server l Last Access - Date and time of last access l Last Session Bytes Sent - Number of bytes sent in the last sessions to the client object (in bytes) l Last Session Bytes Received - Bytes received by the server during the last client object sessions (in bytes) l Duration - Length of last client object session (in seconds) l Nodes - Name of the client object l Roles - One of: Storage Agent, Replication l Idle Wait Last Session - (percentage) l Comm. Wait Last Session - (percentage) l Media Wait Last Session - (percentage) TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details Returns TSM Identify Duplicate Process details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process ID - Identify Duplicates process ID l Storage Pool - Storage pool on which Identify Duplicates process is running l Volume - Volume of the storage pool on which Identify Duplicates process is running l State - Current state of the Identify Duplicates process l Current File Size - Size of current physical file in MB TSM Defined Server Status 477 Reports by System Template l Num. Duplicate Extents - Number of duplicate extents found by Identify Duplicates process on the storage pool l Num. Files Processed - Number of files processed by Identify Duplicates process on the storage pool l Total Dedupe Size - Total Duplicate size found by Identify Duplicates process on the storage pool in MB l Dedupe State Start Time - Dedupe start date/time TSM Identify Duplicate Process Trend Returns current and deduplicated size as a trend over time in a line chart. Uses data from the TSM Identify Duplicate Process Details data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Process ID - Identify Duplicates process ID l Storage Pool - Storage pool on which Identify Duplicates process is running l Dedupe Size - Total Duplicate size found by Identify Duplicates process on the storage pool in MB TSM Replication Node Status Returns TSM replication object status details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Replication Node Status data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Node Name - Name of the object l Replication Type - Type of replication l Filespace Name - Name of the filespace l FSID - Identifier for the filespace l Num. Files On Server - Number of files on the server l Replication Server Name - Name of the replication server l Num. Files On Replication Server - Number of files on the replication server TSM Replication Process Details Returns TSM replication process details in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Replication Process Details data source. 478 l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Summary ID - Summary identifier l Data Type - Type of data l Last Updated - User who last updated l Target Server - Name of the target server l Num. Files Needing No Action - Number of files needing no action EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Num. Files Replicated - Number of files replicated l Num. Files Not Replicated - Number of files not replicated l Num. Files Deleted - Number of files deleted l Num. Files Not Deleted - Number of files not deleted l Num. Files Updated - Number of files updated l Num. Files Not Updated - Number of files not updated l Size Replicated - Total size of data replicated (in MB) l Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Size Not Replicated - Total size of data not replicated (in MB) TSM Replication Process Summary Summary of the TSM replication process in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Replication Process Summary data source. l Id - Identifier that uniquely identifies this process on the server on which it ran l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Node Name - Name of the object l Filespace Name - Name of the filespace l FSID - Identifier for the filespace l Process ID - Unique identifier used by TSM to identify the process l Command - l Completion State - l Reason For Incompletion - l Total Files Replicated - Number of files replicated l Total Files Deleted - Number of files deleted l Total Files Updated - Number of files updated l Total Files Not Replicated - Number of files not replicated l Total Size Replicated - Total size of data replicated (in MB) l Total Size Transferred - Total size of the data transferred (in MB) l Total Size Not Replicated - Total size of data not replicated (in MB) TSM Device Path Status Returns TSM device path status in a table report. Uses data from the TSM Device Path data source. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Source - Name of the path source l Source Type - Type of path source l Destination - Name of the path destination l Destination Type - Path destination type TSM Replication Process Summary 479 Reports by System Template l Destination Library - Name of the destination path library if the type is a drive l Destination Node Name - Name of the device in the destination path l Destination Device - Name of the destination path device l Destination External Manager - Name of the external library manager, if applicable l LUN - Logical unit name (LUN) through which the disk can be accessed by the source l Initiator - Path initiator l Destination Directory - Directory location of a file on the source l Online - Indicates whether the path is online and available for use or offline l Last Updated - User who last updated the path l Last Update Time - Time of the last update TSM Filespace Summary Returns TSM filespace summary in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Occupancy and TSM Client Filespaces data sources. l Client - Name of the backup client l Occupancy - (in MB) l Filespace Size - (in MB) l Occupancy Ratio - (as a percentage) TSM LAN Free Server Status Returns the TSM LAN-free server status in a table report. Uses data from the TSM LAN Free Server Status data source. In DPA 6.0, LAN-Free Server Status is renamed Defined Server Status. LAN-free Server Status is supported for backwards compatibility; however, Defined Server Status is preferred going forward. l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l LAN Free Server - Name of the LAN-free Server l Last Access - Date and time of last access l Last Session Bytes Sent - Number of bytes sent in the last sessions to the client object l Last Session Bytes Received - Bytes received by the server during the last client object sessions l Duration - Length of last client object session (in seconds) l Node -Name of the client object TSM Recovery Log Usage Returns TSM recovery log usage in a column chart. Uses data from the TSM Database Utilization data source. 480 l Server - Name of the TSM Server l Sub Name - Name of TSM server instance l Object - One of: Database, Recovery Log EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Usage - Amount of used space in the TSM recovery log (in MB) Virtual Host Top 10 Longest Time Since Last Power On Returns information on the top 10 longest time since last power on in a table report. Uses data from the Virtual Host Status data source. l Virtualization Server - Hostname of a Virtualization Server managed by Virtual Centre l Virtual Host - Name of the Virtual Centre server l Status - Status of the virtual machine l CPU Used - CPU utilization of the virtual machine (in MHz) l Memory Used - Amount of memory used by the virtual machine (in MB) l Startup Time - Time virtual host was started VTL Status Returns VTL status details in a table report. Uses data from the VTL Configuration and VTL Status data sources. l Hostname - Hostname of the VTL l Capacity - Disk capacity of the VTL (in MB) l Used - Amount of disk capacity used by the VTL (in GB) l DeDupe Original - Size of data before deduplication (in MB) l DeDupe Reduced - Size of data backed up after deduplication (in MB) Xsigo Infiniband Port Status Returns status information on the InfiniBand ports in a table report. Uses data from the Infiniband Port Status and Infiniband Port Configuration data sources. l Hostname - Name or IP address of the Xsigo appliance l Linkup - Indicates if the link is active or down l Speed - Speed of the interface (MB/second) Troubleshooting system templates Troubleshooting reports provide information on any errors generated by the tape library or its tape drives. There are two sets of reports in the troubleshooting category that assist with detecting tape library and tape drive errors. These are: l Tape Library Errors l Tape Drive Errors Aggregate Fibre Channel Port Errors Returns information on Fibre Channel port errors in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance data source. l Errors - Number of bad frames received by the port l Errors Out - Number of bad frames sent by the port Virtual Host Top 10 Longest Time Since Last Power On 481 Reports by System Template l Discards In - Number of incoming frames discarded l Discards Out - Number of outgoing frames discarded l No Credits - Number of times that the port has been unable to transmit data due to a lack of buffer-to-buffer credits Fibre Channel Port Errors By Node Returns the total number of frame errors and total number of times that the ports have run out of buffer-to-buffer credits on all ports on a switch over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Errors - Number of bad frames received by the port l Errors Out - Number of bad frames sent by the port l Discards In - Number of incoming frames discarded l Discards Out - Number of outgoing frames discarded l No Credits - Number of times that the port has been unable to transmit data due to a lack of buffer-to-buffer credits Fibre Channel Port Errors By Port Returns the total number of frame errors and total number of times that the ports have run out of buffer-to-buffer credits on all ports on a switch over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Fibre Channel Performance By Port data source. l Hostname - Name of the object l Sub Name - Name of server instance, if applicable l Port - Port identifier. For example, Port 1 l Errors - Number of bad frames received by the port l Errors Out - Number of bad frames sent by the port l Discards In - Number of incoming frames discarded l Discards Out - Number of outgoing frames discarded l No Credits - Number of times that the port has been unable to transmit data due to a lack of buffer-to-buffer credits Network Interface Errors Returns network interface errors in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance data source. 482 l Errors In - Number of errors coming in to the interface (/second) l Errors Out - Number of errors leaving the interface (/second) l Discards In - Number of packets discarded coming in to the interface (/second) l Discards Out - Number of packets discarded leaving the interface (/second) EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template Network Interface Errors By Interface Returns network interface errors by interface in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Errors In - Number of errors coming in to the interface (/second) l Errors Out - Number of errors leaving the interface (/second) l Discards In - Number of packets discarded coming in to the interface (/second) l Discards Out - Number of packets discarded leaving the interface (/second) Network Interface Errors By Interface for ruleset Returns details for network interface errors by interface in a table report. Report for Network Interface reporting more than x% errors rule. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Interface, Report Times, and User Input data sources. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Sub Name - Name of the storage array l Interface - Interface name l Errors - l Maximum Percentage Errors - l Alert5 - l Alert6 - l Alert - Identifier of the alert Network Interface Errors By Node Returns network interface errors by object in a line chart. Uses data from the Network Interface Performance By Node data source. l Hostname - Name of the host on which the network interface is located l Errors In - Number of errors coming in to the object (/second) l Errors Out - Number of errors leaving the object (/second) l Discards In - Number of packets discarded coming in to the object (/second) l Discards Out - Number of packets discarded leaving the object (/second) RecoverPoint RPA Packet Loss Returns RecoverPoint RPA packet loss in a line chart. Uses data from the RPA Performance data source. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Site - Site at which the RecoverPoint Appliance is located l Name - Name of the RecoverPoint Appliance Network Interface Errors By Interface 483 Reports by System Template l Packet Loss - Packet loss on the network (as a percentage) Tape Drive Error Count Returns tape drive error count in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the drive is attached. If gathering tape drive information by monitoring a tape library directly, this field contains the tape library name. If gathering tape drive information from a unit that manages multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this field contains the name of that device l Device Name - Name of device l Soft Errors - Total of the soft read and write errors l Hard Errors - Total of the hard read and write errors Tape Drive Error Count By Node Returns tape drive error count by object in a column chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the drive is attached. If gathering tape drive information by monitoring a tape library directly, this field contains the tape library name. If gathering tape drive information from a unit that manages multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this field contains the name of that device l Soft Errors - Total of the soft read and write errors l Hard Errors - Total of the hard read and write errors Tape Drive Error Trend Returns tape drive error trend details in a line chart. Uses data from the Tape Drive Status data source. l Hostname - Name of the host to which the drive is attached. If gathering tape drive information by monitoring a tape library directly, this field contains the tape library name. If gathering tape drive information from a unit that manages multiple tape libraries such as an EDL, this field contains the name of that device l Library Name - If monitoring a device that manages multiple tape libraries such as an EDL Unit, this field contains the name of the library that in which the drive is located. In other situations, this field is not populated l Device Name - Name of device l Soft Read Errors - Number of corrected read errors l Hard Read Errors - Number of uncorrected read errors l Soft Write Errors - Number of corrected write errors l Hard Write Errors - Number of uncorrected write errors Tape Library Errors Returns tape library errors in a table report. Uses data from the Tape Library Errors data source. 484 l Hostname - Name of the host to which the device is attached l Error Code - Associated error code for the error in the tape library EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Severity - Severity of the error l Error - Error in the tape library l Count - Number of errors logged at the time l Action - Recommended action taken on error l Timestamp - Date and time of the error Viewlet system templates For more specific details on the various reports, select one of the reports described in the following sections. Backup KPIs Returns backup KPI details in a table report. Uses data from the Num Jobs, Backup Job Details, Backup Statistics, Restore Statistics, Total Size (MB), Backup Client Config, and Total Size Scanned (MB) data sources. l Successful Backups - Number of successful backups l Protected Data - Amount of protected data (in MB) l Total Backups - Total number of backups l Successful Restores - Number of successful restores l Total Restores - Total restores l Unprotected Clients - Number of unprotected clients Backup Size Distribution for Backup KPIs Drill down report for viewlet that shows the total data backed up over time in a line chart. Uses data from the Total Size and Total Size Scanned data sources. l Protected Data - Amount of protected data (in GB) Data Backed Up Daily for Backup KPIs Drill down report for viewlet that shows the total data backed broken down by daily interval in a column chart. Uses data from the Total Size and Total Size Scanned data sources. l Protected Data - Amount of protected data (in GB) Data Collection Agent Errors Returns data collection agent errors in a table report. Uses data from the Agent Configuration and Agent Errors data sources. l Agent Name - Name of the DPA data collection agent l Message - Error message that is returned l Start Time - Start time of the last failure l End Time - End time of the last failure l Version - Version of the agent Viewlet system templates 485 Reports by System Template Data Collection Agent Health Returns data collection agent health details in a table report. Uses data from the Agent Configuration, Agent Errors, and Agent Status data sources. l Count - Number of agents l Property - Data Collection Agents Down Returns data collection agent down details in a table report. Uses data from the Agent Configuration and Agent Status data sources. l Agent Name - Name of the DPA data collection agent l Version - Version of the agent Objects Not Meeting RPOs Returns objects not meeting RPOs in a table report. Uses data from the Objects Not Meeting RPO data source. l Node name - Name of the replicated object RecoverPoint Protected Capacity by System Returns the protected data capacity by the RecoverPoint System in a table. Uses data from the Consistency Group Data Protected and Consistency Group Copy Configuration data sources. l Server - Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) RecoverPoint Protected Capacity by CG Returns the protected data capacity by the RecoverPoint Consistency Group in a table. Uses data from the Consistency Group Data Protected and Consistency Group Copy Configuration data sources. l Consistency Group- Name or IP address of the Management Interface of the RecoverPoint cluster l Data Protected - Total amount of data protected (in MB) Unprotected Clients for Backup KPIs Drill down report for Backup KPIs viewlet that returns those clients without a successful backup in a table report. Uses data from the Backup Client Config, Last Backup Details by Client and Job, and Num Jobs data sources. 486 l Server - Name of the backup server on which the Job took place l Sub Name - Name of the TSM server instance l Client - Name of the client on the backup server l Domain Name - Name of the application domain EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide Reports by System Template l Time Since Last Backup - Time since the last backup Unprotected Clients for Backup KPIs 487 Reports by System Template 488 EMC Data Protection Advisor 6.2 SP3 Report Reference Guide

Dpa Report Reference Guide

Rating

Date

Size

Views

Categories

Share

Transcript